


.* ^*V •. 



♦ aV ^ . 



<*-^>* %"-W/>— « 'J 



?.."•♦ *c <*' 



°v .''saw **o* 






^ ^ 












V ** % '.' 






• -**S ••SW?-' V*\ 



^HA* «^ < ;/» 



"ov* 



• !••* *> 






>\.i^% 



.C° V ^^%°o ,/\'^\ *4*k°» 







o *© 



^ \ 




r o? 



a^ ;^i^^o' ip* 










*o • » * ^ 



r o«"S_^> 




<> **TV«* .,0 



^ 



o. *o • » * J\ 






•• V 















' .stf^>« 



>•*. 



;** . ♦* "^ \« »»* ^?- ^ •: 






/ "v^^V^ "\;^^>^ V'^Pv*' ^ 



THE 

MODERN GREEK GRAMMAR 



OF 



< 



FORMERLY ONE OF THE PROFESSORS IN THE GREEK COLLEGE OF 

S CIO; 

TRANSLATED FROM THE ORIGINAL FRENCH, 

BY 

THE REV. GPORGE WINNOCK, A.B. 

OF MAGDALEN HALL, OXFORD, 
CHAPLAIN TO THE FORCES IN THE IONIAN ISLANDS. 



Such parts as required, it will be found to have been so modified, as to adapt it pe- 
culiarly to the English Student, particularly with respect to Pronunciation, in the 
Arrangement of the Declensions, and in treating of the equivalent expression of 
Time in the conjugation of Verbs. 

The local situation of the Translator has afforded him manifest advantages ; and 
he trusts that the kindness of his Greek Friends, from various parts of the Continent 
of Greece, has enabled him to give a considerable increase of value to a Work already 
highly estimable. 




LONDON: 

PUBLISHED FOR THE TRANSLATOR, BY J. SOUTER, 73, ST. PAUL'S CHURCH 
YARD; AND SOLD BY RIVINGTON AND CO. WATERLOO PLACE; PARKER AND 
CO. OXFORD ; AND DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE. 

1825. 

[Entered at Stationer's Halt.'] • 






^ 



j 



TO 

HIS EXCELLENCY 

SIR FREDERICK ADAM 

KNIGHT GRAND CROSS OF THE MOST DISTINGUISHED ORDER OF 
S. 1 MICHAEL AND S. 1 GEORGE, 

KNIGHT COMMANDER OF THE MOST HONOURABLE MILITARY ORDER 

OF THE BATH, 
KNIGHT OF THE AUSTRIAN IMPERIAL MILITARY ORDER OF 

MARIA TERESA, 

KNIGHT OF THE RUSSIAN IMPERIAL ORDER OF 
S.« ANN OF THE FIRST CLASS , 

THE PROTECTING SOVEREIGN'S 
LORD HIGH COMMISSIONER 

TO THE UNITED STATES OF THE JONIAN ISLANDS 

AND 

LIEUTENANT GENERAL COMMANDING THE FORCES 
SERVING IN THE SAME , 

8$c. , §•<?. , 85c. 

This humble attempt to facilitate to his Countrymen the acquisition 
of the present Language of Greece is respectfully 
Dedicated 

My the 

EDITOR. 



ADVERTISEMENT, 



J. he proposal of a New Grammar lias in it certainly 
nothing very extraordinary to Englishmen , particularly 
since Foreign Languages have been so much more studied 
than formerly. Commerce and Travelling, and the conse- 
quent interest and curiosity aiioiit flip. "Literature , Anti- 
quities, Customs, Manners and Resources of almost every 
People , have of late greatly quickened the zeal of cur 
.Countrymen in Philological Pursuits. New Grammars of 
the French and Italian Languages, though they have long 
since attained a high classical character , are continually 
issuing from the British press. 

In a language till lately little cultivated, even amongst 
those who speak it, it is not to he wondered at , that a 
good Grammar should long be a desideratum ; and that 
many attempts should be made , before any thing like 
an approximation to excellence should be attained : but 
this is least of all to be wondered at in a Language flow- 
ins; directly from a source of the very highest celebrity 
in Literary Annals , from the Language of Homer. The 
Greeks themselves who write on the subject , wish very 
naturally to overleap , if it were possible , the Great Gulf, 
the corruptions of ages , lying between them and their 
far famed Ancestors , and to bring their Disciples into 
immediate contact with the perfection of speech. This is 
Utterly impracticable. 



VI 

It has been almost invariably the misfortune of those 
who have written before this Author to perplex rather 
than illustrate their subject. Nothing previously written 
by a Foreigner could lay any just claims to the Title of 
a Grammar. All attempts of the kind by natives have been 
so very meagre as to afford little assistance to Foreigners: 
many have been more perplexing than useful even among 
themselves, from being shackled by some unbending Theory, 
or from a very natural propensity to lean more, than at 
the present epoch is justifiable, to their Ancient Classics. 

Of these latter Athanasius Chris topulo is considered to 
have higher pretensions than most of his contemporaries ; 
but even he has spent more than one third of his small 
Volume on matter quite irrelevant , wherever his Student 
is not already a deeply read Hellenist , His sixty two first 
pages are devoted to proving that the proper Name of the 
existing Language would beiEolo-Doric; it being manifestly, 
according iu inm , little more than a substitution , Gr ge- 
neral prevalence of the /Eolic and Doric Dialects over all 
the others of Ancient Greece. Little of general utility could 
be expected from such a work as this. The Grammar of 
Darvaris , as far as foreigners are concerned , has even 
lower pretensions. Are we then to stop till the language 
be perfect , be as classical as its Parent, before Merchants 
and Travellers , unacquainted with Ancient Greek , are to 
have a guide for the exigencies of the Day, 

Chris topulo , aware of the warping partialities, and very 
general failure of his countrymen, gives them this excellent 
counsel: though his Devotion to his own Creation , the 
./Eolo- Doric Theory , has made him almost as regardless of 
General Usefulness as others. 

» An Author who writes a Grammar ( he says ) ought 
» to compose it with a reference , not to what he wishes 
» a Language should be , but to what the Language ? he 
» undertakes to teach , actually is. Otherwise it is not a 
» Grammar , but like the Monster in Homer » 



VII 

» rif -or 0e Atciy, gwiQiv ll Afzxav , (j.iucnll X'y.cLifz.D 

The Translator must trespass on his Reader's patienca 
for one moment more; and he will then leave him with 
his Author. That a Work of this nature , tolerahly well 
■executed , has long been desired by that part of the 
British Public interested in the subject, will be , he is 
sure , universally allowed. Whether his Readers will think 
as highly as himself of the Original ; Whether , by translat- 
ing, modifying and adapting the Work to the use of the 
English Student , he have in any degree supplied the chasm 
in the series of Philological Auxiliaries ; or whether he 
have but added one to the almost daily disappointments 
of the Literary World, he must submit ? with hopes of 
indulgence, to the Public. 

If, however , the Work be of any Value to an English- 
man , it is most certainly worthy of appearing in an 
English Costume , for as, in sound Logic, it is a manifest 
error to explain one Term by another , more, or equally 
obscure or difficult , and it is the perfection of illustration 
to use the easiest and most explicit ; so in a Science , 
materially connected , as Grammar is, with sound reason- 
ing, it is at length , fortunately, deemed an absurdity to 
teach one foreign Language through the medium of ano- 
ther , whenever the Master can avail himself of the lan- 
guage of his pupil. 



THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 



Another Grammar! and after that Grammar probably 
very shortly a double Dictionary. What a multitude of 
Books to learn Nothing ! When will men speak one lan- 
guage only ? When will one Grammar and one Vocabulary 
alone be sufficient to enable Men from pole to pole to 
understand each other? I join the Friends of Science in 
their philosophic Wish , and am no more inclined than 
they , to burthen my memory with words and phrases , 
without the acquisition of a single additional idea. But 
since this aspiration will not , it is probable , be very 
soon attended to ; and the imperfection inherent. in human 
nature will long, and perhaps for ever, maintain a differ- 
ence of idioms , I think that to increase their means of 
understanding , and of communicating with each other , 
is to render a real service to Men , as well as to Science. 
And if what has been often repeated be true, that there 
is no book so bad as to contain nothing good , how much 
more certain it is , that there is no people ; whatever may 
be its state of civilization and mental advancement, with 
which it is not interesting to be made acquainted , and 
which may not furnish some curious observation , some 
useful lesson to the sage. But this proposition , true in 
general , is much more so with respect to the Greeks , 
who are the descendants of the Ancient Preceptors of the 
Human Race , of that Sublime Nation which is the settled 
object of our grateful admiration. It is more particularly at 
such a juncture as the present , when , by generous efforts 
and Heroic Sacrifices , they are struggling to regain their 
liberty 9 and raise themselves to #ie distinguished eminence 



X 

of their ancestors, that it becomes peculiarly interesting to 
form relations , and be made acquainted with them. To 
this end the study of their language is indispensable : and 
this consideration, of having a real and general object of 
utility in view, has enabled me to overcome the repugnance 
I felt to retouch a subject I had treated in a former work, 
and to frame an elementary Grammar of the Modern Greek 
Language. 

Many persons , whose Judgment and Learning I esteem, 
have advised me to give a French translation of my lately 
published comparative view or parallel of the Ancient and 
Modern Greek languages. But I have not deemed it expe- 
dient to adopt their advice. That was a book written for 
Hellenists , and they have no need of a translation to 
enable them to understand it. Those who are unacquainted 
with the the Ancient language would . not understand it 
better in French than in Greek; and it would be very far 
from being sufficient for removing the difficulties in the 
study of the existing language. 

A book therefore was wanting, which should treat ex- 
clusively of the Modern Greek Language , and enable 
those , who have no knowledge of the Hellenic or Ancient 
Greek , to study it. Such is the Work I have undertaken, 
and which I now present to the public. It was a deside- 
ratum in our language, and, I believe, in every language of 
Europe , the German excepted , which has a Grammar of 
the Modern Greek framed by Erdmann Schmidt, a sworn 
public Interpreter of that Language. 

This work did not fall into my hands till after I had 
closed my labours, and I do not regret it. It is a confused 
medley of principles and forms of the ancient and modern 
Greek , an undigested chaos , combining the simplest 
principles of general Grammar with a few rules peculiar 
to the Greek , always ill conceived , awkwardly developed, 
and frequently faulty. The Author for example gives the 
conjugation of the ancient verbs in yu. To what purpose ? 
What remains of it is so trifling, that it may without 



XI 

disadvantage be classed amongst those of irregular Verbs. 
Its display of Hellenic and obsolete forms is calculated only 
to disgust youth with the study of a language, which is in 
itself already sufficiently difficult, and needs not that those 
who teach it , instead of smoothing the course , should 
render it more rugged. Such a work was not of a character 
to induce me to change my plan. I have confined myself 
to the language now m use , without establishing any 
comparison with the Hellenic , whence it is derived. I often 
notice different forms; but all I notice are in present use, 
and I am careful to inform my Reader which is the most 
correct. 

The Modern Greek preserves some few trifling phrases,, 
some forms and turns of speech, as vestiges of the Hellenic. 
This trifling number of exceptions to general usage has not 
induced me to increase the bulk of this elementary work 
with nominal or verbal forms , which have no analogy with 
the existing language, and in which they are quite isolated. 
Is it necessary that I should admit the dative, for example, 
into the declension , because persons sometimes say h koli^ 
apropos, by the bye , b J, while. Certainly not. I think 
that , in the present state of the language all these 
formulae should be considered as belonging to the Dic- 
tionary. 

I cannot say the same of certain tenses of the ancient 
conjugation, which Authors sometimes employ , such as the 
Aorist of the Participle fyc. It would certainly be right to 
make the student of Modern Greek acquainted with them 
But this is no sufficient reason for admitting them into the 
Grammar of that language. They do not as yet form any 
integral part of it ; and if Authors sometimes employ them, 
it is always temperately , and with a view to enrich the 
language , and raise it above itself by well timed experi- 
ments. As for us we ought to incorporate with it that only 
which actually belongs to it. We refer therefore our Readers, 
to Grammars of the Ancient language, for all Hellenic forms,/ 
which are not given here , and seize the opportunity of as- 



XII 

suring them most unreservedly, that the sole means of at- 
taining any eminent success in the study of the Modern 
Greek is to know the ancient, as well with respect to the 
Grammar as the Dictionary. 

In the present state of infancy of the Modern language 
Authors are daily borrowing from the ancient turns of 
phraseology Words and Idioms ; so that it is impossible to 
determine where , in elementary Books , a stand should be 
made , or to draw a precise line of demarcation between 
the two languages. 

We have given but few principles or elementary Pvules , 
but we have endeavoured that all given should be just and 
explicit. Our Syntax, though short, is a brief collection of 
the most generally used idiomatic forms or peculiarities. 
All the phrases therein adduced are exact , and properly 
constructed. We have avoided the error, with which we 
have reproached Schmidt who has frequently given , as 
examples of his pretended rules, phrases incompatible with 
the genius and construction of the Greek language , more 
calculated to mislead than to inform the Reader. Thus 
page 198 after having proposed as an example of the con- 
struction of the article the following elevated style of phrase, 
lid rx now/uLJLTcLTV d^a va.ro; 6'fAvifo(, Homer immortal through, 
or on account of his poems , cites this as more in use, 
h tiifivifOQ a&mtiTot lix V Hoivhioltoltv ; that is he substi- 
tutes a solecism for a correct phrase. I have shewn 
Chapter 29 , § 3 how it ought to be corrected. Page 197 , 
lie gives us this macaroni construction as elegant , 
iTTotivu rhv t« juoSyitv iTTiuikti-iv , I commend the Scholars dili- 
gence « es ist zierlicher und edler, » says he, it is more 
elegant and sustained. He might have said that it was Hel- 
lenic of the lower ages ; for in this language one should 
rather express nimself thus, lir&up toy f^xhrnv tyiq kirtptxtia.e % 
so that what he recommends as elegant and sustained, is 
neither good ancient nor Modern Greek. We could prove 
from a variety of other examples that Schmidt has not seized 
lie genius of the Greek language , but we shall content 



XIII 

ourselves with these two , and no longer trifle with the 
patience of our reader. 

We shall close with observing that the Book we now 
present to the public is an Essay , which may receive 
ulterior developement ; but such as it is , it will prove 
sufficient to enable the Reader to prosecute alone his 
study of the Modern Greek. Should this essay be well 
received by the public, we propose , in a second edition, to 
enrich it with exercises and a more copious collection of 
examples, as customary in Grammars of Modern Languages, 
without making any change in the Rules, which we consider 
sufficiently developed. We have endeavoured to hold a 
mean course between conciseness and prolixity. 



XV 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



Chap. i. Of Pronunciation Pag. I 

2. — Accent - Enclitics 4 

3. — Signs used in Writing - Aspirates - Iota under- 

written - Apostrophe - Stops ir 

4- — Words — Numbers, Genders, Cases i3 

5- — Declensions, and of the Article . — 

6- — First Declension Isosyllabic . i5 

7. — Second Declension Isosyllabic 17 

8- — Third Declension Isosyllabic- ..... ....... 20 

/ 9- — First Declension Imparisyilabic 22 

IO - — Second Declension Imparisyilabic. ......... 24 

11. — Heteroclites 26 

l2 - — Augmentatives and Diminutives. . . 29 

*3. — Comparatives and Superlatives . . 3o 

T 4. — Nouns of Number. . 3i 

*5. — Pronouns Personal. ................. 34 

16. Possessive. . 35 

T 7. Demonstrative ................ 36 

18. — Relative. ................... $7 

x 9- Reflective. .............. ; ... 38 

2 °- Interrogative ................. 39 

21 • — — — Indefinite. .................. 4o 

22. — Verbs 4i 

2 3. — Conjugation 4i 

2 'i. — Formation of the Tenses - Augment - Character- 
istic - Termination 4^ 

2 5- — Compound Tenses. 43 

2 '°- — Fpao-oj Barytoned Active Voice. 45 

— Ffsboua'. Passive Voice ....... ........ 5l 

— IIocT-co circumflex ed from s« Active. ........ 57 

1 — nar-ojaa'. from zcu.xi Passive 60 

Tta-o from tta Active 64 

— KQifjt.-wp.ai from asu.su Passive . 67, 

1 — Ei^.ai ......................... 7C 

2 7- — Remarks on Verbs - their Accent .......... 74 

The Characteristic and its Changes 75 

Certain instances of syncope ........ i ..• 80 

28. — List of Irregular Verbs ....... .. .... i . . 8a 



XVI 

SYNTAX. 

Chap. 29. Of the Article ....... 8$ 

30. — Numbers. ........... 5 * • 90 

3 1 . — Nouns of Number . . * * . . — ■ 

3a. — Pronouns Personal, 91 

33. — — — Possessive-relative 94 

34. — — — Demonstrative 95 

35. — Relative . — 

36. Reflective , . • 96 

37. — Interrogative 97 

38. Indefinite 98 

39. — Oblique Cases - Genitive 99 

— Accusative. . 100 

40. — Comparatives and Superlatives 102 

4 1. — The Verb - its Voices io3 

42. — Tenses io5 

43. — Moods - Indicative and Subjunctive 109 

— Infinitive 112 

— Participle. ..*.. u3 

44- — Prepositions n4 

45. — Adverbs 118 

46. — Conjunctions 122 

APPENDIX. 



SECTION I, 

Of the Alphabet and its Sounds -'..;. 129 

— Syllabication 

— Accent - when alone the Sign of the grave should 

be used 

— General Rules for accenting Nouns and Verbs. . . . i3o 
■ — Vulgar Mode of declining Nouns i3i 

SECTION II. 

Principles on which the Greek Tenses are translated. i36 



Dialogues. 

Onomasticon or Vocabulary^ 






CHAPTER I. 



OF PRONUNCIATION. 



\\ hat is said in the original on this subject , having 
reference to the French language only ? I shall substitute 
an attempt to illustrate the Modern pronunciation of the 
Creek Vowels , Consonants and Diphthongs , with reference 
to the English Alphabet; and, where that is impossible , 
I shall give as correct an analysis, as J am able. x b£ 
the Greek articulation. 



CO 



(?) 





NAMES 


ENGLISH. 


Act 


Alpha as 


A in Father, 


B p g 


Veta 


V. 


r T r 


Gamma 


G. 


A S 


Thelta 


Th in Them. 


E 6 


Epsilon 


A and EinJle 7 Me)\^~*'<'z? s$w» 


t I 


Zeta 


Z. 


H 4 


Eta 


E in Me. 


© 


Theta 


Th in ^Ae/n^. 


I i 


Eota 


E in ?ne. 


R K 


Kappa 


K, 


A X 


Lamtha 


L. 


M (x 


Me 


M, 


N v 


Ne 


N. 


2 5 


Xe 


X in Axiom and never as in 




r 


Alexander^ as fo 7 not s>s gx 


o 


Omicron 


in hone. 


n r, 


Pee 


P. 


p p 


line 


tli 



(4) 



2 at 


Sisrma 


S in Us, never as in Is y except 
before [3, & and ^ 


T T 


Taf 


T. 


I ». 


Ypsilon 


E in me. 


<l> 9 


Phee 


Ph. 


X X 


Khee 


Rh. 


¥ <j/ 


Psee 


Ps. 


£1 (a 


Ome<ia 


The two Os 'are pronounced 
iii the same manner by all 
modern Greeks. 



1'i as. A in Ale.. 

Ei- E in /^e. 

Oi E in me. 

Oy U in Druid. 

Xi us E in //?e. 

p, J <^ before p.y S^'[xv p and the Vowels as i „* English, 



dC < before the other letters as > ,/. English, 

(i) r This letter has two very different sounds, one hard 
or guttural before a o to, and before a v p : it exactly answers 
to the German G in the words. Lage, Tage, gutturally pro-* 
nounced , as in the south : it is very nearly , if not exactly, 
met by the sound in the beginning of the Gaelic Words 
« dhomb » in « thoir dhomb » give me , and a dhruadhach » 
the brides maid. To the South Briton it may be well to 
observe, that it very nearly, if not exactly, corresponds with 
the sound produced, by attempting to sound a g before an 
h aspirated, in the words g-heart g-hom g-home The soft 
or liquid sound , used before the slender vowels , and the 
diphthongs of equivalent force, is exceedingly easy: it is, as 



3 
hearly as fossinte, that of y in yes. , year. Before y x ; % 
it has the nasal sound of ng English. 

( y before yx^» 
fi) N Is changed into ( (/, before B [j. t: <p <f*. 
( X p o- before X p cr. 

(3) II. This letter, when subjoined to M, is sounded as B 
English: Tobacco is, by the Greeks, spelt ?a[/,Traxxo. Whatever 
might have been the sound attached by the Ancients to [3 , 
the Moderns have no single sign for the English articula- 
tion of B. 

(4) T. The Modern Greeks have no sign for the English 
sound of D; but t after v has this sound, even when the v is 
in one word, and the t in the following ; as tov Tponrov 
is sounded ton dropon. 

(5) X; The sound of this letter is unknown to the Natives 
of the South of Britain; but is very familiar to the Scotch > 
Irish, Welsh, Spanish, and German ear; though, as a neces- 
sary caution, it should be observed, that the Greek y , as 
pronounced by females , or persons at all attentive to 
euphony, is perhaps the softest modification of a guttural 
aspirate in any language , and adds great beauty to the 
Romaic. Indeed, when it is very softly pronounced , as it 
often is by females, it has so very slight a guttural sound , 
that, to the unpractised ear, it would appear purely palatial. 
It is produced by making the breath sensibly strike the 
palate in its utterance, with a very slight sound of R before 
it as k-here. The following are very nearly the same sound?. 

Scotch Irish Welsh Spanish 

. Ch in . Ch in Ch in J in 

Loch Lochy Auchnacloy Sach Gijou 



Italian 


German 


by Florentines 


ch in 


in 




Casa Cosa, 


Welchen 



CHAPTER II. 

OF ACCENT. 

I shall in this chapter omit all said by the Author thai 
exclusively bears on the French Language , except such 
observations as appear better calculated to illustrate the 
subject to an English Reader, than any illustration drawn- 
from his own language. 

i . The Accent of the Greeks is an elevation of voice , 
communicated to one of the syllables of a word , so that 
that syllable , striking the ear in a more sensible and 
emphatic manner , appears to predominate over the rest. 
Thus , the peculiar office of Accent is to regulate the mo* 
dulation and cadence of pronunciation. It affects only th^ 
Ultimate, Penultimate, and Antepenultimate syllables. 

2. The Modern Greeks write with the Accent: All Books 
are printed with it: It is not, however, as far as the Greek 
is concerned,, necessary-. He , when he first learns a word, 
learns with it, its accent; and there is no Native, who would 
not read his language with an equally exact pronunciation ? 
whether the book were accented or not. The custom of 
marking, with. a peculiar sign, the point of elevation of tha 
voice was introduced by ancient Grammarians, to enable 
them to teach the Language to Foreigners, (i) 

3. Three signs are in use to indicate the accent or eleva* 
tion of the voice on a syllable , the acute ('), the grave (*)^ 
and the circumflex ("). The acute and the grave have always 
been equivalents , though they have affected different parts 
of a word: but it is highly probable , that the circumflex 
originally served to indicate a different elevation of voice 



(i) Just as we see in the Italian Translation of the Peruvian Ici> 
ters, for the use of persons learning that language, though by Ita* 
lians themselves marks of accent are £mt rarely use& 



5 

from that signified by the other two, since it was pecuharly 
applied to the long vowels. This alone sufficiently shews , 
that it was the sign of a different inflection of Voice from 
that indicated bv the acute or crave accent , which wer@ 
indifferently applied to the long or short Vowels. This dis- 
tinction in cadence , or inflexion of Voice, whatever it might 
have been, has been lost, together, with the precise charac- 
ter of quantity. The modern Greeks pronounce all the ac- 
cents in the same manner , and pay no attention to what 
we call quantity. 

4- The acute accent may be applied indifferently to the 
three last syllables , the circumflex to the two last, but the 
grave to the last only. 

6. When the Acute Accent is on the last syllable , th©- 
word is called O^utovov , when on the penult iuapo£tfrovov y 
when on the Antepenult T^oo-apoJuTovov , A Word, with the* 
circumflex on the last syllable, is called ireptctrw^svov, on the- 
penult, TCpo-TCspi<7rcw(/.£vov. Lastly a Word with the grave ac- 
cent on the only syllable to which it is applicable, the last, is 
called papuTovov. Every Word, not having the acute or cir- 
cumflex on the last syllable , is considered to have the grave, 
arid is gapuTovov. (1) 

7. All Words , with the exception of some few monosyl- 
lables , have an accent , because ail have one syllable parti- 
cularly marked by emphasis , or an elevation of voice. 

8. This accent undergoes a change of character and posi- 
tion (2). In its movements, it sometimes passes from the ante- 
penult to the penult , as 6 avOpcorro; the Man , too avOpwTrou , 
of the Man ; from the antepenult and the penult to the 



(1) As these definitions will frequently occur, and could not be 
expressed without continual periphrases , I shall adopt them in the 
neuter , as epithets of the -word Mjud , and give them their regular 
plurals, as established in our Language, in the instance of Pheno- 
menon, Phenomena. 

(a To avoid confusion I shall confine the word change to change 
'. ;hara«tei" ; and adopt the word movement far change of position. 



6 

final ; as otl jxcMr^nai , the pupils , ray fjLGthTftQv , of the 
pupils ; olj ywoum, the Women, iw ywxixw. It changes its 
form, when the acute is substituted for the circumflex; as 
Kr/Aolfpt fate, t;k (toilets of fate, or the circumflex for the 
acute; as h {afrit. % the simpleton, rol {ocfiou, of the simpleton ; 
and the grave for the acute, in the course of a phrase ; as 
h.{a£oQ avfy(a<aroQ , the silly man. 

The whole Theory of accent in the ancient Language was 
grounded on quantity. This determined its nature , and 
regulated its changes and movements. Quantity having no 
existence in the modern Language , accent is now almost 
independent ; and thence is subject to much less move- 
ment, but it is very far from being, as the Author states, 
« nearly as fixed as in the Italian. » If so, there would have 
been no need of his numerous special Rules, subjoined to his 
several forms of Declension. 

The rules for its movement, because it affects the pro- 
nunciation , must , indispensably , be known ; but not those 
for the change of form , from acute to circumflex ; as 
o ^uaGnTwc, the pupil, rov (jLo&viTcv , of the pupil ; or from the 
circumflex to the acute; as rb vw^a , the body, tgu a-J^xro^ of 
the body. As this change of form in no way affects the pro- 
nunciation , and is merely a mark or sign in orthography , 
it is almost useless that a person should know it, if his sole 
object be the modern Language. We refer those , who wish 
to be thoroughly informed ^on this subject , to the numerous 
Grammars of the ancient Greek. 

If a person's main object be to make himself understood 
by Greeks , and to unjderstand them , I would advise him , 
at first, to attempt only what is indispensable , with respect 
to accent; that is, to acquaint himself with what is called 
the primitive accent of Words , and the more prevalent 
changes of its position , without regarding its change of 
character, from acute to circumflex , or the reverse. The 
Greek understands what is written, as well without accent 
as with : . all the accents affect pronunciation equally ; and 
therefore in a Man's effort to acquire a copia verboram for 



oral intercourse , it is onlv necessary, as to all inflexions 4 - 
by habit, and an attention to the more common principles ? 
to learn where a word is to be accented , without caring how. 
When the copia Verhorwn is once acquired , the .mystery 
will, almost without an effort , gradually unfold itself. Exam- 
ples and Exceptions will then readily present themselves ; 
and a difficulty which , unseasonably encountered , has 
excited disgust , and deterred numbers from prosecuting the 
study of the Language , will be insensibly stript of all its 
forbidding character. 

Mons. r David's Detail of the variations of accent accom- 
panies the several forms of Declension, given in the regular 
course of the grammar , which are the forms used in most 
Modern Greek Books of any reputation. Reference is made 
to the appendix , in every instance where the Vulgar de- 
cline such Words , or class of Words , in any way differ- 
ently: that difference is there pointed out; and at the same 
time the liberties taken by the Vulgar , with respect to ac- 
cent , are noticed. I trust this Mode will enable a person 
utterly unacquainted with the Language to commence his 
study with ease , and to avail himself of the different for- 
mulae, according to his progress. TSo one can have a tole- 
rably correct idea of the Modern forms of declension , 
without an opportunity of comparing them with their proto- 
types. It indeed would be altogether impossible y without a 
reference , to class them at all ; but the variations being , 
in some instances , considerable , they ought to be kept 
distinct, that a person may, at pleasure, apply his attention 
undividedly to his more immediate object. Instead of the 
Author's Special Rules for almost every form of each de- 
clension, which are exceedingly perplexing, and difficult to 
bear in mind, I have attempted to reduce the Rules to 
a small number, applicable generally, and resting on the 
leading principles of the Theory of Quantity ; though for 
common purposes they do not require a knowledge of it. 
I will not venture to say that they will admit of no exceptions: 
but I think they will admit but of few. 



8 

These I have annexed to the Forms in the Appendix ; 
hut I have not that degree of confidence in them , that will 
allow me to substitute them for those of the Author ; of 
which I have in the first part of the Treatise given the? 
substance , though with an attempt at greater perspicuity. 
Any set of Rules not embracing the whole Theory of 
quantity, as it affects accent, and not noticing its many 
exceptions, can he but an approximation towards precision ; 
hut where the difficulties in the way of infallibility are so 
great , I am persuaded approximations will , by all but 
pedants, be indulgently received. To them neither the lan- 
guage of which we treat can, in its present slate, be a wor- 
thy object of criticism ; nor can any work, making an 
humble attempt to assist those in acquiring it, who aim not 
at scholastic fame. 

For the due placing of the accent in pronunciation, two 
points must be ascertained , the primitive accent , and its 
movements, or change of position. That is termed the primi- 
tive accent, which belongs to a word in its primitive state, or 
before it undergoes any grammatical change from de- 
clension , conjugation , juxtaposition etc. ft is on the 
nominative singular of nouns , and in verbs, on the 
first person singular of the present tense indicative. The 
primitive accent being once ascertained, its movements , 
and even its changes of form are easily determined. We will 
endeavour to indicate both , particularly its movements , in 
the course of our observations on the Declensions and 
'Conjugations : hut , as to the primitive accent , use alone 
can teach it. That of Verbs is easy : it is sufficient to know, 
whether they be Barytona, or Perispomena; but that of 
Kouns and indeclinable words is more varied and difficulty 
Ear, and a quickness of observation can alone secure precis 
sion in this particular (x)» 



(i) At least unless a man ehoose to burthen his Memory with all 
the Rules of Prosody , and the very numerous exceptions to theui. 



9 

Another important acquisition, on this head, is a know- 

ledge of the v'uvi'Cwk , or fusion of Vowels. This species o£ 



contraction , whereby two or more vowels form but one 
articulation , is much in use in Modern Greek. We have it 
in English , and may thence form an accurate idea of it. It 
corresponds with the union of io in tion, ia in tian, and the 
fusion of the y with its following vowel in yellow, young, etc. 
Thus, in Modern Greek, the Word sra/W children, consists 
hut of two syllables in sound , though it has really three , 
id. being blended , as indicated by the acute accent on tha 
final vowel. If it be wished that the two vowels should be 
separately sounded , the acute accent must be placed on 
the / , and the word be written as in ancient Greek, craiS/a. 
This termination must otherwise be pronounced, as an 
Englishman would pronounce ia in Justinian, as though 
it were written Jus-tin-yan, where there are evidently only 
three syllables in sound. 

This fusion of Vowels sometimes occurs in the middle 
of Words ; and then the accent appears to be placed a 
syllable farther back than it really is; thus, in eV/«to<ra, / 
have perceived, it may seem that the fourth syllable from the 
end of the Word is accented; but that fourth in appearance 
is but the third, or antepenult in sound ; since the syllables 
01 and u are blended in the pronunciation: vvmfiewt, azoriuxat, 
it is cloudy , it is gloomy , are pronounced in the same 
manner. 

A v before the wyi'Qvis is sounded as gn in french and Ita- 
lian, in ognon, degno, pronounced in English, otvn-yong, 
den-yo-, thus jwctaca should be pronounced, as though it were 
written, en-yo-sa, ^'^J.,en-yd , just as mignojiette , though 
the combination of letters is quite foreign , is pronounced 
by every working gardener, as if written min-yo-net. 

of enclitics. 

All Words have an accent, but some few monosyllables 
and dissyllables , which , in pronunciation , unite with the 



10 

preceding word , and seem to form but one with it , lost? 
their accent , or rather transfer it to the word with 
which they are united. They are called enclitics from iyKhho^xi 
to incline ; because they incline towards , or , as it' were , 
rest upon the preceding word. Thus you , of me, bears the 
circumflex accent ; but in the phrase b <piko( /uov , my friend, 
it becomes enclitic , and is closely blended in pronunciation 
with the word p'wc ; and for that reason loses its circumflex 
accent. 

It may be well to observe, as it regards orthography, that 
when the enclitic follows a proparoxytonon, or a properispo- 
menon , it passes its accent to the final syllable of its antece- 
dent, which then has two accents , its own, and that of the 
enclitic; as b clv^uvrbsycv, my Man; rb luwbv you, my supper, (i) 

When it follows a paroxytonon , or perispomenon , the 
enclitic loses its accent, without affecting its antecedent, as 
h$ixoQ yov, my friend, rev ixcahov pov % of my Child. 

If it follow an oxytonon , the acute accent is retained , 
even in those situations in a phrase, where the general rule 
would demand the grave. 

The circumflex of the enclitic, wherever an additional 
accent is given to the antecedent^ is changed for the acute, 
as in the example, b etyfywerbe pou. 

The principal Enclitics are the monosyllabic oblique cases 
of personal pronouns you y.l (jlol; <jou crs udg tgu tvq tgv tjJc to 

TQV TOV? TOLiq T r i„ 



(i) Our Language abounds with these enclitics in pronunciation ; 
and they are among the most perplexing difficulties with which Fo- 
reigners , in conversing, have to contend; because they have no in- 
dication of them in prose Writings. Thus the verbs to be , and to 
have, often lose their accent ; and are so blended with the preceding 
pronoun, as to form with it a monosyllable; I've, you've, they've 
been, he's, she's, they're gone: the auxiliary will undergoes still 
greater mutilation , and merges into its subject ; I'll , you'll , they'll 
attend. The pronoun sometimes resigns its distinction ; as in 'tis , 
; twas. 



T I 

The pronoun rk, as in on whatever; the adverbs uov y >&qtI 
js-at, where, never, how, etc. as, m wort) xa «r«{yxa gtov. 

These are not however always enclitics : Thus the pronoun 
*?s\j and the adverbs 'nroZ wort are not so when used interroga- 
tively: hxTi, why ? OT07e When ? crcrt, ©-ore, never , never , 
negatively. 

The oblique cases of personal pronouns are not enclitics, 
when they precede the verb on which they depend , as 
fj.l Ae'yt/, he tells me ijjxq j%k* he deceives us , see the Syntax. 

Besides these ordinary enclitics , some verbs beginning 
with a vowel, or diphthong, which lose it by elision , become 
enclitics , and are completely blended with the preceding 
Word; as poU to 'Swxe , he gave it me, instead of y.ov to 'Hem, 
7ov to Va, instead of tou to e;Va, I told it him. 

CHAPTER III. 

Or THE DIFFERENT SIGNS USED IN WRITING. 
OF THE ASPIRATE. 

The aspirate is placed over vowels, whenever they com- 
mence a word, and is of two sorts termed the soft and the 
rough aspirate. It formerly marked the degree of aspiration, 
or breathing communicated to those vowels. The soft a 
slighter, and the rough a stronger breathing. Among the 
consonants the % alone is aspirated , or rather is marked 
with the sign. It has always the rough aspirate at the 
beginning of a word ; and when two ^ follow in the middle 
of a word , the first has the soft , and the second the 
rough aspirate , as in tj>j>o>co hail , in the sense of salutation. 

It is probable that there was a sensible difference in the 
pronunciation of these two aspirates by the Ancients, 
The rough being a strong breathing, the consonants termed 
slender , whenever followed by it , were changed into their 
aspirated cognates , whether in separate words, or in com- 
pound terms , as *a8' yi ( ucU , instead of kit ;f««c , or k'olQokov], 
generally, from wt% and hoy. This Aspirate has been com- 



IS 

pared to tliat produced by the German h , in hok, hauen ; 
but this idea is rather ingenious than exact ; for we do not 
see that the German h affects the Words^ with which \Z 
comes in contact, as the rough aspirate ; or that it produces 
the same changes. Whatever may be conjectured , it is 
certain that its peculiar properties no longer exist in the 
modern language. All vowels are pronounced in the same 
manner, and without any breathing or aspirate, whether 
marked by the one or the other sign : It's only use in the 
Modern Greek is to indicate when the above elision may 
take place. 

Of THE IOTA. UBTDERWRITTEIV. 

It indicates the elision of an / after the vowels, under 
which it is written. It is commonly the last of the second 
and third persons singular of the Tenses of the subjunctive 
.Mood in a , yf#f>ffi 7f a 'p?t 7f*p6«$, 7? ai P^' 

OF THE APOSTROPHE. 

The apostrophe in Greek, as in French , denotes the 
elision of a vowel, or diphthong , whether at the end of 
words, as to <tto k u duwac thwt 9 he forthwith opened his mouth, 
instead of to ar'apa. ; fJv*oKo x$ VT ' 0C > it * 5 entirely of gold, in- 
stead of that, or at the beginning; as , rev ro 'v?a^ instead of 
iTvrxj V rnv i&bhiv 9 instead of uc rw vroKn> To Constantinople. 

OF PrJWCTUxVTIOIS r . 

A point (. ) placed as in English, indicates the completion: 
of the sense. 

When placed parallel with the upper, instead of the 
lower part of the letters, it is equivalent to a colon. 

The comma ( , ) is of the same value as in English. 

The combination forming our semicolon ( ; ) is used as a 
sign of Interrogation. 

Some Editors make use of the Note of Exclamation I 



CHAPTER IV. 

. OF WORDS* 

Tiie Modern follows the Ancient Greek, in acknowledging 
iiine sorts of Words , called parts of Speech , Viz. The 
Substantive , Adjective, Article, Pronoun, Verb, Participle, 
Preposition, Adverb, Conjunction. 

The Interjection is classed with adverbs. 

OF NUMBERS. 

There are two Numbers..: The Singular and Plural. 

OF GENDERS. 

There are three Genders : The Masculine 9 Feminine f 
and Neuter. 

OF CASES. 

There are four Cases : The Nominative , Genitive , Ac- 
cusative , and Vocative. Of these four , the Nominative, 
Accusative, and Vocative are always alike in Neuters, as in 
Latin. 

CHAPTER V. 

There are in Modern Greek, according to Mons. r David's 
classification, three Declensions: the i.» { Comprising Nouns 
in Btci«f ,«,«: the 2. d Nouns in h\ and cv , and also those 
m i , and o 1 mostly from ancient Diminutives in toy : and the 
9, All the varieties that do not fall under the forms given 
in the first two, in the following succession : it can hardly be 
called order. 

NS. GS. N.PL 



1 


TifWT 


ac 


U 


%Q 


2 


Ayovptd 


oc 


CL$ 


% 


3 


Tifdyju 


OL 


olto; 


<XT<X. 


4 


■Vol? 


%C 


a 


eilic 


5 


Xar? 


VS 


V 


tli^ 


6 


M«ycv\ 


Q* 


fl»f 


wit? 



ftS. GS. Nil 

7 &f(n ( u ov cljcq ara 

8 TIa. cc tyc n 

9 Fj-wcr i$ vc tg 
10 A^ikh ia; ice €z 

J 2 Evvifi is ovi; lis 

15 tWc ( vol? vov J yets 

The classification of Greek Nouns has ever been, and 
still remains, among Grammarians, disputed ground. Whe- 
ther ay hat is here attempted will be thought to furnish 
more precise lines of distinction, than the distribution of 
the Author, must be left to the Public to determine. 

I shall venture to divide all regular Nouns between 3 
Declensions Iso-syllabic,and i Declensions Imparisyllabic; 
and shall , after the regular forms , give as Heteroclites i 
the few that will not conform to this arrangement. 

Before we proceed to examples of these, we will decline 
the Article. As it very commonly accompanies Nouns , it- 
is necessary to know the Declension of the one , before 
we attempt that of the other: It has three Genders. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE. 

Masculine b as b yikiqq the Sun 

Feminine n n Qdhzvara. the Sea 

Neuter. to to (phvozrocoy the Autumn. 

SINGULAR. " 

Masculine. Feminine Neuter, 

Nominative b jj rb 

Genitive tqv t"y\z tov 

Accusative rh T«fV r» 



I J 







PLURAL. 






Nominative 


d 


cd or 


< CO 


TX 


Genitive 


loiv 


t2v 




TUV 


Accusative 


rove 


rdc 




rot 



CHAPTER VI. 

FIRST DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC. 

This Declension comprises nouns Masculine in at gen a> 
and m 7 gen n , and Feminities in a , gen «c and *c and in 57, 

gen W (2). . 



V N. 




Acaf 


1 flCf 


Avav 


1 


at or ou? 


G. 


(3) 


— . 


a <9r ou 


— . 


ZZ 


av 


A. 




— . 


• — ■ car 


— . 


. — ' 


a; or aic 


V. 




- — . 




~ 


p 


Oil 01' 0H£ 


K* 




M«9 


JJT tfC 


Ma9 


V,T 


vl'i or Ait 


G. 




, — 


— ■ n or cv 


— 


, 


0V 


A. 




—_ 


■ V\ V 


— 


. 


cic or out 


V. 




, 


— n 


1 


0— _ 


ai or out 



(1) For tlie peculiarities of the Language , as it is spoken vulgarly, 
and written in books designed for the Vulgar , see the Appendix , 
where all the forms here given , with the terminations used by the. 
greater part of Writers of reputation, are repeated , with all the ir- 
regularities of accent and termination , in use among the vulgar. 

(2) I am aware that some would form 1 Declensions of the forms 
that are here given as one, but, except with respect to the Genitive 
Singular the Analogies in Orthography and accent are so great, 
that the subdivision would answer no good purpose. 

(3) Instead of repeating the whole Word , I have preferred giving, 
in the oblique cases, the Termination ? or variable part only, substi- 
tuting, for the rest, lines. Of two lines, when the first is accented, it 
answers to the Antepenult, when the second to the Penult. The double 
lines 5 without accent, shew where the accent is sometimes thrown hy 
the Vulgar. The French circumflex is more conspicuous over lines 



r6 



V 



N. 


Mo us 


« 




' 


Mws" 


#* 


or a/c (s) 


G. 


— ' 


Hff 


or 


as 


— 


KW 




A. 


A 


a»' 






t 


«c 


or ait 


y. 


A 


s 






r~— ;* 


a/ 


OT' CLIQ 








P 


G. 


T; y a 








1 *« 

i *-* 


a/ 


Or oug 


A. 





m 






- 


ac 


or ''cut. 


V, 


— , 


n 






I - 


«/ 


OT ai£ 



DECLINE LIKE, 





tivQoiybfdie 


KWTtlG 


Xn{<*. 


hti.Wft 




AfcftwW 


tevt'/rwc 


<piktx 


rv'^n 




JIOLVUOLVIOLQ 


ILKiZSTYlQ 


yuyta 


tK'Jrn 




Aiviiocc 


KThrnc 


KQKCLKlia, 


tO^il 



than the Greek, and , therefore, in such situations, has been pre* 
ferred. This Mode as it appears to me , presents the Termination , 
and the situation of the Accent most prominently to the eye ; and ? 
if it do, must greatly assist Memory. The supply of the deficient part 
of the Word, though immediately above , requires a certain degree 
of attention , which , in young Scholars , it is , however important, 
extremely difficult to fix, 

(i) Some Authors write e * instead of &$, that they may not seem to 
■violate the principles of accentuation , for whenever the Nominative 
and Vocative plural are written 4t$ , instead of ai, the accent ought to 
be the same as in the Accusative plural. 

Nouns ending in $&, Qa, pa, and in a pure (that is where a of itself 
forms a distinct Syllable ) terminate the genitive singular in ag ; as 
$ ittApot., the day, ttj; %sp«s, of the day, i cpiXia, friendship, rifc ^tXt'a?- A-U 
others form the genitive in y,s , as >j pouax , rr,; jjeouav^j vi£o£a, rfc £a£v)?- 
The termination kj ijs , however x very general 7 among the Vulgar. 



... t . 17 

All Genitives plural in this Declension are eircum flexed, 
except of adjectives, whose Masculine and Neuter, of the 
2.4 Declension , are proparoxytona , ( see ay^c a'yf/« ay?' " J 
and of feminine substantives , derived from Masculine 
paroxytona in oc; as lev hoc , hvhn , hvhuv, 

Paroxvtona as Ak^/sc, and properispomena , as uova-x , m- 
ver move the accent , except in the genitive plural , ac- 
cording to the above rule. 

Oxytona, as ny.v, never move their accent; but , in the 
genitive singular and plural , substitute the circumflex for 
the acute. 

Properispomena as //ovcra, acute the genitive singular, and 
accusative plural. 

Proparoxytona, in the same cases, advance the accent, to 

the penult J as 8aAae-<7«. , QxKcLvGYis , 9aAaV(T2?. 

CHAPTER VII. 

TI119 Declension comprises all Nouns isosyllabic, whether 
substantives or adjectives , whose geniiive singular termi- 
nates in cv , from a nominative in »g , or ov , , or /. 



G. 


av 


Qou-& q; I «f 


- 


6)K 




7ra^> 


61? oc 
t 

O'J 


-crap viy ot 


A. 


V 


Qt | 


' 


©w 


— 


. y 




V, 


>t 


g i 'J 


i= 


0; 


— 


t 

fc 


' 01 






s 






P 






N. 


ITfoar««r 


OK 




n f 


$<rousf • 


a 




G. 


< 


ow 






— ' 


CdV 




A. 


— ' — 


OK 




' 


— 


a 




V, 


— ' ~_ 


OK 




»— ' 


— ; 


9t 


- 




s 






P 






N. 


Ao)/\0'Era/o 







Aawo'STtf/d 


a 




G. 
A. 


— — .***. 


tou 






— 


*■*■ 


tiav 
a. 




V. 


— ' — 


e 








■ — 


m 



*ff 







S 










p 






K. 


fcoS * 




| 


<W& tit 


a 

A, 




•* * 

/ 

— ' ■ ■ I 

5 '' 




1 





• 

» 

tx 

1 








r 


N. 


K 


hill i 








Km/S id 


G. 




icy 








- — - twv 


A. 




/ 








*- — \% 


. v. 




— ; 








•■ ix- 






SINGULAR* 




M 






F 


N' 


N. 


5o? 


c£ 


2 


e;p 




i * 2af 


G. 


— - 


cv 








fc 


— 


A. 


— 


if 








^ '"• 


— 


^ 


— 


i i 






*S 


■ — 








Plural, 




M 






F 




N- 


5o<p 


0/ 




2o.p 


at 


or cut- 


Sap 


G. 


— 


w> 




-^ 


toy 




— . 


A. 


— 


owe 




— 


ct$ 


or WZ 


— 


V. 


— 


0/ 




— 


< 


XI 


or ah 




— • 



or 
'op 



N 



DECLINE LIKE. 



kvtifW&'QQ 


^OOr^TTQY 


<pao/ 




(JO^r 





__ . 


* 


-r~~. .._. 


. — 


any at 


uluhoi 




pzQli. ■ - 


v^riKOf 


ayythoe 


h'J-^avov' 


9/6* 


TVft 


TQKIA.YIPGQ 


e'ecbihfet 


a\?ci$i!}T3V- 


•Xi/vasra/^/ 


Xifl 


QzV{ua<r7o$ 


iwiKoyoc 


tpQivi'oruPQy - 


CKIZ61 


Xotfrf 


7WA.Q$ 


Gi'oy.a^cg 


ffvuzrwtQr - ■■ 


v.yAh 


ci^yi- - 


■oma^C 



h 







SINGULAR. 






M 


F 


N. 


N. 


iyft oc 


t= yjr * 


ayf^ w 


G. 


i 


jr: — ' ae 


ES ■ — ' ou 


A. 


^J! — — ci 


52 — ' ay 


M 


V. 


_■--. 


£2 — « 
PLURAL. 


*» 


N. 


cty^ c/ 


t= yfi cu or cut; 


' fyfi ^ a 


G. 


E2 — ~ wr 


zz ■ — ' uv 


cr — ' «r 


A. 


pr — ' qjc 


^ — ' ac Ora/f 


// 


V. 


u 


jrs — ' oli or cliq 


N 



Adjectives of three terminations are, for obvious reasons, 
here declined throughout ; though the feminine form be- 
longs to the first declension , and, m writings of Reputation, 
regulates its accent accordingly ; but they are very com- 
monly accented throughout, m all Genders, on the antepe- 
nult , as indicated by the double lines. 



SINGULAR. 



PLURAL. 



M. and F. 


N. 


N. s»-$c£ oc 


UOOZ, OV 


G, — ■ — ov 


— — ' ' OV 


A. — " — cv 


)l 


V. ^ - i 


)1 



M. and F. 

iv\o£ 01 
— - — ur 

— • mq 

V 



N. 



<M 



a 



DECLINE LIKE. 



G KGtt U 



J \v%ot 



e$ec 



e rta; »f x«tc/hoc 

o xa/ n GTfbyows 

KCX.I Yl KfynfMQfAQC 

9 KXl V 



vvhyot 



3WS 

Proparoxytona move the accent from the antepenult i& ■ 
the penult ? in ihe genitive singular and plural , and in 
the accusative plural of Masculines and Feminities : see 
atdfOTree.. For the Vulgar exceptions to this Rule , see ihe 
appendix. * 

Paroxyton'a neither move nor change their accent : sec 

Qxytpna never move their accent; hut substitute the 
circumflex for the acute in the genitive of bolh numbers; 

See (refocj KUslf. 

Properispomena never move their accent ; but substi* 
tute the- acute for the circumflex ", in the genitive of 
both Numbers; .and in the accusative plural of Masculines 
and Feminines. 

As the first of the above rules, with respect to Proparox- 
ytona , is the only one that affects the pronunciation cf 
Nouns , beginners need attend to that only, 

CHAPTER VIII. 

The Third Declension Isosyllabie comprises Nouns 

Masculine and Feminine in u , gen: ovt ; as b xou i ivhaSii, 
gen: <suc ; and Nouns Neuter in n and os ; as, to $'S\szf£c , 
t« tu%-oc ? gen: owe 



G. 
A. 
V. 



■>h 



t 


IVKC(;3 


t"f 


TO 


VJh 




££ 


iVKCtC 


«> 
tf 


cv; 




m 








cvC 




OK 


n 




us 








k 




w 


ff 




Uf 








k 




w 



N. 


■rv?x oq 


T£/ '/C 


V. 


G. 


> 


f 


QY 


-A. 


— Cf 




V 


V. 


Cf 


. ' 


H 



SL 

9 ay cJ 

OVf x 
CD 



s. I 





m 


StXfifE LIKE. 




tvKctfrnt 




•t&Xft 


paydd 


waiGii 




&rx§o; 


yayovAb-J 


ivy trite 




Tikes 


7T#oapoy 


apKU&ni 




X iTh0 * 


yii^ea 


tvzrpvntc 




'pyoj 


k fJjK<ovB§ 


tVTthVS 




(/iao$ 


KKilbcLPOV 



The singular of <pxy- cu, a female glutton , is given under 
this declension; but its plural is found irregularly declin- 
ed, like that of the masculine y*y*< 4 by adding Se and 
Ivy to the Vocative singular : see the Declensioir-df Hete* 
roclitcs. 

%VKot€u{ 

Oxytona , as iy«jSife , declined after this form , never 
move the accent ; but substitute the circumflex for the 
acute in the genitive and accusative singular , and in all 
the cases plural. 

Paroxytona, as.9?moW, never move nor change the accent, 
except in the genitive plural , which is circu indexed. 

Proparcxytona Neuter , declined after euVa£eV , as 
koxU%c , from the Masculine paroxytonon Kamfof , never 
change the accent, except in the genitive plural , whose 
final is circumflexed ; but they advance the accent to the 
penult m the genitive singular, and in the N, A , and V 
plural. 

Properispomena , declined as the above , never move the 
accent, but in the genitive plural , whose final is circum- 
flexed : they substitute the acute for the circumflex , in 
the Gen: Singular, and in the N , A, and V. Plural. 

Paroxytona, as %iko<; , never move nor change the accent, 
but id the G. Plural , which has the final circumflexed. 



sa 

CHAPTER IX 

I. st DECLENSION, IMPARISYLLABIC. 

This Declension comprises all nouas increasing , and 
forming their genitive case in 01 , except those in toe , which 
fall under the 2. d Declension Imparisyllabic , and some few 
in \jh , classed among the Heteroclites. 



EXAMPLES. 



SING= 



N. y«f> or 

Gr. •— ' OVT Cf 

V. yif o» 

SING. 

G. •— • of o? 
A. — — * 



PLUR. 

PLUR. 



-— ' QV 

— — ' at 

r *— -' i C 



SING.. 



PLUR. 



»; 


ere ay, a a 


GTfCLy/A 


ar 


« 


G. 


■ ' CLT G{ 


' 


t 


6)/ 


A. 


- — a 


.» 


— » 


a 


V. 


a 


t 


— 


& 



N. 


<po 


fW 


a 


G. 


. — 


' — ' 


ar ot 


A. 


' — ' 


— - 


a 


V. 


1 


•— . 


a 



<p0 fifl 



V.T 6f, 

— • af 
— a 



©rxLiNE jl 1 i;r~ 



ytfOY Tfyyav 'zs-fdyuoi (p-c(-i.uz 



ihifClC 


jtpyiTsxr«jf 


X?o>ux 


et'srayiVjAGt 


ytyotc 




ytv ( u% 


jwaBu^a 


a^.KZJiy% 




fit** 


ffTiftotfiSL 


XciyvyZ 




isriTeuot 


f&ifi'tpfxyux- 


$v\x% 




XV jM* 


~<5ra.whv/.i% 




ACCENTUATION. 





The interrogative t/V is acuted throughout on the sanid 
syllable ; t/c r/w* r*we §*c The indefinite ri§ advances the 
accent to the increment, in all the increasing cases; and, in 
the genitive plural , substitutes the circumflex for the acut&. 
Monosyllabic substantives advance the accent to the incre- 
ment , in the genitive case singular and plural : as %&$ * 

X u fa ■* X i7 ? : * » X iT f l c > X u ?® y ' X"?** * X i7 ^^ except Tf«V, 
f»ac , ©-a?c and las , which advance it only in the genitive 
singular. 

Oxytona , except in the above instances , neper move flie 
accent ; but substitute the circumflex for the acute , when 
the increment is short , preceded by a long Vowel ; as 

The exceptions as to the Vocative singular , considering 
its rare occurrence , would lead to useless prolixity ; see 
page 8 line 6. 

Paroxytona never change the accent ; nor ever move it , 
except in the genitive plural , where it is advanced a sylla- 
ble : see y^w. 

Proparoxytona never change the accent; but , in all the 
increasing cases, advance it; because the language does not 
admit of the retraction of the accent beyond the antepenult. 
In the genitive plural , tlie accent advances two syllables : 
see o'opiy.z. 

Properispomena never move the accent , except in the 



2 4 

genitive plural, Vhere thgjr advance it a syllable .* they sti>- 
stitute the acute for the circumflex in all the increasing 
cases j see w^y^a., 

CHAPTER X. 



DECLENSION IMPARISYLLABIC, 



This Declension comprises all nouns increasing , and 
forming their gemtrve singular ia.eo;, or *&>c. 



EXAMPLES. 
SINGULAR. PLURAL 

N. QcL VIK IUS £x CtK $£ 

G. — — 

A. — — 



lUC 



v. — — 



VJ 



€ CSV 

t GL$ Or^CKTlUlQ 
tit 



N. 


£a9 


vt 


G. 


«^. 


i 


A. 


_ 


vy 


V. 




« 


N. 


$4 


V 


Cr. 


- — 


£ 


A\ 


-*, 


V 


V. 


, — 






0t 



OQ 



Caff 



(!>!& 



€ 

tic 

ill 



av 



a 
a. 



G. 



'Gf 



i 
!Y 

i or 



&c 



it 



US 

i. 
UK 

a; 



p 



NU 


yt&ir 


fC 






yvw 


Of 




G. 


~J 


t 


&t 


to 


I 


ay 


A. 


~- 7 


>p 




i 


ui 




V. 


^ 


t or k ' 


ttc 








S 


p 






N. 


<rvy 


Xj3/<r 


*; 


r-HI 


xph 


us 


G. 


— 


— ' 


£ Ci( 


.-, 


t 


€ tff 


A. 


» 


— 


IV 




L,' 


cic 


V. 


Y 


— * 


t or i; 




r 


i/f 








DECLINE LIKE, 






j&3uriKti>c 




/S«0vc 


£a 0J yy&c/C Sf 


vfifK 


vvyn^uTK 


&vyyfct$tvt 


£afi/C 


C«fl} XOLVifif 




Vificrrctffts 


$ah.y$tvc 




-srxaruc 


Wkairv x^ac/f 




Xip. wvic 


WfCJttifav 


f 


fy*xve 


Cpa^J «&C 




VU$cL%MK 


tefafiuc 




yhVKV( 


yhvxv QcrK 




til wk 


\t37ll\JZ 




tftpvt 


epijUb "ZS-iortg 




*$K 








ACCENTUA 


TION. 







Oxytona of this declension never move the accent , 
that is , it is always on the same syllable as in the nomi- 
native. In the plural isosyllabic cases , the circumflex is 
substitued for the acute; see £a?u'c; as also in the Vocative 
singular , when the nominative ends in tu'c : see jSswimuV. 

Paroxytona neither move, nor change , the accent : sec 

Proparoxytona never change the accent ; but in the ge- 
nitive singular , and in all the cases plural , advance it a 
syllable : see fdyKfuriz, 

Properispomena never move the accent , but substitute 



*6 

the acute for the circumflex, in the genitive singular, and 
in all the cases plural: see ymne. 

CHAPTER XL 

OF HETEROCLITES. 

i. st We will notice those that are declined like nouns 
of the i. st declension Isosyllabic in the singular , and in- 
crease, in the plural; as %trijif a Pilgrim, <$xyZ<; , a glut* 
ton o us Mem. 

S P 



G. 
A* 



fay 



*e 

a 

civ 

a 



<pxy 



out 



W or t 

he or txtc 
lie or %clo; 



Nouns in rie of the first declension , accented on the 
final, are very generally declined like <pcty&& ; as m^me 

S P 



N. 
G, 
A. 
V. 



x *ri 



ne 

a 



x«*l 



Jtf Or lot is 

tar/ 

he or Ixtc 

he or hue 



a. dly Those in ou , aye , declined , in the singular, like 
Neuters of the 3. d Declension Isoyllabic. They are the fe- 
'murines of nouns of the same nature as qayoie i expressive 
of some kind of excess , or indicating some trade or cal- 
ling ; as <pxyov , a gluttonous Woman ; wtiapv , a Woman 
having a large foot. 



N, 
G. 
A. 
V. 



m 



cv 
ev 



9*7 





a 7 


fe 


or lx% 


o&)V 




u 


or W 


hi 


or lev; 



Some few Proper Names of Women are declined as follows: 



N. 
G. 
A. 
V. 



n 

6) 



Al«r*r« 

A-Vcrac 

At'csra 



3. dly Nouns borrowed from Foreign Languages , which 
very slightly differ from the foregoing , such as y.xtpyk -, 
coffee , or a cup of coffee , *z$$pk , a coffee-house. 



N. 
G- 
A. 

V. 



e Jfotfip 



See or Sotic 

$s< or las; 



DECLINE LIKE, 



fay 'I? 

MVKUVXC 



fxyov 

XKlllxfOV 
jUVKWOV 

y.zyovKcj 



folk 



Nouns declined like the above 72€^r 7/20^ their accent, 
and are generally acuted throughout the plural , contrary 
to general principles as; fdftne: pi p^»W , /**«$«& 



o3 

S P 



«reX 



ou? 


a-TTA 


tit 


ou 


~-^ 


<3V 


oDv 


- — 


o&g 


oG 


=—* 


ot 



N. 
G. 

A. 
V. 



The Vulgar use avm •> It^h , fyc. , and decline them 
jeguiarly, like ^96? : vou c , the plural of which is very little 
in use among the Vulgar, is declined as the above. Writers 
decline the plural as the ancients , to ■ u - uv - ac, - u , and 
sometimes use the resolved form of the genitive .singular , 



w 



Of 



5. tUy Nouns of the 1 . st Declension Imparisyllabic in w 
gen: utoq will bs sometimes found declined in the singular 
as Nouns of the i. st Declension Isosyllabic, with the excep- 
tion of the genitive, which always ends in oq : thus $%fiifi- 
rnroi from faiGoLfbiw. The plural is always regular. 



G. 


•f #p(3apo ryjT 


0: 


A. 


-p — 


a 


V. 


, — / ~— 


a 



Nouns of the above class are also sometimes thus declined 
in the singular £ap£afor «•, wf . «« ..,'« 

Some Nouns Imparisyllabic in « , mostly proper Names, 
are declined in the genitive singular , and throughout the 
plural after Nouns of the 1 * st Declension Imparisyllabic ; 
While , in the Accusative and Vocative singular , they ana- 
logize wibh Nouns of the a. d Declension Imparisyllabic- 
S P 



N. 


n*>. 


1$ 


O. 


— ' 


t 


A, 


> 


tv 


y, 


~J 


K 



So; 



or 1 



Ilap 



etc 



Hcuns in ys , ucc have the same Irregularities* 



N. 


ty? 


u$ 




6. 


. — 


u 


o; 


A. 


— 


uv 




V. 


— 


u or 


u$ 



ly) \> 



e$ or i/jiCf* 



fc% 



The following are irregular in the singular , hut have 
the plural regularly formed , after the i. st Declension 

Imparisyllabic. 

4 ttcctt'p or t.olxI^ genitive watpoc or itarepx. 

6 avnp or av§pa$ dcv£po< or avop<% 

& 7:olu; ttoXXou accusative iroXuv 

t, yuvfl or yuvawta yuvaowfe or yuvawca? 

t, 6.uychnop or Ouyaripa Ooyarpo? or GuyaTspsu; 



?i yaar/ip or yacnrepa 



yacrpo? or 



ya<jrspx^ 



CHAPTER XIL 



OF AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 



Nouns form Feminine Augmentatives in af* : as from tq 
«roSotf/, the foot , >? croSa'pa ? f/je large f oo t , masculine Di- 
minutives in &W which are for the most part proper 
Karnes, or receive the addition from the speaker , to express 
endearment or affection; as, from EuWa0^c> An/^r^c, are 
formed b SraDgW * 5 Ajj^mrpaVqc ; ??y //£/& Eiistathius > my 
little Demetrius. Many Neuter appellatives also have this 
termination ; as t^ ^-ol^'Iki, the little infant ; to Tfoczri^lxi f 
the little table ; to •wola^oLKi , the small foot , formed from 
«■«&', rpajarfjf, igobdfi. Feminine diminutives end in <v£s£ &• 
c-J\a ; as \J/yv/r^a fjioiifjny little soul, \\iviT{a pov , my little 
Helen} from v'^X^ ^ rw i anc ^ SrawvAa pv, and ^tcw/t^cj /4*y , 



3b 
my beloved or little Aitastasia , from 'hwrtmis. These di« 
minutives are often applied to grown persons , as more 
polite and affectionate than the proper Name , without 
the addition. 

There are also adjectives in ovr{tMt - w - cr , which come 
under this denomination , and answer to the words in Ita- 
lian ending in ino , etto ; as piKfovrfaoc , ti , ov , very small; 
and in uccio as kolkovt{ikg; - * - ov , very pretty. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 

i. We have, in the course of the declensions, referred 
adjectives to three different forms: in oc , « , ov ; the second 
vc , ux , v ; and the third in v\t , k All these form their 
comparatives 8$ superlatives from the nominative singular 
of the neuter in o , v , tc : thus , from the neuter of the 
vulgar, ro <ro<pe, is formed the comparative <ro$QTt$oc. ff«?«r«f.tf# 
ffo^Tepw, wiser, or more wise, and the superlative s-oparaToc , (i) 
ffo<p«TarM, GoftiTSLTor wisest, or most wise. From £a8J, deep , 
the comparative /SaQuV^oc , jSaGure^jj , GMrtfov deeper , and 
the superlative jSaS-Jrarof , Col^otjlth , fia.QvTa.Tov deepest; and 
from euVt&V pious, the comparative iuaifr'-o-Ttpoc , wcifar^r, , 
iwi&ffTtfov , more pious , and the superlative iJartCwraiw , 

euo-e^s/rrar^ , iva&k<naTov , most pious. 

2 . Some few Nouns in oc change this termination into knfoc, 
t7Tifn , z<T7i?ov , for the comparative , and, iarotroc , ivTetrn ? 
fFTUTov, for the superlative; as, a^j»eS"oc has ot^tthrifof &c , 
in the comparative, and ayjuwraros §'C. , in the superlative, 

Comparatives and superlatives are , in the masculine and 
neuter, declined after nouns of the first 8$ second declension 
of the same terminations. 



(i) Writers generally terminate and accentuate the feminine tlius. 



3r 

^~ 3. The accent is uniformly on the antepenult, as in eyfioc. 
( See Cliapter 7, Page 19 ) Good Writers, however, ad- 
vance the accent to the penult, in the feminine; and, in the 
''masculine and neuter , follow the Rules for accentuating 
proparoxytona in oc , ev , of the second declension. 

4. Though the intonation, is precisely the same, it is, for 
the sake of orthography , necessary to remark a difference 
in the formation of comparatives and superlatives from po- 
sitives in oc — When ^ is preceded hy a short syllable , the 
comparative §• superlative are formed hy changing oc into 
sm^oc 8$c, , as from Sytof , the / being short , are formed 
•tyiursfoc, iyiaraTOf $;c. ; when preceded by a long syllable, 
or by a a mute followed by a liquid , they are formed by 
changing oc into ortffo , otxtoq 8$c. \ as from st/jtoc , w§irK*c are 

formed XPiaTOTtfOC j ^lUTOTOLTOQ , &* iVOtSThOTifOt; 1 VJOZTkOTXTOey O^C. 

.5. Ka>toc, bad, makes in the comparative x* l f 07l 1°s* X ll t' Q7i 1 n * 
X il .f 07i ? cv t worse ; in the superlative xgxiar^, Ka'x/rrq, y.clx.vttqv $ 
worst', Kxxk , good , in the comparative nsjulrsfar, kclmti^ 
xxhnTifov , and JtaAA/oy. better ; in the superlative ulclkkijtgq 

6= The superlative is generally used absolutely; as, £ <ro- 
<pwraroc, generally means very (W, and not, the 7/?,a?£ ewe; 
when the quality is expressed relatively, it is more common 
to use the comparative, particularly among the Vulgar; as, 
9&ttpaT*fos »wo rej; drijuzrovc ,■ the wisest of men. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

NOUKS OF NUMBER". 

The five following Cardinal Numbers are 'declined, 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 

N. . v.; or Iv«5 it;« or p.i* ev or sva 

G, Ivo; uia; svo$ 

A. evs . [jttaw or .*«** ev or hx 





MASCULINE § 


tfMlfttSrt, 


N. 
G, 
A. 


Tpi&v 

?pet<; 


three 


0. 

A. 


'feo'capwv 


four 



TpUtSy 

Tecaapav 

With ' the compounds ^cjc«t f€k , Jexsjr(>'<* thirteen , ami 
c{^«w^<{ , SsHargVffofja , declined like their simples. 

The remaining Cardinal numbers* up to a hundred, are 
indeclinable : they are. 

twenty one 
twenty two 
twenty three 
twenty four 
twenty five 
twenty six 
twenty seven 
twenty eight 
twenty nine 
thirty 
forty 
fifty 



di>0 

swta or i<pTa 
&&r£ or 6*/t&> 
evvea or svvei 

£voYx« 

SeJcarsvre 

S£XOSTCt3s 

Ssxasvvsa 
etxoci 



two 
five 

six 

seven 

eight 

nine 

ten 

eleven 

twelve 

fifteen 

sixteen 

seventeen 

eighteen 

nineteen 
twenty 



eucociouo 

eixoat Tpe~; Tpux 

EiXOCt TS<7<70£pe<; T£Stf£p& 
£l$COGfc 1w6VT£ 

fitttoati^ 

SWMNJtOXTcS 

ewcoGievveoe 

TpLavTa 
cocpavra 

spS , o[/.iivTa 
dyoV/jvTa oydwvTtf 
evvevvivTtt 
exaroM 



sixty 

seventy 

eighty 

ninety 

one hundred 



(i) ^u is used before words begfrmmg with a-consonan.t ^ xai*&<. 



The hundreds beyond the first are declined. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE NEUTER. 



•33 



oiaxociQi 


^ia%ociai$ 


diaxoGia 


20(3 


TplOTOCOCTiOt 


TQtaxoataii 


TptOBCOGia 


3oo 


*P£TpaXQGUDl 


TeTpaxocriais 


T£Tpa/.OGWC 


4oo 


xavraxociot 


wsvTay-ociat? 


ftevTaxoaux 


5oo 


§£«XOGtOt 


^oocoGifcis 


i^oacoaia 


600 


STvTaZOCTiOt 


IttTajtoGiais 


£j7Ta/COGl« 


J/OO 


oV.Tcr/.oGiot 


6]CTaxQaiai( 


oxiraxoGia 


800 


ivvsa*/.QCi©6 


ivvsaxoGiaic 


£vVEfl&Q$ltt 


900 


ypaoi 


X^* l « 


3£iAia 


1000 



The following are the Ordinal Numbers, in the nomi- 



native of each gender. 



MASCULINE. 


FEMININE* 


NEUTER. 




77 p COCO £ 


TTpWTT) 


Tup WTO V 


first 


fejTepos 


SsUTEpOC 


^euTepov 


second* 


TplTO$ 


¥pM 


tpiTQV 


third 


T£TSCpTO; 


T£TapT7i 


TSTapTOV 


fourth 


77 £ [A7C TO? 


ipejMETI] 


7T£[/-t:tov 


fifth 


sztos 


IZTV] 


exTov 


sixth 


&|3oOfJLO£ 


^Q^O'7.71 


tj^OOJAQV 


seventh 


oyooo; 


OV^pT] 


oySoov 


eighth 


Ivvarog 


SWdCTT) 


svvaTov 


ninth 


b(y.c/.Toq 


o^ar/) 


oe/.aTOv 


tenth 


svfeaTo; 


evo*sxaT7fr 


evdrz-aTov 


eleventl 


S(t)^£X,y.TO? 


SfciSejcaTY) 


J(i)^£X.aTOV 


twelfth 



£e-/.aTo; TpiTo; i&atin Tpir/i ^arov Tpfcov thirteenth 
ctacaTo; TeTapT05&xat7iT6Tdcp'ni Sexa-rov TSTaprov fourteenth 
Bixcntx; tcejatcto? 8fC. up to 

bucoffTo$ l^tocrr^ eutocTov twentieth 

eixogtos TTctoTO? sijcogtyj TrptoT^ etxocTovTcpwTov one ^ twentieth 
TpiaaooTo; Tota^oGT^ Tpiax.ooTov thirtieth 



f cGGKC.aXGGTOC TEGGapajCGGTfl 



■£GGfi£pa34QGTQV 



fortieth 



% 








l£2VTYlJtOGTO£' 


ti 


6v 


5V h 


Icy]>'»og?o; 


V) 


ov 


6o. th 


spoop/ixocTos 


V) 


ov 


th 

70. 


Oy^OViJCOGTO? 


\ 


ov 


8g* 


£VV£V7iX.0GT05' 


VI 


ov 


ih 

9°- 


sx,c;tocto$ 


i 


GV 


th 
100. 



StaxociocTo? 


4 


ov 


200/* 


TptaXOClOCTO^ 
T£TpaXO<7lOCT05 




ov 
ov 


3oe.°* 
4oo. th 


-ftSVTay.0GL0GfO$ 


7) 


ov 


5oo: h 


s$axoGio<JTO<; 


V] 


ov- 


600.* 


etc. 


&tt\ 


ete. 



CHAPTER XV, 

OF PRONOUNS. 

PRONOUNS PERSONAL. 

FIRST PERSON. 





SLNGULAE 




PLURAL. 




Ik 

G. 


eyoj 
p-oij 


I 

of m6 


T0p-£OV 


of us 


A. 


as §" spva 


me 

SECOND 


PERSON. 


us- 


3V. 
G. 


CD Of £GU 

coy 


tllOll 

of thee 


C£l? <B>' £C£% 


y@ 


a; 


tfg cf £G£Vflt- 


thee 


Ga? §' cGa^ 


of you 


V. 


CO GU dj £CL> 


thou? 


<«F Gfet<5 §" £G£^ ■ 


ye 



THIRD PERSON. 



M 



N 



M 



N 



N. koto? auTYj ai»To he, she, it 
G. tou T7i? tou of him, her, it 
A. tov ttjv to him, her, it 



auTol au«pqc?s auto: they 
twv of them 

t-ous. TaTj t-« them 



The oblique cises of the pronouns of the third person 
are formed by aphaeresis , or elision of the first syllable of 
the pronoun, demonstrative ccuVec, , aM 7 avVt. Good Writers, 



35 

however , and those who speak most correctly , disapprove, 
this elision , and write, 8$ pronounce it, just as it is given 
in the chapter on demonstrative pronouns. 

2. There is also a compound pronoun , which , as mora 
polite §• respectful , is used instead of the simple , in all 
persons , numbers , fy cases , the accusative excepted ; a* 
follows. 

SINGULAR. 

FIRST PERSON. SECOND PERSON. THIRD PERSON* 

o fy JTOU^OyOU (JLOU TOU XoyOU GO'J TOU^OyOU TQU Or 77]£ 

^ jj, or of me. thou, orof thee, he, she, or of him, her 

PLURAL. 

c ) too ^o'yoo |i.a? tou loyoo ca; tou ^o'yoo tou$ 
^ .,' j we, or of us ye, or of you they, or of them 

CHAPTER XVI. 

OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. 

1. The Modern Greek Language has, strictly speaking, 
no pronoun possessive , answering to our pronouns my , 
thy , his, her , our , your , their. 

2. As a substitute, it has a form , compounded of the 
adjective tliKo; , expressive of property, or peculiarity, and 
the* genitive singular, or the accusative plural of the per- 
sonal pronoun. The adjective is thus declined , as other 
adjectives in cc , n \ or. 

FIRST PERSON. 



SINGULAR. 
MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER 

G. TOO iduCOU (JLQU TT? SOlJt^? fJLOU 



to e^tzov [/.ov my, or miim 
too g&XiOu [xou of my,or mine 
A, tov s<W.q'v uou JTTjv e&wtvfv ulqu to eosxov p.ou my, or mine 



w 

M 

G. TOV EOUC&V [XOU 



PLl/RAt. 

F 



» 



-WVcoY/.toVLWU 



A , to'j; £o\xou; [J.ou -ra; i^ivAc, p,ou 



Ta £oW. (xou my , or inin^ 

Twvsaiy.wv^ou of my, of mine? 

a dSr/toc p.ou my , or mine 

The above form answers for all the possessive pronouns, 
by substituting for y.ov, the genitives uo v thy , rev his, rvi^ 
her, rwc , or the accusatives row , tlieir , and ^c , our ,.■ 
sac , your. 

The lower classes usually inditlge in the elision of the 
incipient- Vowel', and say b 'Imoq fxou ? T ov <xc'. 

The personal proncuns ucv 7 wsv 8§c , are enclitics in these 
examples, as in that of the compound personal pronoun ?&» 
hkyov py, and therefore lose their accent: see Chap* 12. 

CHAPTER XVII 



OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. The Modern Greek has three demonstrative Pronouns: 

crJroc, clvtyi, xvro ; tovtoc, rovry;, rovio, this * and kvMvoc, , iXihn , 

fail* o , that: the former two indicating proximity, and th# 
latter remoteness : 

2v They are thus declined". 

SINGULAR.- 



N. 


OCUTO? , 


auTT) , 


auTo 


04 


this 


G. 


auToD', 


auTvis, 


auToO' 




of this 


A. 


auTov, 


PLURAL. 


auiro 




this 


N. 


auToi , 


auTatg , 


auTot 




these - 


G. 


auTtov , 


(XUTTOV, 


au~c5v 




of these 


A, 


auToJg, 


auTai5- r 


aura 




these 



(1) Some Authors write i<SWs , i » °' v an d m tk e P^ral feminine 

(2) The above is the more usual Form 5 but many Writers prefer 
She Hclknie wto; , cwr/i . t&uto, 







SINGULAR. 








M 


F 


» 




% 


TO 'J TO $, 


TOUT7, 


■roSfea 


this 


G. 


TOUTOU , 


TO'JT-/;^ , 


TOUTOll 


of this 


A, 


tgOtgv, 


TOOV/VV , 
PLURAL. 


TOUT© 


■this 


N. 


TO 5 TO i, 


to^tsi;, 


tout a 


these 


G. 


TO'JTWV.3 


TOUTCO.V i 


TG'JTCjJV 


of these 


A. 


to'jtqu; , 


tout^i; , 
singular. 


Touja 


these 


ft. 


gjtetvo£, 


SX£tV7] , 


IxsTvp 


that 


O. 


ix.clVGU, 


EX8lV7]f , 


sxetvoy 


of that 


A. 


SfcEWOV , 


JxStVYlV, 
PLURAL. 


exeiyo 


that 


8f, 


ejceivoi, 


£X£LVat£ , 


gxsty.a 


those 


('. 


E/.SlVtoV, 


ixstvwv , 


exsivcov 


of those 


A. 


ixe&voug , 


Ixetvas? , 


sV.sTva 


those 



. The vulgar add a syllable to these pronouns, which 
hi general rhiaies with the vowel of the final syllable, and 
receives the accent. Thus, they say , auTouvoO , aoTr.r?,; 



«UTovav , auT7ivav , auTcovcov , aurouvou? , auTYivai^ 



instead of 



«uto6 , out7& , kuton , kuttp , aurSv , ccIto'j; , auTaT; , and 

TOUTOUVOUj TOUTYIV^? , TO'JTOVa , TOUT7)V.a, , TGUTOIVG'.. , TO'JTT.va^ 

to-jtuvuv , touto'jvou; , instead of to'Jto'j , touttj? , toutov , 
to'jtt.v, TojTQ^TO'JTaic, TOujcov, tq'jtguc. In like manner ixtivovo, 
exeiyTiva , exgtrvqu, jbtetvSv, instead of l&eiyoy , |xe£vt(iv , Exetyau , 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 

The Pronoun relative is g ottoToc , v». gttolV. ? to gtcolov , 
who, or iv/uch: it is always preceded by the article, and is 
declined like aypio;, toe, toy of the second declension; tbus; 



33 



SINGULAR. 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 

K. 6d7rofo< 'h oxota to oroibv who, or which 

(r. touqxoiou T^?6xota§ touotcolou of whom, or which 

A. TOV 67TOIOV T/jV OTTOiaV TO OTCOWV whom, OF Which 



N. 
G. 
A> 



PLURAL. 

al ditotais toc oirota 



ot owotot at diroiais toc oTrota who, or which 
t&v o7roLwv tSv otcouov t&v 67rot(i)v of whom, or which 

tou$ otcoiou; Ta? 07:01a? Ta orcoZa whom, or which 



2. The Moderns use o'c-r/c as a relative la the nominative 
case only of each number ; thus : N. S. forts , vine , o , n i 
N. PL el Tim , at Tin; : the neuter has no plural. 

CHAPTER XIX. 



OE REFLECTED PRONOUNS. 

The reflected Pronoun is a Compound ; and is employed 
to express the reflection of an action on the subject of a 
Verb. It has only two cases, and agrees with all genders ; 
as follows : 

Lingular. 





FIRST PERSON. 


SFCOND PERSON, THIRD PERSON. 


c. 


tou sauToO p,ou 
of myself 


tou eaurou sou tou Iccutou tou, or r/fc 
of thy self of him or herself 


A. 


Tov lauTo'v p.ou 
myself 


tov eauTo'v cou tov eauTov tou, or ttis 
thyself him, or herself 



PLURAL. 

G. tou lauTou (xa^ tou laurou c«§ TOulauTou tous o/'tow 
of ourselves of yourselves of themselves 

A» Tov eauTo'v j/.a$ tov £«uto'v cccq tov eauTov tou; 
ourselves yourselves themselves 



CHAPTER XX. 



^n 



*}F INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS, 





M 


F 


N 


N. 


roTo; , 


sco&e, 


1T0IQV 


G. 


TtoioUf 


•scofe, 


ico toy 


A. 


tcoiov ? 


rotav, 


woibv 

PLURAL. 


N. 


T0101-, 


ffoiai? , 


woii* 


G. 


TCQiCOV , 


TCOtWV , 


7C0tu>V 


A, 


1C010UC, 


1C0MCS , 


7CQWC 



who or which ? 

of whom or which? 

whom or which? 

who or which? 

of whom or which? 

whom or which? 



V This Pronoun is, by Synezesis, contracted into a Monosyl- 
lable , with a strong accent on the final vowel 

/^OtO^, TCOtflC., 7COIO. 



&& 



From TTotou, icoia$, the vulgar form icoiavoy, ^otav%, $$e c 
FromjoAwv , oXou; , they form qaovcov , 6>ovou$ of all, all §*c. 



SINGULAR. 
MASCULINE §' FEMININE. NEUTER. 

which or what? 

of which or what? 

which or what? 

which or what? 

of which or what? 

which or what? 

The English Word " What " is more indefinite in its 
signification , " which " more strictly relative ; as wJiat 
arguments did he adduce ; that is , indefinitely , of all the 
arguments that might be adduced : which arguments did 
he adduce; that is , of those expected ? or agreed upon ? or 
known. 



N. 


Tig 




G. 


TlVO£ 


TlVQ£ 


A. 


TlVflf 


PLURAL. 


N, 


Tive? 


tiya 


G. 


TlVCOV 


TtVtoV 


A. 


Tiva? 


TLVa 



4* 

CHAPTER XXL 

Or INDEFINITE PRONOUNS; 
SINGULAR. 

T/ti or, t/c some one, or some, or a certain oil*. Tins 
pronoun is used where we use the indefinite article , or 
speak in the plural indefinitely , without an article. 





MASCULINE. 


FEMININE, 


NEUTER. 


N, 


Tiva;, Tt$ 


tI? 


\ 

Tt, 


0. 


two? 


T'.V0£ 


ftvoi 


A. 


tivgc 


tiv* 

PLURAL. 


V 


K. 


TIVS5 


nvl? 


TIV3C. 


G. 


TlVfcSV 


TtVWV 


TIVCOV 


A. 


Tiva? 


twkg 


TLVOC 



It is declined like the interrogative r/V, with the except 
tion of having the accent on the final syllable , and being 
sometimes an enclitic* 

The Ynlgar use y^n&ot , ui^mxi x ftifi%£- % 

2, Kxuvioc-or, jf ? ev some , in the sense of quantity , is 
declined like ^f ^ , >J , or , Kcx.7roi-oc , a , of , some, a certain, 
like c rVo?oc , h ore/a , to otcToc ; except that the accent is 
throughout on the antepenult. The same exception , as to 
the position of the accent, holds throughout cWo'c , woix , 
orciov, whosoever. 

3. Kxvi7> or Kxvhae , nappta. , Kaw, any one, some one, is, 
declined like %1q , ^/a, '^. It is compounded with negatives 
and affirmatives , answering to our somebody , anybody , 
nobody. 

4- In o, i\ rh Iuvol or rdh such an one, the article alone is 
declinable, as tit a. tm t&Ii yviajka, I have seen such a Woman 
sfj* toy Tclh, I have seen such a one* 



CHAPTER XXIL 



OF THE VERB. 

1. The modern Greek Verb lias two Voices ; the active 
and passive. 

2. Three Modes ; the Indicative, the Imperative, and the 
Subjunctive. 

It has also an active participle , undeclined , in ovtuq and 
evvfac, uvrac , agreeing with all numbers and persons, an<* 
'swering to our participle in ing \ and it has two passive 
participles, declinable, the one present, y^apo^-syuc , hn, tvov , 
being written , the other past , y^a^eVo? , ivn % hov written. 

Verbs that are both active and neuter , which are very 
numerous, have this latter participle; raw'Ja I rot, both 
transitively and intransitively, participle past, o-a^o-^c. 

3. The Modern Greek like other Modern languages has 



both simple and compound Tenses. 



Present 
( Continuative 
Simple Tenses. \ Imperfect 
Aorist 



Indefinite 



( Pluperfect 
Compound. I Future 

( Conditional 



4- The Indicative is the only Mood that has them all. 

The two others have only the present , or rather the 
continuative, and the Aorist, or indefinite. The imperative 
has only the second person of each Number, taking the other 
persons from the Subjunctive. 

CHAPTER XXIII, 

OF CONJUGATION. 

'. There is, in Modern Greek, but one Conjugation; but 
this contains barvtona , in a , and perisppmena in a. 
2. The first have the acute accent on the penult ; and 



4* . 

are therefore called barytona ( see chapter i , §. 6 ) 
Perispomena are formed, by contraction , from verbs in 
to coi). They follow the form of circumflexed Verbs , or 
Pcrispomena in the present , and the continuative Tenses 
♦nly." 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

•OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 

i. The simple Tenses are all formed from the present. 
The derivatives differ from the present in the four follow- • 
ing particulars. i. st by the addition of -an augment. 
2, ly By a change of the characteristic. _3. ly By a change 
of termination. 4- ly and lastly , in a great number of 
Verbs , by ciianging , in the aorist , and m tlie tenses 
formed from it, the Vowel or Diphthong preceding the 
characteristic of the present, ( see Chap. 24 , 2. a Part 
§• 4 , 7 > 9- ) 

OF THE AUGMENT, 

There are two kinds of augments ; the syllabic, and the 
temporal. 

The syllabic augment is ane, prefixed to certain tenses 
of Verbs beginning with a consonant; as from yppw , I write, 
'iyfa^ct, I wrote,- f/Vrw I throw, ep/4a , I threw. 

The temporal augment is a change of the /datable' Vow- 
els and Diphthongs a , e* , m , 01 , av , w , into the im- 
mutable Vowels n , w, and Diphthong v\v, as from aWa , / 
hear, yik.qic-%, 1 heard; iktyxu , / reproach 'ihty^j, I reproached. 

Verbs beginning with e , sometimes , instead of the tem- 
poral augment, assume an 1 in the augmented tenses , as 
from t^w , I have , efya I had. The augments are in use 
only in the indicative Mood : thus , from the aorist indi- 
cative tyfOL^a, I wrote, are formed the aorists imperative 
y^a^e , write , and subjunctive w yftyo , that I write , or 
may write , without augment. 

The uneducated are fond of substituting the temporal 



43 

for the syllabic augment ; as ny^a for iy$x$ct The lower 
classes often omit the augment altogether , as will appear 
in the conjugation of the verb. 

OF THE CHARACTERISTIC, 

The Characteristic is the consonant, or combination 

of consonants , preceding the vowel , or vowels in the last 
syllable : thus , a is the characteristic of Gexa , and ^ of 

The change of the characteristic is the great difficulty 
in the Theory for forming the Tenses. Its consideration 
shall follow the conjugation of the Verb , the knowledge of 
which will render the subject much more intelligible. 

OF THE TERMINATION. 

The termination is , as appears above , that part of the 
word which immediately follows the characteristic ; in 0sa<h 
it is u ; in ey^avf/-*, a; in £y^a<p3--»Jit€re, wxerg. These termina- 
tions should be particularly attended to , in learning ta 
conjugate the Yerb. 

CHAPTER XXV. 

OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 

T. These Tenses are, as in all languages, in which they 
exist , formed by means of a verb auxiliary united with 
the verb conjugated. 

They are formed in three different ways ; but without 
the slightest change of signification , on account of that 
difference. In the first , the auxiliary alone is conjugated, 
and the principle Verb remains invariable. In the other 
two , on the contrary , the auxiliary remains invariable 
while the principle Ferb alone is conjugated. The future 
is compounded in three ways : the conditional in two : the 
pluperfect only in the first. 



44 

II. The auxiliaries are lya I have , for the pluperfect , 
sx\u\ 0£to) , I mil, for the future and conditional. 

The continuative of the former 6%a , I A^/, is the only 
Tense which is used as an auxiliary, and it is employed to 
form the pluperfect. 

The present , and the continuative of the second , 8*xa 
and qfohoi. are both employed , with and without variation. 
When without variation , the third person is used through- 
out , Gs\e/ and \$&a. 

The former, $sku is contracted into, 0* ; and 8& v* into 8a\ 

III. The Tenses of the conjugated Verb, which enter into 
^composition , are the present, and the aorist of the subjunc- 
tive Mkod. In the first form of composition , in Verbs 
called Barytona , these Tenses change their final a into u. In 
verbs called perispomena, those of the first class like, -rclja 
change the a into circnmflexed u, those of the second; like 
t///«, the a into circumflexed a. The passive Voice admits 
into this form of composition the aorist only, which changes 
the w into «, without the i underwritten , 0g\o> , QUuc yfxffi 
( see first composition in the conjugations ). 

In the two other forms of composition , the subjunctive 
js regularly conjugated ; but when with the third person 
of the auxiliary, in Us uncontracted form, >a is not admis? 
.fiible ( see 2. d composition. ) 

IV. The future is compounded, i. st , of the auxiliary 8*' a « 
conjugated, and of the aorist or present of the subjunctive 
unaltered , fcku' yfd^u or 8f\« yfd<pu I shall write ; passive 
&'*« 7pa<p(iif I shall be written ; the passive does not admit 
the present , in this form of composition. 

2, Jy Of QeAfe/ , the third person singular of the present 
&ko unconjugated, and of the aorist or present of the 
subjunctive conjugated; U hu yftyxa ,,-w, h GVyfilf - «, ^c , w. 
I shall , thou cw/£, he a;/// write; Oexei ypapfl « , wc,w or 
y^(p-of/ai, is at, it xi, I shall, thou wilt, he <*>/// be written. 

3. ly Of 8e for 0e*e/ , and of the subjunctive, preceded by 
the particles : Gt vd y$<*.*\>-e>,n, g, or yf dp <vc, , I shall write 
Is pa y^etipO-S, >??, jr, or yfaf-^a/, £c-«/,*7a/, I shall he written; au(J 



^ 



ncfn 



hy synalcepha, 9a yp^-c, ;;c, «,ory^-a, hc ? k, 6a y?«pQ- 

0/* y^a'p e/*a/j £crc j ; 7 era;, winch latter is the more usual form. 

V. The conditional is composed i. st of the imperfect 
rftikov or Yifohz, and of the aorist or present of the subjunctive, 
as above in the i. st form of the future; 8<Je\-k, &c, i , %y*v 9 %r$ 
ay y^x^tij or yfsctpu I should S\C. , write; passive *!0e\-a , is i 
t , &;c. , yjcupfto I should <Scc. , he written. 

2. ly Of >J8e\fc, third person singular of the imperfect 
jrfoxc'i and of the aorist, or present of the subjunctive, as in 
the second form of the future, S Qthi yj a. ^r^ w, *, dry^<p-&,m 9 
v. I should, thou wouldst #fc., "vvrite, or have written ; y%\i 
yrfjL^ w,jic,«, or y^d.^-ofjLOLifi(FOLi 9 iTOLi I should be, or havebeen^ 
thou wouldst be , or have been written &;c. , see the Syntax* 

VI. The pluperfect is compounded only in the first man- 
ner , that is of the imperfect fj%9y or dya, conjugated , ar>d 
of the aorist of the principal verb unconjugated u^cc , tlxis* 
y[J.-fii , I had* thou hadst written J^a, &X*t> yf a 9®* ^ hod j 
thou hadst been written. 

It may be well here to observe to the reader, that in the 
following conjugation of the Verb, when a Tense has several 
forms , the first is the most approved ; the last the most 



vulgar. 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

FIRST PART. 









ACTIVE 


V O I G E. 












INDICATIVE MOOD-. 










PRESENT 


TEKSE. 












s 


yfa<p-Oi 

y^j-iK 




I write 
thou w 


ritest 


I am 
thou 


writing (i) 
art writing- 




yfxf-tt 




he writes (o.) 


he is 


writing 





(i) For the principles on which the distinctions in the English 
Translation of the Tenses are grounded , see Appendix §. 2. 
(?.] He, she, or it in the 3. d person singular, in all the Te»ses* 



J* . 

P. y[x<p-6/uiv-c/,ut we write we are writing 

y$<i$-iTi ye write ye are writing* 

ye*<p-ovri,6vi-owi they write they are writing 

Imperfect , more properly called by th© Greeks , 
Continuative. (i) 

VULG. 

S. ey^a?-* Syfa<p a t wrote, or was writing 

eyf&f-tc »7faf-ec thou wrotest, or wast writing 

«yfa<p-t wy^«9-€ lie wrote, or was writing 

P. iyj)a'<p»a^t^ iyfaf-apif we wrote or were writing 

gy^'p-m iyfoL<p'iT6 ye wrote or were writing 

ey^«f-a? nyfcL<p~guf they wrote or were writing, 

AORIST OR INDEFINITE. (2) 

S* iyf-x^.x. HyfQL^-at, I wrote, or have written 

£y^NJ/.£f 8ypocsJ«-ec thou wrotest , or hast written 

typoLy-t yiy^oi^-i he wrote , or has written 

P. iyffy-ctfitf n'yf a^-xptv (3) we wrote, or have written. 

ty^y-iTi myfo.^ erfe ye wrote or have written 

'iyfCL^-M nyfoL^-ar they wrote or have written 



(1) This Tense has always reference to continued action , or a re- 
petition of action. 

It is formed from the present , by adding the augment, and chang-» 
ing &> into a in Barytona , and & into pQ<x* in perispomena. The 
Vulgar say -ypa^ *ps> sre, avs in the plural and thus confound the se- 
cond persons plural of this and of the present tense. The Value of the 
Term continuative % as a definition of this Tense, will more clearly ap- 
pear when we come to the Imperative and Subjunctive Moods. 

(2) This Tense in correct writing has always reference to action 
completed at once , and never tD continued or repeated action : by 
using the same form I wrote for this and the preceding Tense, the 
English Language confounds these two very distinct senses. 

The English has the advantage over iheModer Greek in not confound- 
ing I wrote with I have written; but this distinction of Time is by no 
means of equal importance with the other , as every Englishman 
learning a foreign language must have felt. 

The Aorist is , like the Imperfect , formed from the Present , by 
assuming an augment , and changing the characteristic : In perispomena 
£> is changed into n ij y.; as ■jrar-o), sTrar-naa I Tip.a>, eritAYiaflc^ 

(3) The vulgar use -ft>a<j/-a<j.s- sTe-ave in the plural. 



i? 

PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

uyoL ypxiu I had written 

thou hadst written 
he had written 

tt'yoL.utf y?cl'lu (i) we had written 

ye had written 
they had written 

Future tejcse first form. 



£ 'X* 


yfi^u 


ux*c 


y^a^ti 


tl X t 


yptx-^u- 


it^Oi.UiV 


yjptyii (i) 


i/^STt 


ypx-ftt 


i{ X ay 


yfdi^u 







i. st Eng. form:. 


2/ Eng. fo 


Qt\~c* 




I shall write 


I will 


Qih-tix; 




thou wilt write 


thou shalt 


f&K-tl { 


| ypd-^u 


he will write 


he shall 


Qih-ejuiv | 


[ orygx-fu 


we shall write 


we will 


hik-iii 




ye will write 


ye shall 


ft'iK-QM 




they will write 


they shall 



p. 



The first form of the English Translation is the true- 
English Future , indicating simply futurity of action ; the 
second form includes the idea of an exercise of volition on 
the part of the speaker, and of compulsion towards the person 
spoken to or of. This distinction renders the English singu- 
larly correct in its expression of a simply future sense. « Je le 
ferai, je te le promets,» means «I will, or I am determined 
to do it , I promise you;» J'espere que je le ferai demam, 
means « I hope I shall do it to morrow. » The same confusion 
I helieve holds in all the languages in Europe, ours ( as spoken 
by all classes in south Britain ) excepted; and therefore I arn 
obliged to give both forms here ; though not as our Gram- 
marians have 1 think, always, hitherto, done, to the great 



(i) The more correct or approved form alone is given in tlic coir- 
pound tenses. Th§ Vulgar use s?/aus , s^avs , instead of e'^ajfcsv '? eTx,«v. 



4 

confusion of foreigners, and, indeed, of the Natives of Ireland 
and Scotland : as if it. were indifferent which were used to 
express simple futurity , siuill or will, For the grounds of 
the distinctive characters of shall and will^see appendix §. &* 



p. 



FUTURE TENSE SECOND FORM. 





I. st 


a^ 


Of At* yf>a y<u or <p« 


I shall $* 


I will %c. 


Oe'Ag/ - N^ttf - <ptf£ 


thou wilt 8§c. 


Thou shalt ^o 


&'*.« - >|>« - <p^ 


he will c^-c. 


he shall <%-c. 


OsAg/ - *\>VfJ.iV - (pUp IV 


We shall §•£. 


we will 8$c. 


Qiku - \Ltre " <p£3"fc 


ye will <^c. 


ye shall 8cd, 


OeAc/ i -^ovv - cpov 1 ? 


they will &c. 


they shall &•&. 



FUTURE TENSE THIRD FORM, 

as ahore 



5s r« 


or 


u 


7f* 


^61 


Of fco 


Ge r« 


- 


u 


- 


r^^C 


(pr,C 


06 F(X 


£ 


8a 


- 


\pW 


X (p?7 


Qe vd 


- 


0a 


• - 


\f/W^£K 


- <pupw 


hi VOL 


- 


0« 


- 


\^£T6 


<piT£ 


^1 VOL 


- 


9«' 


- 


\^<jy/ 


* <pcuy 



imperative mood (i) 
present or continuative tense. (aq 



& 


yfape 


write thou 




ct-Q y%&$y\ 


let him write 


R 


<x.Q yfOL^afjai 


let us write 




yfayiTi 


write ye 




a$ ypzipouv 


let them write 



(i) the Name and Nature of the Mood implies futurity, 
(a.) This Tense is formed from the present of the indicative, by 
•hanging the final o into % in Barytona. The w/ in perispomena of fch« 



49 

AORIST OH INDEFINITE*, (i) 

% Ypa-vj/g or-iov Write tbou 

«; yp«^ ^et him write 

Po tr% ypa^-(d{£e9 let us write 

Ypa-^sTS write ye 

«§ Ypa i |ouv let them write 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (2) 

So va ypao-6> that I write ; may , or should write 

va ypao-r^ thou write, mayst or shouldst write 

va Ycao-vi he write, may, or should write 

P. va yfteo-catstt we write, may, or should write 

va vQa(p-£T£ ye write, may, or should write 

va ypac°6uv they write, may, or should write 



Erst class becomes gT, and in those of the second «. The reasons for 
this shall be given in their proper places. 

This Tense, when used by correct speakers or writers, always im- 
plies continued or repeated action. Indeed the Vulgar generally make 
the distinction: fjofye means write on, or write frequently; as, ^oaepe pou 
•saxt; fyJQt, ava^xviv tb; €&r,8sias picu, write to me, whenever you have need 
of my assistance; ^pa^s/A^Xtxoi J4a8'e %s'pav, write English everyday. 
It would be as great a grammatical error to use the Aorist in the 
above cases, as this tense, whenever an action to be at once performed 
is contemplated. 

Both Tenses, as well as the corresponding tenses of the subjunctive, 
notwithstanding their Names, have necessarily a reference to futurity: 
the first of each always implying action to be continued , or repeated ; 
the Aorist, in correct writing or speaking, never. 

(1) This Tense is formed from the Aorist of the indicative, by the 
suppression of the augment , and the change of the Termination « into 
e or cv 

(2) Formed from the present of the indicative, by changing si of the 
final syllable into « with an 1 underwritten, and cp.sv? into couav ? as well in 
barytona as in perispoinena. 

This Tense implies action to be continued or repeated. 

The Vulgar use ■vscfocau.e and -vcaacuve in the i.st and 3:d persons plural 

' ' "' 4 



5, v3c ypa'j'-w that I write, may, or should write 

thou 8$ 6. ._, as above. 



:>£> 


4 


v3c 


ypa'j'-w 


V3£ 


yp^V^^ 


VflS 


Ypa^L-Ti 


V(X 


ypa^-ct)rx£T 


voc 


ypa^-£TS 
y_pa<J»-ouv 



I. st E. F. 1. A E. F. 



fj.-rflsVa' fp-^t or (pat I should I should \ ^ 

ffiek-zq -fad-tytii- OT Mt thou wouldsfe thou shouldstf % *' 

•/(OeV-s ypa-tpet iw cpei he would he should' ^ g 

P. ^6£X-a(xsv ypa-i|>et or ©a we should we should 

•/IOsX-sts- ypcc-^ct, o/ ! &£t ye would ye should 

rJOfiVav' ypa-^ei or (pet they would they should 



The second English form is used to express the hypo* 
thesis, the first the consequence , whenever that consequence 
is necessary, and independent of volition or compulsion-. 
as in form, so in sense, it is analogous with the first form 
of the future. When the exercise of volition on the part of 
the speaker, or of compulsion towards the person spoken 
to or of is to be signified , a third form analogous with 
the second form of the future is to he used : I would, thou 
shouldst, he should , we would, ye should , they should* 



(i) Formed from the Aorlst Indicative , by suppressing the augment, 
and changing the Terminations into those of the above tense. 

It is evident , at the first glance , that these Terminations are the same 
in sound as those of the present indicative, and differ only in orthogra^. 
phy. This has led some Grammarians to imagine that there is,proper!y 
speaking, no subjuncf n e Mood in the Modern Greek. 

This position might he tenable , if there were only the present tense 
subjunctive. But where, in the indicative, are we to find theAorist, 
unless in the compound Tenses , which borrow it from the subjunctive? 
Tim tense is never to be used where action to be continued., or repeated 
Is implied. 



it 



CONDITIONAL 2.d FORM. 



I. st E. F. 



§-. $$&* YP<H W or ?» I shoiild I should j £ 

gQ £ ^g ypa-i^ — 971; tliouwouldst thoushouldstl j* 

Y)6e>.2 ypa-^vi ~<pvi he would he should U 

Pv TiQeXs Ypa-^w^^^H-^ we should we should 

^8e>.s yp«-^T£ — costs ye would ye should 

yJQsXs ypa-^ouv — <pow they would they should ) & 

Participle uncieclined y$d<pbvtoLt (1) writing. 

What has been said of the proper rendering of the Greek 
Tenses into English in the Active voice applies of course 
equallv to the Passive voice. It has been thought more ad- 
vantageous to subjoin the preceding notes to the particular 
Tenses , than to reserve the subject altogether for an Ap- 
pendix. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. (?) 

S. ypao-oaai I am written 

vpacD-ecafc thou art written 

ypacp-sToa he is written 

P, Y'p&<p-o£s6a (3) we are written 

Yfao-scOs ye are written 

Ypa<p-ovTfct they are written. 



(1) From the present of the Indicative, by changing the Termination 
to in barytona, into crra; 5 and to, in perhpbmena^ into suvra? and S>VTa?* 

(2) From the present indicative active, by changing to into cuat in bury- 
tona, and, in perispomena in & from £&, into ouw.at, or eioupatj in 3> from 
«o> into S)f;.a'.. 

(3) Vulgarly ^acp-cup.a^e, o?" ou^g^s., *ypa<p-sce, -yp!»!p-euvTa:« 



5-2- 



IMPERFECT OR CONTINUATIVE. (l) 



5. eypa^p-opiv or (2) eypacp-ou^ouv (s) I was written 

sypacp-oucttv or eypa(p-oo<rouv (e) thou Wast written 

sygsfljp-eT^' or eypa<p-ouvTav (e) he was written 

P. eypacp-ojAeOa' or eypa<p-ou(/.acT£ o/" ^s we were written 

iypafp-g^Ge or sypacp-ouaacTe or s<r£ ye were written 

gypacp-ovTO o/* sypa^p-ouvTistv («■) they were written 



AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 



(3) 



S. £ypacp-9v]V - Gvjfca (4) 
sypo^p-0vi; - Oy]Z££ 
sypa^-071 - OyiJce 

P. eypa<jp-67)|/.ev * Ovfzajxsv 
sypa^p-8y)Te - Ovficsirs 
eypa^-Ovjcav - 0*^>cav 



I was, or have Been written 
thou wast, or hast been written 
he was, or has been written 
we were, or have been written 
ye were, or have been written 
they were, or have been written 



(1) Tlie Imperfect is formed from the present of the indicative, by 
prefixing the augment, and changing, in barytdna,the termination ojao*' 



anto 



/JfcVlV y OUjAOUV, OUfAOUVS. 



Perispomena from aca , change u{c»r into wjayjv. The vulgar terminations 



OUJi-OUV, GUJ/.OUVS 



are common to both classes. 



(2) The vulgar use r) as the augment 7i-ypa»-cop>ouv etc. ; and in the first 
and second persons plural use ouj/.e<re and ougs^s .' they sometimes omit 
the augment: They also add an s to the i.st a.d and 3.d persons sin- 
gular, and to the 3.cT person plural ; and then necessarily advance the 
accent a syllable ;as vfypacpoupxuvs etc. ; s^pa^cucas-e-- is by a common syn- 
cope contracted into I'yp&feo^r. 

(3) The Aorist passive is formed from the aorist active, by changing 
the characteristic , and the termination a into yjv OF nxfc 5. as 'e%a&a , 
6-Ypacp8-viv-ifl>ca;.£7raT>Tffa , eTrarrjOyiv ; STtfiviaa , eTt^Oriv. 

(4) The vulgar use Tfypafy-Twc* vr(?a.y-mxsq etc. , that is substitute ? 
for'6 , in the second form , and sometimes omit the augment} as •$&$* 
m^-a- e£-e- ^poMpim-a^s-sTe-ave^ 



PRETERPLUPERFECT TENSE. 
VULGARLY 

S* st/a ypa<p-Gvj or vn I had been written 

el/g; ypa<p-Grj or zri thou hadst been written 

dyi ypa<p-Qv) or t^ he had been written 

P. £!,'/a;jLcV ypa<p-G-/i or tti we had been written 

st/STa ypao-Gvi' or tv} ye had been written 

gl^ov ypa<p-G-?; or Tvi they had been written 

FUTURE TENSE I st FORM, OR COMPOSITION. 

I, st ENG. FORM. 2. d ENG. FORM. 

S. 6eXd> ypa<p07j I shall be I will be 

GeXsts ypa^Ovj thou wilt be thou shall be 

BeXa ypoc^pOvi he will be he shall be 

P. OeXo(JE.£v ypao&vj we shall be we will be 

DsXsts ypaoOyj ye will be ye shall be 

or A° U<7t 1 ypa<p8$j they will be they shall be 



FUTURE TENSE 2. FORM OR COMPOSITION. 



r* O 

« S 



6a £t 


ypacp-GS 


or 


ypflqp-co[/.ai 


OeXci 


ypacp-Oyj; 


or 


-ypa©-£<jai 


(MXsk 


ypa<p-6*o 


or 


ypa<p-£Tat 


BlXst 


ypa©-Gco>/.£V 


or 


to.uuQa 


eiXei 


ypa<p-Gy]T§ 


or 


safe 


•sXei 


ypa<p-Gouv 


or 


cov-at 



H 



Cfl 



EUTURE TENSE 3/ FORM, OR COMPOSITION. 

S, 8s vie or 6a ypacp-G£ O/' ypaocojxai _, «• 

Gs va or Ga ypacp-Gvis or ypacpscai 2 — -§ 

Gs va or Ga ypacp-Gvj or ypa^psxat H s ~ 

P. Gs va or Ga eft?, as in the 2, d form 



(i) The Vulgar employ their usual forms , and say 6i v$cl<d-vu , 
\pccp-f oyve, 8« •ypawo-jp.^c , •ypotyoVYTfc; : see the subjunctive. 



}-/.. 



54 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

PRESENT Oil CONTINUATIVE TENSE, (l) 

S. " ypaep-ou be thou written 

a; yp'fi&p-eTai let him be written 

P. a; ypacp-co^eOa let us be written 

yp«<p-£a9e be ye written 

a§ ypa<p-covTat let them be written 

AORIST OR INDEFINITE. (2) 
VULG. 

be thou written 
<pT?) let him be written 

cpTWfjiev let us be written 

<pTvjT£ be ye written 

cpTouvs let them be written 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (3) 

S. va yp«-ofo)'p.fici that I. be , may, or should be written 
vgc ypa-^SG^t thou be, mayst, or shouldst be written 

va yp.a^£Tat he be , may, or should be written 

P. va ypa-owjxsOa we be , may, or should be written 

va ypa-<p£<7.Qe ye be , may, or should be written 

va Ypa-<pcovTai they be , may, or should be written 

Ihe Vulgar say ypa-©o£{*-a<jT6 0/ 1 £GT£ and ypatpouvtai. 



s. 


ypa^ou 




aq ypacpOvi 


p. 


a; ypaoOtop-cV 




ypa(pO'?i'T£ 




ag ypaoOofiv 



cu.-/t 



(ij Th-3 Tense is formed from the present indicative by changing 1 
into ou. The 2.d person plural is, in the active as well is passive 
Voice, in Barytona and Perispomena, the same as in the present In- 
dicative. It takes the terminations of the subjunctive mood In the i.st. 
and 3.d persons plural. 

(2) The same as the aorist Subjunctive Passive , except in the second 
person singular , which has the characteristic of the aorist Imperative^ 
active , with the termination ou. 

(3) In Barytona from the present of the Indicative , by changing 0/ 
into co , as in the active: thus <yoa'f-ou.*i : va ^fa\/.%b Perispomena change 



AORIST Or INDEFINITE, 
VULG. 

$, vsc yp«<p-G<S o/' tw that I be, may, or should bo eh 
va ypy-o-Or;; or t^ thou be etc, 

ya ypwp-Gvi or tyi' he be etc. 

P. vavpao; ft l or touixs we be etc. 



I OOUW.5V 



va ypa<p-t)*?rre or wrs ye 



be etc. 



va ypacp-0opv or touvs they be etc. 

From the aorist of the Indicative, by suppressing the 
augment , -and changing the termination w into a circumr 
flexed. The termination is varied , as in the aorist active , 
and is throughout circumflexed on the vowel or diphthong 
immediately succeeding the characteristic. 



L st ENG. FORM. 2. d ENG. FOHM> 

S, ®£kz ypa ? -e^ or tvJ I should be I should be (i) J 
f$£Ae£ ypa<p-9*?j or ttj thou wouldst be thou shouldstbe'| 
this ypacp-Gvj or ttj he would be he should be £ 

P. y$£Ao[/.£v yppup-Gyj or ttj we should be we should be J' 
tiOsasts ypaip-Ovi or t/j ye would be ye should be v 
•/j&£Aav ypa^-Oy] or tv) they would be they should be £ 

£-4 

o 



also sT into •/• ; as.Tra-eToai , va Trarrisat , and ou into w ; as <*a-rcu[*at , wa- 
TGuo.sOa; subj: V a irarupAi, va -7raTwu,s6« 5 but the change of ou into S> is 
littie attended to, and is deemed affected. 

(1) There is a third English form for this Tense, when determina- 
tion, or the exercise of Volition, on the part of the speaker , ( i.st 
Person ) or of compulsion towards those spoken to, or of ( 2.d, and 
3. d Persons) is to be si-mfed. I would, thou shouldst , he should , we 
would , ye should, they should. See Appendix §. 4, 



■ 



S, fc vj9&s ypa<p-65 or ypa<p~co(4.ai $ 

vjGe^S; YP a ,?"*^ ^ Ypa^p-etyat ^ 

pA.£ ; ypacp-Gyi or ypa^-eTat rg^ g 

I'c $6e^& ypacp-6S{x£v or ypa^-to[/.e6a ^ ~Q 

vjfk^s ypa(p-6v; : Ts r r ypacp-effGe $ 

•fc'OeXe ypa<p-(k>G'v o/' ypa^-wvTa& H 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT. (l) 

ypa^pdjx. - evo; -s &vt> - evov. being written,, 

PARTICIPLE PAST. (2) 

ypscf^ -... f/iyoc; - tyiyn - (iivov Written. 

I have preferred ranging the Conditional , or Hypothetic 
Tenses under the Subjunctive, instead of under the Indicative 
Mood, where the Author has ranged them. 

Since future and conditional, as well as past and present 
Action, mny he repeated, or continued Action, whenever the 
idea of Habit, continuation , or repetition is to be expressed % 
the Modern Greek, with great advantage, employs the Tenses 
of the different Moods in both Voices, which I have, pn that 
account, called Continuative : as Mku yf4<pa *<*'? n/uifav 7 1 shall 
write daily, and not Sthti yfatyfr ; tfOexe y$oiqtQ ffv%va , ccv ti'x& 
Kotijot • I should write often, if I had time, and not S0c\« y^a^a* 
The Modern Greeks have no difference of form for I shall 
write, and I shall have written ; or for I should write , and 
I should have written. 

(1) From the present of the indicative passive, by changing ^ai in 
barytona, and, in perispomena from so, into p.svcc, *ypc«fo-{/.at ,7pacp&-p.£vo?, 
ftZTou-paA , xa-cu-p^vo?. Perispomena from ao> change the fi> into 06 ; as. 
from Mtp&pai , ioijt-qyrxevo? ^ but those who pique themselves on their 
correctness ( or rather Hellenism ) say jccip.-&>fA£vos. 

(1) From the aorist of the Indicative , by suppressing the augment , 
changing the characteristic, and substituting the termination e'vo;, parox- 
ytonon, for yjv; as from e^acp6y;v, <ypap.(jL-£vc?. ; from eirarriGviv , waTYifWvcs \ 
from ixptfLtOviv , xouwp-£vo£. These participles are both declined lik? 
adjectives in ? ? vi , cv of the second Declension, 



5? 
SECOND PART. 

Yiew of the Conjugation of Verbs called Perispomena 
Contracted from Hellenic Verbs in ia. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 

PRESENT TENSE. 







I. St E. F. 


a.* e. f. 


S. rcar-co 


(?) 


I trample (a) 


I am trampling 


tig 




thou tramplest 


thou art trampling 


$ 




he tramples 


he is trampling 


OUpL£V (3) 


we trample 


we are trampling 


Eire 




ye trample 


ye are trampling 


o'jy 


(3) 


they trample 


they are tramplingy 



a' 



IMPERFECT OR CONTINtTATIVE TENSE. 

iiraT-ouc« (4) I trampled or was 

s'jTaT-oijGs; thou trampledst or wast 
£?u«t.-ougs or ipdfoeiB he trampled or was 

£:waT-o'j<7a»j!.£v (5) we trampled or were 

£nraT-oii(j£TS ye trampled or were 

siraT-doOcay (d) they trampled or were 



(i) Contracted from waT-eWsic-eet-s^pv-eVrs.-souvJ 

(2) I use this -word to avoid introducing a circumlocution , such as 
tread under foot, since it is sometimes used in an active sense, without 
a preposition. 

(31 The Vulgar use oufu-ouve. 

(4) Contracted from iwaT-^isu(ra-EOUffS5-EOU(re-sou<r*(A£v-20UffST6-*e6UffavJ 

(5) The Vulgar omit the augment , and use afteatpe, weave in the l.st 
md 3.d persons plural. 






58 

AORIST ©R INDEFINITE. 

I trampled or have 

thou traihpledst or hast 

he trampled or has 

we trampled or have 

ye trampled or have 1 & 

they trampled or have J 

PLUPERFECT. 

^v a sIve; ely £ ircflfpffrtt I had, thou hadst, he had trampled, etc. 

FUTURE TENSE I. st FORM. 

i . st I shall, thou wilt trample, etc. 

etc. 



S. e^ar/ic-a 




e? 




£ 




P. eTuaTvfc-apv 


(0 


£T£ 




■^aTv-^av 


(l) 



!i . st I shall, thou wilt trample, 
a.a I will, thou shalt trample, 



2. FORM. 

r i. st T shall etc. 



Hlv. iraT-r'cfw or S, t{<j7jc or-?j;, ?{c« or vi < , " T „ 

■• ' ' J 2. I will etc. 

3. d FORM. 

**'-»■■■< / - / ~ / - f i- st * shall, etc, 

1 ' ' • j2. 1 will ? ete. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (2) 

S. xairst and tc«t£is trample thou 

slc, tcgctyi let him trample 

P. 'kc, 77aTou(jL£v let us trample 

TraT£iT£ trample ye 

a; rcaTouv let them trample 



(1) Tlic Vulgar omit the augment here also , and use r'saas wave. 

(2) From the present imperative regular of 7raTe'w, -ndttz TrotTs'sTS, by 
contraction of the two £ into the diphthong et , ^atst, , Wareire; as etya 
from lex* : see chapter 21 - 5 , rea-rets is for warse by the insertion of 
the iota, Ionice, between the two e. 



p. 



$9 

A0RIST OR INDEFINITE. 

icrefaacs trample thou fye. as aboye 

7TaT*/)G£T£ 
«£ TTaT'/fcouV 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 



PRESENT TENSE ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 



S. va 



P. 






•TITS 

ouv 



that I trample, may, or should 
thou trample, mayst, or shouldst 
he trample, may, or should 
we trample, may, or should 
ye trample, may, or should 
they trample, may, or should 



S. VOI 7wOT"/{ff-Ct> 

7) 



P. 



AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 



£7£ 
OUV 



English as above , but not 
in a continuative sense. 



CONDITIONAL TENSE I s * COMPOSITION, 



P. 




ENG. FORM. 

I should 
thou wouldst 
he would 
we should 
ye would 
they would 



a. d ENG. FORM. 
I should 
thou shouldst 
he should 
we should 
ye should 
thev should 









3. a English Form when volition, is the i. st Person, or 
compulsion, iC the i. and 3. d Persons, is to be signified; I 
would, thou shouldst, he should , we would , ye should, 
they should, For the correct use of the 3 forms , see ap« 
pendix § 2. 



& 



P, 



CONDITIONAL 


TENSE 2. COMPOSITION. 


vjOe^s 7raT-7)G-(0i 


or 


& Efiglish as above 


7raT-7)GYlS 


or 


r 


Kcn-ycn 


or 


77 aT-yfccop.sv 


or 


OU[/.£V 


TuaT-vfffSTe 


or 


7jT£ 


7raT-vf<jquv 


or 


OUV 



Participle undeclined ■srareuj'Tac trampling, 
PASSIVE VOICE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD* 







PRESENT. 






s. 


re act ou[/.ai 


£tOU{JLat 


(x) 


I am 






stcat 


£1£<7C« 




thou art 






arm 


£t£T«& 




he is 


3 


p< 


OU(JL£60C 


aou^-a^fi ore^s 


we are 


£ 












c$ 




eia6s 


eteVs 




ye are 


U 

*-> 




GoVTai 


stouvTat 




they are 





(1) Is formed from the present of the indicative active by changing 
the final & into ou|/.ai aoujjt.at : see page 5i , note 2. The vulgar form 
is frequently written with 75 instead of ei ? as noup.at ? and not etoup.at. 



tin 

IMPERFECT ( COFTmUATIVE. ) 

S» (i) eiraT-oupiv o'J(/.ouv or vs I wa s 

ouffov ofoouv ve thou wast 

*ito ouvrav ve (2) he was 

P« o%sOa oua-a(7T£ 57s we were 

sfcOs ou(j-a<7fa s^e ye were 

ouvto quvt«v vs (2) they were 

AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 

S. £T:aT7]6-Y)v or vi'.a I was^ or have heen 

US %m£ trampled <^c. 

Sometimes written without an augment 1 ivoLTr.hxo!. S^c> 

PLUPERFECT. 

ily-ot. j a; , £ , ap.sv etc. , izz-rM I had been trampled etc, 

FUTURE I st FORM. 

6&-W, £i£, a ete. , war/iOvi I shall, thou wilt be trampled etd 

2. d FORM. 

0el& narrfi-Co or ?:aT-wpt.ai English as above, 



(1) The Vulgar often prefix yj as the augment , and often omit 
the augment altogether, in all the persons, but the first person plural , 
which, unaugmented, could not be distinguished from the i.st P. pL 
present. They often insert et or yj throughout as etou^ouv, or r,ouucu», 
siouffcuv, or TiOucouv etc. 

(2) When the e is added to the 3.d persons singular andplnral, 
the accejU must necessarily be acute fa™** 



6i 

3/ forM. 
0e va or 6a 7ccmiG-<o 0/ 1 irar-Spat English as above. 

Sis riffat eft;* 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present or Continuative. 

8, %«ir6S (i) 5>e thou trampled 

&s waT/iTai let him be trampled 

P* Sc? 7raT(«{Ae0flt let Us be trampled 

TCfltTewjGe iztxriBi^i he ye trampled 

&S -rcaTwvTai waToiJvTat let them be trampled* 

AORIST OR INDEFINITE* 

S* ttbenfcou 

a; waTviG^ I The English as above, but not 

P. h 7uaT"/iGo)(X£v } in a continuative sense. 

7raT'/]0yjT£ 

&£ TCflCTTlGoUV 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE. (a) 

S.' va iraT-w[xat - ov[x.at sioty-at that I he trampled (3) 
TCaT-?i<7'at stecai thou be trampled 

war-yiTat fcsrfc* he be trampled 

P. 7uaT-w^£0a-ou(jt.£Ga^ou(x-a<r£-£(7s we be trampled 
TrotT-faGs 6 ^f s ye be trampled 

TCaT-wvTat ouvfat ewuvrat they be trampled 



(i) Contracted from war sou , imperative, formed regularly froris 
ftr&teopatj as irocTsTaGat, contracted from ^ars'saSs* 

(2) See Page 54 > Note 3. 

(3) Or, that I may or should, thou mayst or shouldst ,lie may of 
should , we may or should , ye may or should , they may or should be 
trampled. 



63 



A0RT3T OR INDEFINITE. 



s. 


va warn 


B w-vj^J 


p. 




co;x£v or ouja 

5rce 

ouv or ouvs 



English as above, but not ifr 
the sense of continuation, 
or repetition. 



CONDITIONAL I. st FORM OR COMPOSITION. 

I^ENG.FORM. 2. a ENG.F0RM. 3. d ENG. FORM* 

f 1 . 



S, rSiO< 



P. ^OIX- 



£ 
0H/.S' 



1 should I should I would 

thou woitldst thou shouldst thou shouldst 
She would he should he should 
we should 



5 we should 
* ye would 



ye Siiov 



ild 



we would 

ye should 



£Ae 



they woula they should they should 

CONDITIONAL 2. a FORM , OR COMPOSITION. 



o 



S< jOsX'fij Tr«T7)0-W- 


or 


TC'OL" 


—5 [j, at ■ 


5* 


cr 




TiCM 


7i 


or 




^Tat 


fi>{A& 


or 




w^eOa 


7)7S 


or 




•?]cr9e 


OUV 


or 




cov-rat 






participles' 



The 3 English forms 
&s above , to be used 
as the import of the 
context may require, 
according to the prin- 
ciples laid down in the 
appendix § 2 :see p. 5o* 



PRESENT, 

|[s6T-oup.£VQS , QujAeV/] , ofysvov , Being trampled, 



PAST. 



pa?mevo£-$VYi-£vQV , 



trampled, 



64 

THIRD PART. 

Second Class of Verbs, called Perispomena, contracted 
from Verbs in mi 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 
PRESENT TENSE; 

j. st E. FORM. 2. a E. FORM. 

& Ti(JL-& or aw (i) I honor * I am honoring 

a? ocst; thou honorest thou art honoring 

a aet he honors he is honoring 

to Ttp.-oup.ev (2) we honor we are honoring 

«ts ye honor ye are honoring 

oOv (2) they honor they are honoring 

IMPERFECT ( CONTINUATIVE. ) (3) 

S; (4) £Ttpu<j-a I honored , or was honoring 

eq thou honoredst, or wast honoring 

I, sTtfAas (5) he honored , or was honoring 

P, £Tip.ou<j-ap.£v v/e honored , or were honoring 

£ts ye honored , or were honoring 

sTipLouc-av they honored, or were honoring 



(1) This fotm, not contracted, is in use in the Morea : some, particu- 
larly the Inhabitants of the Ionian Islands, even Convert these Verbs 
into Barytona, by inserting a £ between the a. and the Termination ; 
from TYipaw for T /ipw , contracted from rnplu j I observe , or look at } 
( See page 67 , note 1 ) they form Tvjpafr), and, taking g for the 
characteristic of the Aorist , they say d*%$|a-; 

(2) The Vulgar say Dj« , oSvs , to avoid the v final, which they also 
drop in the accusative singular of Nouns; 

(3) This Tense is conjugated as the same Tense of irarS; 

(4) The Vulgar omit the augment, aad say Ttp-oua-a? e; , e , Tiw-ou<jciue 
6ua£T£ , ouoav or guukvs. 

(5) Some insert a ^ in certain Verbs , between a and the Termination : 
as BTpa-jfoO^s , he sung , instead of eTpoqou^ooe, 



6$ 

AORIST. 

XL , , 

5. ITlfAW-Ct 

I 
J*. iTifiw-UfitV 

Iff flip -*r 

PLUPERFECT TEWSE. 

S, eJx** ^ ^ ' iac ^ honored 

k> J thou hadst honored 

* \ 2 he had honored 

P. il-Y-auLtv ( 3- we had honored 

1 ye had honored 

J they had honored 



I honored 7 


or 


have honored 


thou honoredst } 


or 


hast honored 


he honored , 


or 


has honored 


we honored ? 


or 


have honored 


ye honored , 


or 


have honored 


they honored, 


or 


have honored 







FUTURE TEASES k St COMPOSITIOKV 

I st ENG-. FORM. 2. a EK"G, FORM, 

I shall \ I will 

thou wilt J , thou shait 

he will I | he shall 

we shall / Q we will 

ye will L ye shall 

they will they shall 

FUTURE TENSE: 2. d COMPOSITION. 

I. St ENG-. FORM. 2* d EIS T G-. FO 

Icmj ri^-mcj or £ I shall I will 

wu or <x 

wwy.iv or upiY Or o-J t ju.ir or Wfil 

YKrtfi or are 

viwovr O? rui 



6<$ 



FtJTURE TENSE ; S.& COMPOSITION, 
- % , r. , } ri/j, - wu» writ- view 8s C. En 

m va. or ua I or ' - - ' - ' c r 

) Tip. "00 -a<; - ct c^C, 



glish as above 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
PRESENT TENSE (CONTINUATIYE. ) 



S. rifAd (i) 

at; rijua, 

P. CLQ 7l ( U.to[AlV 

T/ ( MfcT£ 
a% 7!(AQV¥ 



honor thou 
let him honor 
let us honor 
honor ye 
let them honor 



AORIST. 



s. 


TlfAWi 




a$ Tipvicni 


p. 


d( Tl/AMtofJLif 




TtfAtlVlTl 



The English as in th* present ,. 
hut not in a continuative 



CI? TljAWGVY 



sense. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT TENSE ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 

S. vd Tip-a* (a) That I honor, may, or should honor 

a? thou honor, mayst, or shouldst honor 

a he honor, may, or should honor 

ufAiv (3) we honor, may, or should honor 

an ye honor, may, or should honor 

out they honor, may, or should honor 



VOL 

\ 

VOL 

P. m 

VOL 

y 

VCi 



(l) Contracted from Ttfi.au, as xvpixi from rtpaci 
(a) Contracted from Tip.a» r Ti[/.avi; , tijaac^ , ffte. 
(3) Oup.ev; or ouys* 



CONDITIONAL I.St FORM. Of COMPOSITION. 



6 7 




I should 
thou wonldst 
he would 
we should 
ye would 
they would 



a. je. f. 

should 

shouldst 

should 

should 

should 

should 



E. F. 



3.< 

would 

shouldst 

should 

would 

should 

should 



CONDITIONAL 2-d FORM, OR CGMPOSITION, 



or 



ne 



COUiV 
OfttY, 



Ttfi-a , a.Q , a. , op.iy , art , ovr 

Participle un declined rifiuvraz and rijueOrrag ? 

PASSIVE VOICE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



honorin 



?< 



P. 



Koifj.-coy.xi , 
ary.i 
a rat 

aa§i f 
ovtroti 



PRESENT TENSE 
VULG. 
•W,tt«i (i) 



I. St FORM. 



a, d FORM. 
I sleep , or am sleeping 
thou sleepest, or art sleeping- 
he sleeps , or is sleeping 
6uftotff7i 9 o'jfjLtrTi we sleep , or are sleeping 
uwTi ye sleep, or are sleeping 
they sleep \ or are sleeping 



(i) The Author gives the form of the deponent Verb %otp.Sfjtat instead 
of the passive of tifi.fi> ; not because tiuS has no passive; but because , in 
the vernacular language, the active form of the second class of Perispo- 
mena is preferred to that of the first j insomuch that almost all Perispo- 
mena active are formed like rip.5. Thus it is usual to say aaoXou8-5>, «; , 
d, etc. I follow etc. ; -rnpS, a? , a etc. I observe etc. instead of dxoXou6-w, 
el;, sT; -rr.p-w, st; , el, which would be more correct. This preference holds 
very generally ; but , as a sort of compensation , the form of the 
first class , that of tjktb . is preferred for the conjugation of the 
passive ; and it is much more usual to say rtp.oup.at , or 71p.s101ifx.flU 
than xtp.wp.at , which would be more correct, or, rather, more analo- 
gical. Thus the idiom of the Vernacular language strongly inclines 
to the blending of the two. There are however some Verbs which 
resist this tendency , and preserve, in part , the form of the second 



6& 

IMPERFECT TENSE ( C03TTI]N T tJATIvE. ) 

VULG. 

S. Ixciy.uyw zoijuovu-ovv or ovvt (f) 

iKGl/A&7QY KOIIJLO'OG'OVV OT CVM 

IKCiy.CLTO , iKClUOVyTClV KQlfiOVyT-&V OT aVl 

Vt iK0iy.G>Utflclf ZZCt i UOV l U-a<?Ti OF i<JTi KOlfJLO'J U-0'.<TTI OT t(TTi 

txoiucicrvi i-KOiyova -can Or WTfc kciugug -aeri or iCTt 

ty.oiy.uYTO tKOiyouvTav y.ci'f/:cvyr-av or ayi 

The English ( always in a sense of continuation , or 
repetition ) is, I slept , or was sleeping, thou didst sleeps 
cr wast sleeping, he slept, or was sleeping , we slept 7 
or* were sleeping , ye slept, or were sleeping, they, slept ? 
or were sleeping. 

ACXRIST. 

!?. (2) hioiyy^nv or Yi^mct I slept or have slept 

lifag of vQukzg thou didst sleep of hast slept 

«0y or /Ojjjft he slept or has slept 

rftnuiv or v^mayiv we slept or have slept 

ifon or ufejxsTfc ye slept or have slept 

rfiwoLf or $ way they slept or have slept 



elass,in the passive: *oiji&pai is of tlie number ', and has been therefor® 
preferred as a type of this part of the conjugation, in its least corrupted 
siate. 

It has been observed that these Verbs preserve, in part only, fh© 
form of the second class of Perispomena. The vulgar sacrifice the & , 
and change it into o\> , as in those of the first , and have preserved 
the a in the present Tense only of each Mood. 

(1) The. Vulgar contract m\pt&aw;t lntc ' *oi£cu<r6; an( * sometimes 
use the augment throughout. In the 3.d Person Singular and PFurah 
if the s be added, the accent must be acute. 

(a) The vulgar omit the augment, and say xcijjrifoteecj sj, e* 



fy 

PLUPERFECT. 

fix a > \ I had slept 

tc I . thou hadst sleut 

t \ *% he had slept 

fiX'fiLpw I » we had slept 

m I ye had slept 

i?X?oir J they had slept 

FUTURE TENSE I. st COMPOSITION. 

&A-& ; £/J , £J , cytV 5 £7t , OVK KOl^H (i) I slltill sleep. 

2,d COMPOSITION. 

fl , J JL8lfJL1$-tt , 5~C , ?T , W«f7 , »?T€, CuV 

I yLoiy.-uy.on ^ aaui , uraj > uutvx y acue f tivrai 



3/ 



COMPOSITION. 



J x.oiy.-uy.oLi , aaou, oltoli, u/Atvx, aavt, uvTOLt. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 



S. Koiyou (2) 




sleep thou. 


«f oltcli 




let him sleep. 


P. a'c w/xe0a 


VULG. 


Jet us sleep. 




aa-Tfc 

OWTCU 


sleep ye 

let them sleep. 



(1) The two English Forms, as in the Future of tium , substituting 
the word sleep for honor. 

(?) Contracted from jtciuaou , as xotaaoSs from xoiuaeate. 



7o 

AG R I ST. 



English as above , but not 



ac Kotfjwh in the sense of repetition ? 

P. ag yLciun^oiuiv or ovpit or continuation. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. MOOD. 



«C Kciy^kvv 



P.r.ESEHT TENSE. ( COWTINUATIVE. ) 
VULG. 



S. ?* Hojp-Suxi or cv^ea that I sleep (A 

«*«' thou sleep 

ctrai he sleep 

P. »//»0<3t or 9vju-a(rTi, 60-76 we sleep 

«V0e or tts-re ye sleep 

or eurT«i they sleep 



mra.1 



JURIST. 

tfri$-& English as above , but not 

v\$ in the sense of repetition % 

y or continuation, 

\ evv ovvt 

CONDITIONAL TENSE I . sS COMPOSITION". 

I.StE. FORM. 1. A E. F. 3.' 1 E. F. 

S. vjhk^a \ I should I should I would 

ec i thou wouldst thou shouldst thou sh. dst 

e \ ^ he would he should he should 

P. Yi&K-aLiJLiv ( |- we should we should we would 

m 1 s ye would ye should ye should 

?0e*.*K / they would they should they should 



r 



(i) I may, or should sleep, thoumayst, or shouldst sleep, etc. : 
sec the same tense of tIja&, 



2. COMPOSITION 



$' tjtljit K0lfl-1$6i 


or 


OfXCLl | 


v% 


or 


acai 


rM . 


or 


ecTcti 


P. vftuUlY 


or 


ujuifa 


wttfTi 


or 


ajOe 


jj8»yj' 


or 


&YTSU 




PARTICIPLES 



w 



7 s 



English as above. 



Present xo/.w eu-uero? , m/uni ? nfjuvov sleeping. 
Past KojjAYifA-me, m , ttor having slept. 

VERB SUBSTANTIVE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD, 



PRESENT TENSE. 



o. upon 






tiaou 






iTfCU 






P. fvccOoc 


UjJL-OUTTi y 


err* 


CfVft 


UdTi 





fe/ ra/ 



I am 

thou art. 
he is 
we are 
ye are 
they are 



IMPERFECT. ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 



VULG. 



S* Huyiv 




WfJ.OVY 






I was. 


wo 




wcvr or 


r 
WOV 




thou wast. 


r 




T1T0V 


V.TOLV, 


VITCLVZ 


he was. 


P. ijulk 




UfA-CLSTt , 


tffTl 




we were. 


m l h } 


W&rfl 


Kflraore 






ye were. 


war 




hr*v 


hrsLV f 


mcLn 


they were. 



(i) For the rulgar changes of * aai into euaat etc, see the present; 
Tense subjunetrve. 



iiju.iv , 

MM , 



AGRISF. 



P. 



may. 



I was , or have bee&. 
th.ou wast , or hast been* 
he was , or has been 
we were , or have been 
ye were , or have been 
they were , or have been. 



PLUPERFECT. 

VX-* > t, i, ccjusv , in j av gtoM , I had been, $££. 





FUTURE 


TENSE I.St COMPOSITION 






I, St E. FORM. 


2.dE. FORMo 


SlK-O 


v^ 


I shall be. 


I will be. 


tic 




thou wilt be. 


thou shalt be. 


it 


\ ^ 


he will be. 


he shall be. 


e t utv 


/ o 


we shall be. 


we will be. 


ITZ 


1 « 


ye will be* 


ye shall be, 


cvy. 


J *** 


they will be. 


they shall be* 



2.4 COMPOSITION 

fahu vpoa y wai y wen , fyc. , or oraO- q , tic , J , fy.C. 

3. d COMPOSITION. 
6fc m , or 6a JJ<ua/, mat, hat , 8$C. , utcS-q , w C > f > §"^ v 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTJNUATIVE. ) 

S. eo-0 be thou. 

Sc hat let him be 

P. iijuiQ-ot. let us be 

«V v>vk or M7t be ye 

«V hou let them be. 



(i) The vulgar say g-afaix-a, s;> s, *fc. Without augment. 



p 




ytfvov 


?. 


ac 
a? 


yi/yy; y 
yu'vujutv 
yitnrt , 




«v 


yiirow , 



s.> 



p. 



p. 



a ^.a^ 



« t'OCi 






AORlbT, OR INDEFINITE. 

English as above, but not iu 
the sense of repetition, or 
continuation, 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 

that I be, may, or should be 
thou be, mavst, or shouldst be 
he be, may , or should be 
we be, may , or should he 
moLdh ye be, may , or should be 

they be, may , or should be 

AORIST. ( INDEFINITE. ) 

English as above , but not ia 
a continuative sense. 



s. m*- 



>tfik- 



V 

UjU.lV 
ITi 

cvy 

CONDITIONAL I.St FORM OR COMPOSITION. 

I. St E. F. '2. E. F. 3.d E. F 

I should should would 
thou wouldst shouldst shouldst 

he would should should 

we should should would 

ye would should should 

j - ^ they would should should 

CONDITIONAL 2.d FORM OR COMPOSITION, 



£ 

ciy.iv 

ITi 



I 



r n 1 yjuat , 

vViktior , i 

{ (TTOLV-U 



YldCLl , 



net . n/jiVx. 



w^t , 






, OOUiV , >]li , OVt 



Participle indeclinable a 



GfTCU 



bein: 



J 



CHAPTER XXVII. 

REMARKS OH THE VERBS. 

FIRST PART. 

OF THEIR ACCENT. 



I. The accentuation of Verbs is easy. The Accent is always 
retracted as much as the genius of the language will per-? 
mit. For determining what and where it should be , at- 
tention must be paid to the terminations; since there ar« 
some , which will not admit of the retraction of the Ac- 
cent to the Antepenult. They are those formed with the 
vowels co and n , and the Diphthongs u and ov , ( except 
when this last , ev , appears in the vulgar form of the i .st 
and a.d persons of the Imperfect Indicative Passive , 
iyfdfou/uLovr , iyfa<pov<rovy. ) These same terminations require 
a substitution of the acute for the circumflex, Thus the 
Penult of rfiyz is circumflexed ; of r^yo acuted. 

i. The Aorist of the Subjunctive Passive is always cir- 
cumflexed on the same syllable : vd y^a<p9a> , vd yfoifHuyiv , 
yd y<f%f -3->jt£ ; vol GroL7*}§-.cd uytv , or ovy.iv, rjrt ; vol y.oiyn§-(2 , 
oytv , or ovy.iv , yiti. 

3. In Perispomena, or circumflexed Verbs , ( that is , 
in their present and imperfect Tenses , which are the only 
Tenses that undergo contraction , or have any thing dis- 
tinctive from the Verbs called Barytona ) the accent is 
always on the syllable resulting from the contraction , 

t'&x.Tovyw , iwoLTOvcrcy , tzrarov yiQct ; tKOiyoynv , iKoiyart , 

sKOiyaytSz, circumflex, or acute, according to the gene- 
ral principles of accentuation. The second person singular 
of the Present Tense Imperative Active, is an exception ; 
because the accent does not fall upon the contracted syllable: 

izrmtt , Grant; riyai , riyct. 

The Aonsts *vtqltwol , tTi'ywa ; itarctr^uv , triynSviv , not 
being circumflexed, though parts of circumflexed Verbs, are 
acuted, and follow the Rules for Barytona , which throw 
the accent as far back as possible. 



SECOND PART. 

OF THE CHARACTERISTIC AND ITS CHANGES. 



7 5 



i. The Characteristic of the Imperfect is always the 
same as that of the Present, as well in the Active as Pas- 
sive \oice: yfdpco , yfxtpouca , Imperfect ey^apa , zypottpojuw* 
But that of the Aorist is different. The Characteristic of 
the Aorist Active regulates that of the Aorist, and Parti- 
ciple Past Passive ; and therefore alone demands the Reader's 
particular attention.. 

i. The Aorist Active has , for the most part, but three 
Characteristics tr , % , %L : ifa?t\ivru. , I reigned , epuA«£a , 
I guarded , tyfa^ct , I wrote. Thus , except verbs having 
one of the four liquids, \, p , v , f , as the Characteristic 
of the present in ku , pa , yq , $><y , all verbs , forming 
their Aorist regularly, have one of the above as its Charac- 
tenstic. These three Characteristics of the Aorist Active 
change in the Aorist Passive : thus , o- is changed into , 
or <r9 (i), &0L<riKiv?x, I reigned; iGouriKtvQw , I was governed; 
kCici(Tcc , I forced ; tfiict&vir , I was forced : £ into x^ > 
itpv'xocZz, kfvhctxQyir , I was guarded ; and \|/ into sp9, typx^oc, 
iyfd<pfar. Verbs, having 9 as the Characteristic of the Aorist 
Passive , form the participle past in pivoc : ifixri\tvfay , 
(Ix-iKivy.ivoq , governed ; those having <r9 combined in r^lwc, 
iGns^w , fiats pivot , forced ; those having ^9 combined in 
yy.iroQ , ifjhzxhY , yvKay pivot (2) and , lastly, those having 



(1) Always into G G , in Verbs in £ w , TW , 6m , that is , having 
dentals as the characteristics of their present Tense : aXtoOco , I spin ; 
IkXtttra, I spun; |ylx«c8nvj I was spun; kXcogusvo; ? spun: And in some 
few in > pure , which pratice must teach;' as dexofa , I hear; ^cuca, 
I heard; 3x069611? , I was heard; axotxr^sva; heard: yj.zioi , I shut ; iVJ.staa, 
I shut, or have shut; iyXi'.aHv , I was shut; xXet9p.svo§ ; shut: Also in 
some Verbs in &> ; as, (3a9av£a, I torment; Slavic*, I tormented; 
e€a(yavi«ye-/)v \ I was tormented; ^afcy,*.-., I think; e^aaOnv , I thought; 
S-«/£«<Tuive; , thought. 

(2) The Vulgar usually change this Termination of the Participle 



7 6 
f9 comhined in ^#eyef , with two ,a ( u' fyfaf^W t yf^a^e^f ,. 

written. 

3. It thus appears, that when the Characteristic of the 
Aorist Active is known, it is easy to form the Aorist Pas- 
sive , and thence the Participle Past. Attention, therefore, 
to the above Rules for the change of the Characteristic 
and Termination , with a knowledge of the i.st Person 
Present Indicative of a Verb, will enable the Reader readily 
to form all the other Tenses. The essential point being a 
knowledge of the Characteristic of the Aorist Active , and 
that depending on the Characteristic and Termination of 
the Present, all the Variations of the latter, and the con- 
sequent Variations of the former shall be here brought 
together, under one View. 

4. Perispomena , conjugated regularly (1) have always 9 
as the Characteristic of the Aorist; and change the short 
vowel of the Penult (2) into the correlative long Vowel. 

5. With respect to Barytona, they either end in w pure , 
or co preceded by a consonant. Those in &> pure , like 
Perispomena , have a as the Characteristic of the Aorist ; 
thus: ficKTiKivu Aor : ificLdlkiwoL' ukovco vulowx. It is the same 
with those ending in So , 0u , to , and the greater part of 
those in fa. 



Past, -yuivfis, into ppevo; , with two p, and say <puX«u.u.s'vo? , instead 
of <pjXa.7u.sv0;, cppafA(j.£vo; , instead of copafy.evcs , from tppacrcrw , I stop, 
or fence. This occurs also in Derivatives from Verbs ; and the lower 
classes say T o nrpau.jjt.aj the thing, from Trpanrw , I make, or do. 

(1) The Word regularly is used in contradistinction to a very 
favorite change with the Vulgar , that of the a , the regular character- 
istic of the Aorist of Perispomena, into £. Thus, they say fpu-rtaga , I 
asked, instead of epcoTYiaa ., from epwr^-aco, a>, I ask. 

(2) Perispomena , being contracted from Hellenic Verbs in e'w and 
aw , the Vowels e and a are considered , with reference to the forma- 
tion of their Derivative Tenses, as the Penult. This change of the 
short vowel of the Penult into the correlative long , e or a into « , 
is liable to many exceptions , which must be acquired by practice ; 
thus: TjiAiropu j I am able; -rcapawaXw 5 I intreat, I invite , -reapa7roy,qu(jt,ai s 
I complain , make in the Aorist x(*iro'pe<r(x , eitayxjMtXesa, swctpaTrovstav » 
without any change in the Penult. 



6. But, the above excepted, all Barytona ending in a 
impure , or preceded by a consonant , may be divided 
into two classes. 

I. Those which have one of the 3 Labials; & t, or <?, for 
their Characteristic , either alone , or combined with 
another consonant, and end in Qo , szrw , f» , tttj. They 
take vL as the Characteristic of the Aorist : jcpu'&aor icfoorTw, 
I hide; Act: ex^a , I Md; ■ tSjt« , I rejoice; in^xj I 
rejoiced : y$cl<pa , I write ;• '(y^a , I wrote. 

II. Those which have one of the 3 Gutturals y, x, or £ 
tflotte, or combined with another consonant, and those in 
ff<ra and tto) , and some in £«. These take ^ for the Cha- 
racteristic of their Aorist : yvKxyu , (pvrAnju or <pv\cLTTcd , 
I" guard ; Aor : eipJXsdfc*' g?askg> , I weave , Aor : '(srKt^a ; 

I wove : rf&x a > I run . 5 ? T f4* ? I ran : / Oc^ > or P''X T6> 
I throw ; Aor : ep^a , I threw : azs-^yj^y I thrust ; Aor 2 
«WfoS«, X thrust or have thrust: ©■>£« , I congeal ; Aor: 
tvttfcai I congealed: yplfa or <pf<x.<7&o , I stop, or fence \ 
Aorll'fpafa , I have stopped , or fenced: 

j. The only terminations that now remain to be noticed are 
those of Verbs in aw , -jta^vei §• p. These verb?, as has been 
already observed ^ preserve , in the Aorist , the Character- 
istic of the Present. They change the e of the Penult into 
tj; and those in «/?©, the Diphthong a/ into a: (TTi\Ku, I send, 
Aor: 'ivT&ka 9 I sent :' rl^a , I distribute j Aor: tfiifi* y 
I distributed : frha, I dwell ; Aor: 'iffcnai , I dwelt : Kfha , 
I judge ; Aor: 'ik$a* , I judged: Jottcuw, I warm: Aor : 
ijlirau, I warmed : czrtioQ , I sow; Aor: -twuf * , I sowed. 
fn the Aorist Passive 8 is inserted between the Character- 
istic and the Termination , and the Diphthong u is changed 
into a. , whether that Diphthong be in the theme , the 
present Tense, as in *&&$& , or be farmed by insertion 
of the / m the Aorist Active ; as in <rrehha , wtukcc thus : 
ff&iiqw , wnfafct , A. P. , z<raroifQw , I Was sown ; participle 
past o-'sraLfft.sv&Sj sown : vr'iKKu, icmiKa. , A. P. , wtclkQw , I was 
sent ; part: past, qtolkiAvcs sent. 

Some Verbs in m 7 and particularly those in cwa, simply 



(TCi , 

t 



7 8 
change the v into : iIigtmsl, I warmed; e?eoW(W, I warmed 

myself, or was warmed ; part: past. 'C^ra^hoc , warmed / 

ikftvfr, I judged; fafifav , I was judged ; part: past. *p(am, 

judged. 

8. Other Verbs in vu , which practice will teach , and all 
those in onw, which are formed from Barytona in a pure \ 
Ly the insertion of the f, change, in the Aorist, the v 
into <r, as ; hlvvu, I dress; Aor: A. eVWa , I dressed * A. P^ 
l^ttSff? , (i) I dressed myself; part: past. iSvptvoc , dressed : 
livu, I bind ; A. A. e Wa , I bound; Aor: P. tl&nv } I was 
bound ; part: past. Ii/uzyoq bound. 

q. Verbs in ova change the short penultimate vowel into 
its correlative long vowel : tv&qvq I print ; A. A. 'iruwa 
I printed; A. P. itvwg>%w\ I was printed; part: past. Two/urns 
printed. 

to. Some Verbs in «/r&> change , in the Aorist Active 5 
this Termination into a, and take the preceding consonant 
as the Characteristic. Such are : ra-afWcw, I suffer; Aor: 
eo-jtSa , I suffered: ^afe/W., I learn; Aor: t/caOa , I learnt: 
KOLTaKa^cfJvQ , I understand; Aor: ejcaraxaCa, I understood: 
KcLXwto > I receive by lot ; Aor : ex«x a » I received by lot : 
*to%&?ro , I am , I happen to be , it is my lot ; Aor : ti^x* > 
I was, I happened to be , it was my lot. These Verbs, which 
are not numerous, but, from the nature of their meanings , 
very much in use , are , most of them , in the table of ir- 
regular verbs. 

ii. Some Barytona in f vu , but more particularly Per- 
ispomena in $m , contracted from fv&a , lose the v in their 
Aorist Active: Itfvo , I beat A. A. 'ihifot , I beat, or have 
beaten ; A. P. ilcifav , I was beaten ;. P. P. l^uivoQ , beaten : 
Perispomena form their Aorist in ma , as if there were no 
v in the Termination of the Present, and without changing 
the Penult: %t$w, I vomit ; Aor : e^ow-a , I vomited: ov^-co , 
I embroil ; A. A. iyvfxva, I embroiled; jttjW, (2) I pour out, 

(1) The Modern Greek lias no Middle Voice. The passive is used 
in a reflective sense. 
t (2) See Note ung^ this Verb in tke list of Irregular Verbs. 



79 
or give to drink, as Wine \ A. A. \A^s% , I poured ant : : 

wipu , I pass ; A. A. lo^ao-a , I passed. The reason of this 
irregularity is , that the v , which also passes to the 
Imperfect, is an insertion, the primitive form being in ?«: 
foLu , j>«, Ufa , e^fefw, ovf<y , *«f« - v^a. The Aorist Passive 
of tiie Perispomena is sometimes formed with 0,and some- 
times with <t0. 

Some Barytons in \a are found written with a r between 
x and &> : Thus, many say gtzmcd , Vcmxra , instead of gtsa-a.^ 

tffTitKOL 

i a. The second person singular of the Aorist of the 
imperative Mood Passive always assumes the Characteristic 
of the Aorist Active , if it exist , or , if there be no such 
tense , such as analogy , if there were , would require ; at 
least whenever a- , %L or % is the Characteristic: thus; tnu^nv 
makes riuww , taking <r from irifAw* ; tyfdyfar, makes yf*\j*v, 
taking -l from tyf^lx; and ETfajS/xOwj I retired makes tj>«&'- 
%ov, retire thou, from WfaGfeetz kro^aV8nr , I thought makes 
mxiwj , think thou; because, if this verb had an active , 
the Aorist would be itto^jx. But, if the Characteristic he 
any other than one of these three, <r , -l or % , which only 
occurs in Verbs ending in k© , y.u , yu , ^ , it does not 
pass, to the Aorist Passive. This Person of the Tense is 
then formed , by changing the 8 of the Aorist of the 
Indicative Passive into. «■; Thus a-j^.V^.a , / answer makes 
aVtJtf /Bur , I answered; imperative, «.vrU$fow, answer thou, 
by the change , of 5 inter: £«rT«/Wai , I warm myself; 
Aor: iU-r-i-y, . imperative &?Tu<rov , (i) warm thyself. 

i3. In the language of the Vulgar , Yerbs in iv», aoa , 
take -X instead of a for the Characteristic of their Aorist 
Active; Kwpua I shear \ A. A. Uc^u^x, Vulg. 'ptouft^x , 
I shewed : Kerreo^, / approach; A. A. Uo»7«wx; Vulg. 



-: - 7 ;s, which have not in the Aorist preserve, in the 

, tlie characteristic of the indicative : i v t pv , I was rejoiced * 

- ;;a::-j, x*:c5 , rejoice thou : ecpam, I have appeared 

:5 : appear thou etc , see the list of Irregular Verbs. 



So * 
iKmtvj/a, I approached. Deceived by tlie sound of the 8* 
in these Terminations, where it is pronounced as p> , ( see 
page i ) the common People form the Aorist according to 
the analogy of Verbs in £«. They follow the same analogy 
in the Aorist Passive and Participle Past: thus, from 
tJtou'f fc\|/ot , they form, A. P. iv-ovfarmoi , I was shorn, and P.P„ 

xov^iy.fiivoc , shorn, lilStead of €Kov$ivQyiv, Kovftv/utvot;. 

But exoufeuflw , and 'utovfifQwoL differ only in their termina- 
tions ; for , if the Vulgar , instead of the more approved, 
Termination be taken , and it be written cxwrepSw, it will 
differ from the regular form in orthography only , the 
sound being precisely the same; since, in the Diphthong 
tv i the v before aspirates is sounded like <p. See page a. 

TfilRD PART. 

5f. Some Present Tenses Indicative, such as Qh'a , t will; 
h.iyu, I say; x\a/yw, I weep fyc. when conjugated, lose, by 
syncope , a syllable. Thus, it is usual to say Gee, thou wilt 9 
or art willing $ Qs,uiv, We will , or are willing ; S-m , ye 
will , or are willing-, (fe> , they will fyc. instead of Urni » 

QiKO/Jlilr , 0SA.fcT6, fchOVY '. hiQ , KtftlV ,■ A6T£ , KtV , thOU SOjeSt et€» 

instead of "KtytiQ , KeyojutY , Kiyiri , hkyovv : >cxa?c , kKoufj.iv % 

KKcclTi , xAcd?/, j/zo'k weepest etc. , instead (XiLKatyuc M kx«/- 

■yc.ut!' , KXcu'yiTi , KKaiycVV. 

We see the Verb thus, losing its characteristic , its ter- 
mination and the vowel or diphthong following its charac- 
teristic' , retain only its final consonant , or , at most, its 
final syllable. This syncope is not admissible , when the 
termination consists of a single vowel, or diphthong not 
followed^ as is the Case hi the i. st arid 3. d Persons singular: 
0{\-&> , Uh'ii ; because , if so , nothing constituting Con- 
jugation would remain. Ge is the sole exception; and is in 
use only as an Auxiliary. 

i. It is by a similar syncope that the imperative particle 
«lq is formed from the Hellenic Imperative oip; , leave ? 
from dfivu j I leave? 



8i 

3. The lower classes employ these elisions in Nouns , as 
in the following proverb , o xyov^o^at; tKtfixfctv roy oqiy.oyct , 
instead of ° aycv-oopxyot; k/t fiuai rhv ufi/xocpoiycv. fi) The unripe 
fruit eater has got the start of the ripe fruit eater. 

4- As of general application, it may be well to observe, 
that the lower classes have a dislike to v as the termination 
of a Word. They , therefore , when the regular termination 
requires this letter, elide it 9 and say 70 >arfka&fi the face, 
and not 'Grfawurcv \ rhv {aovitx , roy ^afat , instead of /uovray , 
tyxfzv , the regular accusative's. In the same manner ^ in 
verbs , they drop the v in y^oyi, y^cx.^ot,ui, instead of saying 
yt<x.$ouiy , ty^^cty.iv , or subjoin aii e to the regular final v , 
"as in y?cl$cwi, y$£i^:m, instead of y^l^ow^ 'iy^&^oLv. They often 
annex it to the article, which from the sound might lead a 
person to imagine the following Yerb to be augmented , 
when it is not : thus they say rov\ /2a?'st« ? I see him, instead of 
Sir GtetTo; lit T9vl Uha t I will not have him, instead of^er rh &m>. 

CHAPTER XXVIII. 

LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS. (2) 

AVafTa/Vw, I err ; Imp. 1 dy^raivx ; Aor: &pi$TWct , and 

r.y.xjrov P. P. a paLp vifjLivoc, 

AtouPxi'yu, I ascend Imp. 1 drotf£cuvct \ Aon £vi$w , and 
kvuifiwta; Aor: Imp.e xyuffix , availZoiri ; Aor: Subj: yd aiou'£-a , 

(1) If in a good sense, as sjte'p^a^ev would seem to indicate, equivalent, 
perhaps , to Our « taking time by the forelock : a if in a bad sense, 
to our « eating corn in the blade. » 

(2) The Imperfect Tenses are all formed regularly, but are never- 
theless given, as likely to aid beginners. The form of the Aorist Pas- 
sive in r,v, used by Writers, is alone given: It is easy to substitute 
vixa 5 wich is the Termination preferred by the lower classes > and , 
indeed , in Conversation , by all Classes. The Reader, who may be 
surprised at the different acceptations of some of the following Words, 
should recollect what limitations , extensions , and Changes many 
English Words have undergone since the age of Shakespeare ; such 
ks prevent , obnoxious, nervous etc. 

6 



82 

$;, r tJ va oWip-topsv, va efvafpitfir, Or ttvaifSfrre , va avaijJofoi- 
KorraScavw, 1 descend is conjugated in the same manner, 

A'vaipw , I abolish , or destroy; Imp.* ovaipousaj Aon 
avaipscra; Aor. Pass. dfoatps0 , nv; P.P. aWpmsvo?* 

A'vacTatv6>, I raise, I re-establish ; Imp.* avacmva ; 
Aor. avsVnn<ra; Aor. Pass. aVs<7T7]07iv ; P.P. ava<?T7iptiv9<;. 

A'xatBatvu) , Vujg. irai9a£vw-, i die Imp. 1 arcatOawa; Aor. 
ara'Oav*; P.P. a77o0a;/.p.evo; ; Vu%. ira&OapipEvo;, dead'. 

A'peaco , I please; [flip.* and Aor: aps<ja Part. Past. 
Kpeo^evogi This is the only Verb that has <j as the 
Characteristic of the Present Tense. 

AuHzviw, I increase; Imp.* au£ava : Aor: ai^ca , Aor. 
Pass. au^Sriv-; P. P, au^jptivb^ 

A<piv«, I leave; Imp,* aoiva; Aor. a<pvi<j« y - and aoY,xa; 
Aor. Imp.* aqrtjjr'e, aosfceTs; Aor. Subj,-va a^viorto, or a^i/.w ; 
Aor, Pass. cbsGnv ; P. P. a^pvo?. 

Ba£w, 1 set , put, or place , Imp. 2 IfJa£a; Aor. epaXa; 
Aor. Pass. IpoXWj P.P-PaWvo;. 

Bapaou[j.at ', I am weary, I feel a listless disgust, 
( said of any thing irksome , ) je mennuie ; Ioip. r 
PapsioupLouv. Aor. epap'g0r,v P. P. Papspt.pE.svo?. 

J&s'irto, I see; Imp.* &£J>.£7ca; Aor. sl5a; Aor. Imp.* lSh r 
i$lc , ttsVs; Aor. Subj. va • tS-fi ? -/j? , Sp, or , by apha3resis r 
va rfe y va $r,$ , va §?).- 

Bpsyw, I wet ; ( |3psysi, impersonally, it rains) ImpJ 
e(3psya; Aor. e(3psja '■; Aor. Pass, sjSpayj/iv , lam wet. or have 
been wetted, as with rain; Ppsypis'vos, Wet, as with rain. 

Buvivo, I suck, as an infant at the Breast; Jmp.* gj3u* 
Cava , Aor. e(3u£a£a. 

repa^o I grow old; eys'pa^a; Aor. sys'paffa. The Aorist* 
alone is much in use. 

Hvopcat, I become; Imp.' ey'vopuv ; Aor. iysiva ', and 
lyiva and syivviy.a; Imp, e Pres.* y(vou, yivscfrsj-Aor. yevoy and 
yovsj- Aoj:. Subj, va yeivwor yevwj P.P. ysv/;pvo$ e 



83 
iaiykavca, I bite; Imp. 1 iSdcfkKt'& 5 Aor. loayx.asa, P. F, 

Aeta , I bind; Imp. 1 f£sv« ; Aor. s$Sda ; P.P. Sejjtsvo? ; 
see ( hap. 27, Part 2. ]N r . 8, 

AtSo> and Afoca , I give; Imp. 1 sSi£o§ and Ijwx ; Aor. 

. .a and e^ftwa; Imp. e So< , Sots, or S©<xs , 6_o-:th; 
Aor. Subj. va ow<jw and va Jwxw ; Aor. Pass. i&ofb&v; P. P. 

E\8yaivu , I go out ; Imp,* spyttulft; Aor. sSyry:a ; Aor, 
Tmp. e s,3ya, sSya?;, as if from a Perispomenon, djs-yau-yu. 
Compare this Verb with avai^sc'vo). 

E'Syaao , I lake away, or sand away; Imp.t EfiyaZfi -; 
Aor, I'^yaAa ; Imp.e ePya'Xs 5 Aor. Pass, iSya/.jvrv 5 P. P. 
r^- ;.;.y^vo:. Compare this with JJa^Wi 

E'p.j3aivo>, or Vulgarly iy.ita.ivto , I enter; Imp.* ty.Sy.va, 
EM.7rat.va ; Aor. s^Sr.xa; e^-r./.a; Aor, lmp. e k'/ia , t\LiOt , 
?,<L r yy-z , c{i.i?st6 ; Aor. Subj. va s^S-co , r,; , yi, or lait-S, '?;, 
!gj etc. ; P. P. saSacp.s'voc, or sptacrptivos. 

E'vo'jvfii 5 1 dre.ss ; Imp. 1 I'vSuva ; Aor. tfcjfu&a ; Aor. 
Pass. fr&ufrqv ; P. P. evSuuivoe : see p3ge~8, N* 8. In like 
manner, i/.^jvu, I undress, 

EVrp£iroji.as , I am ashamed; Imp.* svtjj eirpupouv ; Aor, 
svTpaTTr.v ; Aor, ltnp, e IvTpaicou ; Subj. va svrpaircS. 

E'cyoaat , I come; Imp.* e^oupLouv * Aor. vfXOa , Yulg. 
r:9a ; Aor. Imp.e sXa, ^ars; Subj, va saGco, Vulg. fpOca. 

Euptaxcd , 1 find ; Imp. 1 eupscxa; Aor. vjupa , £&p« , suor./.a 
and supjxocj Imp. e sup£ , iup£Te ; Subj. va eupto and va siipcoj 
Aor. Pass. eupsQvi^ ; P. P. eupTjuivo^ and £upgu,£vas. 

'Eyco 3 I have; Imp.* elya : Put. OsXw r/ci. 

Zc# , £ti4, 5^ , Cwjisv, £*}Te , ^oOv , I live, ihou etc.; Imp. 
fv:0ca; Aor. e&fiaa ; Imp. e %nat 3 £tjts , Subj. Pres. 1 va £fi, 
5^5 , £rj ^c. ; Aor. va £*jtffc>. 

'H;j.r:op(o, I can, or am able; Imp.* ^xopo&y« ; Aor. 
- ; 7.TTopt<7aj without changing the Penult, 



H 

H^cupw, 1 know ; Imp.t x'^cupx ; Aor. syj&et , from 
p.a6aivt).' 

Gelco, I will , or am willing; Imp.t vjOsXa; Aor. -/ibCkr^d. 

0£Tco, I place, or set; I'm 'p. 1 ifeVa 5 Aor. Ufane ; Aor, 
Pass. £T£6viv ; P. P. 0£pvo; o 

KaGofwtt ,1 si I , abide , dwell; Imp. 1 cV-*:8oua'ouv ;' Aor. 
txaOvjca; Imp. e Pies.* 'xa6ou; Aor. fedftqce'; P. P. xaQod(i.£vo£. 
KaOi'Cco, T place , or seat, is regular ; Aorist acaOtrfa; P. P. 
xa(kap-£vo;. 

Ka&co r xaiyco, and Vul^. xauyw , I burn; Imp.* Ix'ata , 
txatyoe, sxofoya;:' Aor. IxauG« , t r o1g. fxaajfa, See Page 79 , 
K. «3. lmj). e xaifce , V. xa^e. Tlie Present and Imperfect 
liave also a Neuter signification. When the Verb i^ 
thus used' the Aorist is Passive excSfy V. exaT,xa ; Imp. 6 
Pres.* P. xouoy; A. P. xaucou, xacpGvJTe; Subj. va xa&;P. P. 
xix^pivo? , as if from xa^iw , iu analogy with the Aorist 
Active &.&§&. 

Kalw, I call ; Imp.t IxoXou sa ; Aor. l*a&Gtt;'Anr. P.'^s. 
without changing the Penult ; exfl&saOviv; P. P. xatefffiivo';. 

Kaavco and xavw, I do, or make; Imp.* f&epwa , and 
sxava ; x^or. exa^a •;. Imp.e najjL'e; P. P. xa|/.<o(xsvos. 

KaTatj3aiva> , I descend, like avat^Guvto. 

Ka?a}.a(3aiv(i>, I comprehend; Imp.t exaraXapaiva; Aor. 
IxesTd&aga , or xa-a^a^a , See ^a^avco. 

Kfip^aLva) , or xsg^w,- f' gain;' Imp.t sxepSffiva, exep$i£a ; 
r Aor. £xeo5'/ica > and ex£p$i£a; P. P. X£pSyj|AeVo$. 

Kspvw , (1) I pour out to drink ; tmp.t IxepvoStfa j Aor, 
ixeoaca ; Aor. Pass. IxepasOviv, P. P. xspatfpvo;. • 



(1) Just as we say , mix a Glass of^Lemonade, Orgeat , Punch , etc. , 
but pour out, and never mix a Cup of Tea, or Coffee , though v as 
generally drunk, they are all mixtures. The primitive meaning of 
the word was to mix. The Ancients usually mingled Water with Wine, 
as we often do ; hence the progressive limitation ; and the Modern use 
• i'apowi as- a -generic Ter,m for "Wi»* ft 



-RXata), and xXaiyo; I weep; Imp.* fitXaia and fi&aiya- 
Aor. e/.Vauca and ei&aijja; See P. 79 . N". i 3 ; P. P. ySka^Avoq. 

Kotttco, I cut; Imp.t gxoirTa; A. A. exo^a, Aor. Pass* 
jlepiniv; Aor. Imp* Me , jcqtu^ts ; P. P. xo{/.|/ivo^ 

Aap.8 avco., and Aa[3atvw , J receive; Imp.t £>.au.(3av<% 5 and 
&« t Saiv« ; Aor. IXafyx; Imp. e lajk. 

AavOavofAKji , I mistake, or am deceived; Imp. 1 s^vQavo- 
[xvjy; A or, £"XavQas6v]v, Subj. va"Xav9aa0w; P. P, 7.av6a<jp,evos 
sJffQe xoXXa ^avOaGj/ivo?* I^stc (xeyalo >,a0o; , you are very 
ranch deceived , or mistaken. 

Aa^atyw , £i; 5 €/c\ I receive by Jot ? or it is my lot, 
thou receivest by lot , or it is thy lot etc. Imp. 1 i\%- 
yjwa ; A or. sXa^a, See page 78, N. 10. 

Aeya>, I say; Imp. 1 IXsya; Aor. elxa; Imp e £1775, or by 
Aphaeresis , and the addition of a a' ra;, rare , iu(g to , 
tell it; Subj. va eJsuS-, and vaxw, P. P. irregular %zywj.& 
V05 , the aforesaid ? the Person in question. 

Ma£ov&>, I collect, or gather together; Imp. 4 Ijjta^ovos, 
Aor. £(i.a£fe>£a; P. P. f/.a^<o[/ivoc. The v of jxa£ovw is by in- 
sertion, See page 78, N. 8. The 5 instead of <y as the 
Characteristic of the Aorist is the only Irregularity^ 
See pagjB 76, Note f. 

MavOavca , and MaOaCvw , I learn, I accustom myself 
to; Imp. 1 £[xav8ava, and £p.«6sava; Aor. ejxaOa , Imp. e p.aOe. 
See page 78, N. io. The Participle Past alone is ir~ 
regular , ^ctOvi^svof. 

NoioGco , and voiovw , I perceive j Imp.* IvowOa and 
fyoiova; Aor. IWwca. The v is inserted. 

Seovw , I vomit ; Imp. 1 e?epvoGf<ra ; Aor. eEepaca , See 
pa.se 7.8, N, f 1. 

S«, £&yco, and £j<o , I scrape; Imp.t e^ouora; Aor. ?&>?«. 

Ilaipvw , or rtepvco , I take, take away; Imp.t £'nrccipv« 
Aor. iicrjipa ; lmp, e irape , reapers ; Aor. Pass. eTOcpO'iv j 
jSubj. voe reapOfci; P. P„ xap(/ivo;. 



m 

HaV/io, 'fcaQaivco , I endure , I suffer ; Imp.* f^W % 
liz&bqffli , Aor. common to both , IWq^a,; 

IIspvw , Bnwpvw, I pass , pass through , or across % 
Imp.* ^wspvou^aj Aor. arapaca P, P, 7r£pa<7[/.syos, airspaq/ivo^ ^ 
from ra-paco-pto, by insertion of the v. See page 78 , N. 11. 

ribs , I fly , (N) I make fly ( Act: as we say of a bail ) 
con traded from rrsTawi 5 Imp t |tc£to5?#$ Aor. S7t£ta£a , 
?:£T£ioij(Jiai, I run in haste, fly, Aor. ei^ayfyov ; P. P, 
-sTaywivo^. Ail the irregularit'yeotWists in the substitution 
of die characteristic £ for <f and its consequences. Sefc 
Page 76 , Note i , 

ITviyatvw , Tuayaivco , and Tuayto , I #0 ; Imp.* sV/fyoivse ^ 
Ixayatva; A ircfiyft Pluperfect, siva 7nq,ya(v§i; PteS.* Jmp.% 
7r/fyatvs, ^aye. There is a first Person Plural , without a'V 
the particle; Trimev , let us go; instead of ^aytapv' Trayca 
admits the syncope noticed Page 80, N. 1 , and it is 
usual to say 7cayo> , 7?a; , xa , rcajxev , 7?a-£ , 7?av ; instead 
of Tr^yco , TTceya; , Traygi , Trayo^cv , i^aye^e, Ttayoiiy | P. A, 
TT^yaivQVTac. 

JltvOj , I drink; Imp. 4 £%ygT; Aor. ema , fea ; 
Imp. e Trie, ttl£T£ ; Sul>j. va tu& ; whence the Pluperfect , 
el/cc 7rt.sr ; Aor. Pass. ercoGviy, and eiuoGviv ; P. P. wicopivo; s 
drunk ( intoxicated. ) 

17.^777(0, and^Tw, I fall; Imp. 1 ?-^7t« , eWs^pTa , Aor,, 
IVreda ; P. P. 7T£(j{/.evQ$ , fallen. 

II)v£w , I Sail , hup,* |7cXsa ; Aor. gir^euca. 

Ilviyw I dr.own {actively ) Imp.* frcvtya ; Aor, |Wvt£a$ 
the only irregularity is in the Aurist Passive , which 
preserves the Characteristic of the Present e7uviyy,v; P.P, 
TTvty^evo^ , or miy^Ayoz, See Page 75, Note 2. 

IIpr*<Pio|i.ai j 1 swell ; In) p. 1 eTypw-otr/jV ; Aor. g^pyfcGviy , 
P. P. xp'/icrj/ivo;. 

2j3uw , cpuvw ? and <?8co , J extinguish , and I am 
extinguished. ( transitively and intransitively ) Imp. 



5; 
Ikgua, Eo-(k>va, Ia 4 6ouca. Aor, ecjSuca. There is nothing 
irregular in this Verb, but the insertion of the a in 
the P. P. c,S'j<ruivo£ , as in rWt/ivoc, 

2r ) >'»ovo) , I raise; imn. 1 eY/pcova ; A. A. s<y$Ma<ra ; A. P. in 
an intransitive, or reflective sense, eV/izoSOnv , I rase , 
or have risen; P.P. S7ptfc>pivo;o The only irregularity of 
this Verb, is in the iA Person of the Aorist Imp. e Pas- 
sive, or rather reflective, gtt/.ou, rise thou. 

Zraivw , and <r*4vco, I erect, fix up ; Imp.* s^-cava and 
,IV^va ; A. A. £<pi<Ja ; A. P. fe0$y ; Suhj. va st.Ow ; P. P. 
c-^jlevo? , regularly from ^v*Ww« 

2t£xw, and ?&xo{£a>', I stay , remain; Imp;* s^cV.ou^ouv; 
Aor. e^a67iv. Imp. 1 <r£wc, £e#£T| , and ^acou, s-aOvjre ;■ Subj. 
va ^aOw. 

2tsIX<o, and <rslvw, I send; Imp. 1 IVeXXa, 2?&Xva; A. A. 
f~zik% ; A. P. ig-aX^Tiv; P. P. ^aXpivog -.: See Page 77, N. 7. 

2u[x(3aivsi, It happens; Aor. cuvs^ti ( to ay^p s^yixo; , the 
Tseuter of the Ancient, Pe>f. Part. , an occurrence 9 
accident , event , that which has happened , and its 
plural, t% Gy(j$e(37)3coTqt, though occasionally used, have 
no analogy with the language, as now spoken, and 
must be considered as Hellenic relies. ) 

Tpip}, I run; Imp. 1 'hpeyjz; Aor. erpsHa, fmp.e Pres. x 
'Tpsyjj, rps^STS, Aor. Tp£<;£, Tp£^£ir£, and Tpey_a, Tpe^are. 

Tpc6y<o. I e.U ; Imp. 1 Irpcaya; A. A. e*>aysc ; lmp. e <pay£ , 
foyers ; Subj va <pay«; A. P. s^aywBvjv ; whence the P. P. 
<payco|X£vo;. Tpwyw, in the Indicative, and va (payco, in the 
Subjunctive, are often syncopated , like jcXaty w : See 
]>a«;e 80 , third part,N. r. 

Tu^aCvw, I am, I find myself, I happen to be; Imp. 1 
eTu/jnva ; Aor. fcuya, 

X7:dcr^o[;.aL, I promise; Imp.* uizoayjiufiouv* Aoi\ uroc/s- 
4h)v; lmp.e Pres. 1 utcocf^ou , bxtiayj^h ; Aor. urroT^scrou , 
"o^oc^gG^Te ; P. P, fooweu-evof. 



S3 

$a£ta(£oei r ', I appear; Imp,* - 3paivoj^-r r v or auv ; Aor. dcpav*;* 

imp. e Pres,* <pouvou, cpawcaOs; Aor, ^pavou,. or rather^ (pavou.^ 
<pavvjTe. 

^euyto, I depart, flee, go away; Imp.* ecpsjyoc ; Aor Q 

e^uya, Imp.s Pres.* cpeuys; Aor. ^uye, (puyeirs, and <peuya ,_ 

^Qav&i, I arrive, has the v by insertion; Imp. 6<p9ava fc 
Aor. e<p0a<ra; P. P. (pSast/ivo; , arrived, 

Xaipo[Aot , I rejoice, am pleased, Imp/ syaipopi-v. , 
t^atpo'jp.ouv 5 Aor. iyapyy- ; lmp. e ^apou , or rather, ^p ou ? 
^apTJTe ; Subj. vayap-co, yjs , $i; Part, ^apouaevo? 5 pleased , 
satisfied. 

XopTQciv<«) , I am satisfied, as with food , I have enough $ 
Imp,* gppTatva; Aur. ^opTcara. Part. P. ^opTcccrp.evo?. 
SYNTAX (i) 
CHAPTER XXIX. 
OF THE ARTICLE. 

i. The Article (2) has nearly the same force as in French ; 
It is sometimes prefixed to the Participle Past, b Sajuw WHyt 
yd &tww$L\M } He who had- been beaten went to complain* 



(1) The Reader will observe occasionally a difference between, the 
accentuation of what follows, and that exhibited in the preceding 
etymological part of the Grammar ■, particularly in adjectives of the 
3.<* declension accented on the antepenult ( pro paroxytqna. ) To obviate 
any perplexity that might result , it will be sufficient to observe t 
that the learned among the Modern Greeks , and indeed all who 
pique themselves on, knowing their Language , follow the Hellenie 
principles of accentuation, as well in speaking as in writing. Their 
example will, in this particular, be followed. The difference consists 
chiefly in words declined like , dcv8pcMro« > ^o'cwTrcv , a-fptoc , see pa- 
ges 17,19. In general, the Language, here attempted to be taught, 
being the language as spoken , no notice is taken of a variety of 
Hellenisms and Corrections, which the learned, with reason, wish tq 
introduce, 

(2) See Appendix 5- !» 



a. It is sometimes a relative, by ellipsis; Uv ( « a^Ve; jfafyfl ?*, 
.; ^ xyz'&u twtZ ?/ak a«c ; His Daughter Joes not please me, 
but I like your friend's. ( 'Daughter understood. ) 

3. When the Article is joined to a Substantive , which 
is itself accompanied by an adjective , the adjective must 
invariably be placed between the article aod substantive * 
l itoLKoc (plhot: , the good friend ; If the substantive precede, 
the article must be repeated, thus; b <pi'hoc b xakbc The 
latter phrase is more emphatic. In the more elevated style, 
it is not unusual to interpose short, qualifying Phrases , 
between the Article and Adjective ; as, b W tol wcwuxToi t* 
Grifiynpoc tfptyftt, Homer renowned for his Poems, or, with 
a repetition of the Article, thus; b d(w?oc, b W to, ttompcltcltx 
vnfitpnpos. That , or the Homer renowned for his Poems,, 
This turn , however, though elegant , as it is bold , ought 
to be used sparingly , since it has very little analogy with 
the Idiom of the Language , as now spoken ; at any rate i § 
far from being generally received , even if generally intel- 
ligible. 

4- It sometimes defines a number, as forming a part of 
another number , expressed^ or already known ; as , aVi 

TOL TiGVCLjCl CLTTthlC/. , 07TM U^O. , (T^aV TO IVi y TOL luO , TOL TflZ , 

of the four pears that I had, they have taken one, two , 
three ; in like manner r« 'Iko^olv to ha -^ior tv Ifiyahxv to ha 
{uolti ; they cut off one of Jiis ( tw r o ) hands, they pulled out 
©ne of his (two) eyes. 

5. We may , by ellipsis of the Words licrzcrbrn^ tm&wfrai » 
say , I *2.pv-pM , E f <ps<m , the Bishop of Smyrna , the 
Archbishop of Ephesus. 

6. The Noun of Number hae , pta , h ,ope, is used as an, 
indefinite Article , but less frequently than in other lan- 
guages of the South of Europe. When opposed to «>\cc H 
assumes the article; as, Ivolq otliku toy ockkov, the one injures 
the other. 

K«S-?/V likewise assumes the article, as 
W&wh , give a Para to each. 



met eyx 



m 

CHAPTER XXX. 

1. The second Person Plural , in polite Phraseology ? 
as used, as in our language , when addressing a single Per- 
son : MTa^W //« , Icoitri pv ^uyJ , Papa, give me some .bread, 

2. The second Persons singular and Plural are , bj a, 
singular anomaly, often found in almost immediate contact 
with a nominative in the third Person ; as , n tvyiviia. <rxc 
yfyvftic on ai ayavrx. , you know Sir , that she loyes you ; 
vi tc,o^'oTyi^ vac Ih rfctvgiTi kukcc to / srociy{jL&L , your Excellency i$ 
liot well informed of the matter,, 

CHAPTER XXXI 

ROUSTS OF DUMBER. 

I. To express a quantity, the cardinal numerals are ranged 
in succession , from the highest to the lowest, without any 

Conjunction 5 as , yihioi , cKTaKoaioi , HKocri TitKia^iQ ciffyaGrci , 

one thousand, eight hundred, and twenty four Men. Dates, 
are expressed in the Neuter Gender, §- take the Article ; as , 

el AyxfYjvoi eTrn^av tyiv tvohiv tic ra yj^ict TtTcaxovioL wiv/iVTa. ana 
X£W7K ; lyzfrdv Tin K'ofivQev (jjaai 7roKKcl ahhet f^s^ia ( ytda-rfOLj 
t?c TliKomdvyvxTM , tic t& yj^iQ- (iY.TCLY.osia ukoci Tfia., Tile xUrks 

took Constantinople, in the year of our Lord One thousand, 
four hundred and fifty three. They lost Corinth, and several 
other Fortresses of the Morea, in j8a3 ; x( ona * s understood? 
it is even sometimes expressed. 

1. The Ordinal Numbers follow the same construction; 

t'lC TY!V iK0f.T6(TtriV TflOLKCfTTr.V TflTVJV O kVliGTldtx f jll the OU6 hun- 
dred and thirty diird Olympiad. 

3. To express many thousands , the substantive %i\t*c$ 
preceded by a cardinal number, is declined, and the Noun, 



(1) M"ons, r David has here, rather unadvisedly, assumed the Charac- 
ter of a Prophet , or retailer of Prophecies , predicting the fall of 
Constantinople in 1821. I have altered the Phrase, 



9 ¥ 

whose quantity it determines , is put in the same case § 
hKorcoai tvo xjkiy-lii; av^wGrxt; , he killed two thousand Men. 

4. The idea of half is expressed in two Ways ; I.° a 
hy the adjective (ait-h , « , o* , half 7— following the 
substantive , with the intervening copulative mi ; acaV* 
\to riaf/Vi fcxx xf- urx KX '' i JAJT ' 9 > ^ resi & e & 1 in Paris ten years 
and a half; t$&yi Ivo ra-sjp&xec nxl fiiah . ( pi&w )• He ate two 
Partridges and a half; II.- f by the substantive liuwv, a half 
immediately following the noun of nmmber which it modi- 
lies; X H tfimv six and a half: When preceded by a cardinal 
number terminating wi th a vowel, v/iurv loses its first syllable, 
and becomes .enclitic ; Seepage 1 i.'Wrst pu seven and a 
half : it even forces the accent of paroxytona forward ; 
thus, liKCL united becomes St*a '/v.isv ; ten and a half; in 
the same manner 3 \yd 'y-pu, one and a half; loiMzd \u^v , 
twelve and a half; Tt&tr^fd 'yu/ojt/, four and a half; riatroLf 0.^171/ 
fMtfidti four ducats and a half. 

The feminine of the adjective pmc is also enclitic after 
#U: yja.\u«syi we* , an hour and a half, half past one o'clock. 

5. The Words fya. and vplg* are generally omitted after 
Cardinal Numbers ; Mi tk rm firl '/mtav , he came at half past 
pne; &hu dvwcofwti %i$ TaTf Ivo d-mo to ju&wfiifi , fye will set out 
at half past two ; ik touq thx r* wafbvTos (AYim the tenth 
of the present Month. ( viptfous understood. ) 

CHAPTER XXXII. 

OF PERSONAL PRONOWNS. 

1. The Pronoun Personal, when the Subject of the 
Yerb , is generally understood, as in the Ancient Language, 
Latin , and Italian ; because the terminations of the Verb 
are sufficiently varied to distinguish the persons, without 
the pronoun; thus Ck^-v , us , u\ I see, thou seest, he sees,, 

2. The pronoun , as the Subject of a Verb , is never 
expressed, but for the sake of distinction or emphasis; as, 

lyw %\ to &\cj k%Qqkv y I will hj no means allow it, or hay® 



99 
|l so. When however it is the Object of the verb, it is; and if 
emphasis be aimed at, it is repeated; thus, y.l pamra/, it 
appears to me ; kpiva /A oodnron prt tafuKtg ; it appears to 
me that you have erred. 

3. The monosyllabic personal pronoun 9 when governed 
directly or indirectly, unless the governing Verb be in 
the imperative Mood, precedes it ; (A dyuTrz , he loves me ; 
p* liltt , he gives me; Imp.e a-yiVc. ^g , love me; ScJcrs ^« , 

give me. 

If , of two personal pronouns , in the same Phrase # 
die one be directly, and the other indirectly governed, 
the latter precedes ; thus, ^ to 'l&xi , he gave me ; 7« toV«, 
{ iTttcl) I told it him ; Imp.e ^ ff£ Ty ' TOj gi ye it him; «>g t* 73, 
fejl it him. 

The Vulgar, however, very often neglect this rule; and 
jt is not unusual to hear the following, and similar Phrases y 
uld rov , I have seen him , instead of toy tlla.. 

4. With Compound Tenses, these Pronouns are placed , 
always in the above order , between the auxiliary and the 
Verb ; thus , 0&.<a rh flu , I shall see him , I will see him j 
i)a roe ayra.(jiMii , He will meet him ; S9e^£ tw ttfyfii , He 
would find him; 0a *$ to %ii%u , I will shew it him ; 
( to him ) #* t» to VJ ( fc/77-J ) I &>/// tell it him , I shall 
tell it him. 

The Reader has already seen that, when these pronouns 
follow the Verb, they become enclitics; and that on the 
contrary , when they precede it, they preserve their accent, 
The idiom of the language inclines strongly to the use of 
these monosyllabic pronouns after other Words , as after 
certain adverbs ; See Chap/ XLV , 1 , 2 , 4» 5 , and after 
some pronouns and adjectives; as, ctirbc pa (1), myself; otiToe<m 7 
thyself ; clvtoq its himself , ubvos ,«« , I alone fyc 

5. It has been observed, Chap. r XVI , N, I. , that the 
.Modern Greek has, properly speaking., no possessive pro* 

(1) Tli e Vulgar dyop the y and say £ T0 ' 5 ^.ou , octo's^w, drro; 7ey» 



3 J 

ftoun, but substitutes the genitive case of personal pronouns* 
following the noun, as an enclitic; thus, h (pihor, ^ ; my" 
friend ; tvxr $ihor, u.< , or has ,«» <pi'h6s , one of my friends , 
6r a friend of mine. 

tloX TOY (fihOY ( U\i , GX , Ttf , F. TY:Q ^lrig. 

yaQ y a-uc, Tw, or t*.; M. F. N. Plur. 

I have seen my j thy , his , her j its / Friend Sing* 
our your their Plur. 

6. If accompanied by an adjective , the pronoun may 
preserve its place after the substantive , but its more ele- 
gant arrangement is between the adjective and substantive ; 
thus , ul-oL toy kxkov (DtKcy pat i more elegantly , iiloc toy noe.h.'oY ( a* 
ffhoy, 1 have seen my good Friend. 

7. The Personal Pronoun , thus constructed is , by 
pleonasm, put after certain substantives including the Mea 
of exclusive property in the subject , as of the hands, the feet; 
file eyes of a Man ; thus, ™ 'Uo-^oiv t* xh™ r« , fx tt \x^x r* 9 . 
they cut off his hands , his feet. The continually recurring 
habit of employing this genitive has doubtless originated the 
pleonasm. The use of this pronoun as an enclitic is \ 
consequently , very frequent, which, to obviate the neces- 
sity of recapitulation , the Reader is requested to bear in 
Mind. A new example of it will occur in the ensuing 
Chapter. 

8. By means of a demonstrative Pronoun preceding the 
substantive , the Greek reaches the following energetic 
Phrase in old French ; J'ai troupe hier ce mien bon ami, 
nearly as energetically expressed m good Modern English, 
I yesterday met with this my good Friend »l^x l^U tQtov 
r'ov xocxor y.v Qi'kcv. We often add a old »', expressive not of 
age , but of length and cordiality of intimacy ; and the 
Phrase is , then , I think , more energetic than either 
Modern Greek , or old French. 

9. Some Authors use the Genitive of the personal Pronoun 
of the third Person , without elision of the incipient syl- 
lable , and say, and, more particularly, write, uba re? yt-uv 
*»7*' rof ft km KbTuvy I have seen his , their , Friend, 



io. The CoinpoitiKt Personal Prdhbiin rZ k'ojm ft* , <n>\ $*, 
follows the construction of the Simple iyd , aw , «utq? , but 
it is more polite : Thus , instead of saying , ky lh toy 
yruffliK KaAa , thou clost not thyself know him well } it ii 
Usual in courtesy to say ; t« ^y* ay Sey rep yrofifa kx\ql , or , 
in the plural; rw xoywo-ac ^tw yvQ^ri kuksl , you dont 
yourself $fe. Thus also , speaking of a person present, in' 

the tiiird person , t« *cy« tw rh tltiv ex®h , M. r . 

( this Gentleman ) saw him yesterday* considered much 
•more polite than avrhs rh itlt. 

ii. When this Compound Pronoun follows a preposi- 
tion , it drops the Article; Trny-outa M kbyv <rv , I am going 
to your House; ifX 9 f JLm ^ K ' Y* ™% I come from your Houses 

CHAPTER XXXIIL 

Of THE RELATIVE POSSESSIVE PRO&bllft. 

I . In the Relative Possessive Pronoun b iWc p? , mine 4 
the Adjective $/jwc expresses the idea of possession , sl4 
observed fn Chapter XVI, while its relative force is con- 
fined to the Article, which , as the substitute , refers to 
the preceding Substantive; thus, in the following Phrase, 
yd ro frifikiov /am , nal va to tlmh <rv , here is my Book , and 
there is thine , or yours , the second -ro is elliptic , and. 
refers to the Substantive fii£\iov , in the preceding member 
of the sentence ; so that , to render the Phrase complete i 
it would he necessary to say , w to QiQkiqv ^v , ko.\ vd to 

10 MOV G"d filCkfoV. 

1. When this adjective ej/koc is not preceded by the 
Article, it indicates possession iirelatively : thus avrh to 
•GtfitJor that tliKov jam , this book is mine , ( belongs to me ) 
uvai iliKoycru uvtq to ufohoyicv • Is this your Watch ? 

3. The Adjective eWc, preceded by the Article and fol- 
lowed by its substantive , serves only to increase the force 
of the Phrase , without having any character of a relative ; 
thus ^ vol 70 iliKov (jlm &i$kUv % « thare is my Book*,- is more em-- 



phatic than vd rb Ifiuuv ( wv, there is my book. If still greater 
emphasis be desired the adjective may be placed after the 
Substantive , vd ib Q£k!ov rb ituir ju*. 

This adjective is often used emphatically in the sense 
of our word own ; thus , i-z-fpHh d^e tx TTz&iy. r» , more, 
emphatically aVo rd thud™ 7tailrJ , and still more emphatical^ 
ly , two rd thud ™ id Trails , he was betrayed by his owo 
Children, 

CHAPTER XXXIV, 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 

I. The three Demonstrative Pronouns, aJroc, >*, ?, tvtoc and 
ImhcQ always require that the article should be prefixed to 
the indicated Noun: thus a-Jrcc b a^ac, t^to; b a^ac , this 
Man; aJrj? >j yurxlKx , this 'Woman; k^oc o arS^ac , that Man, 
Ixtitti -a ywotTkz that Woman , the article is indispensable , as 
the pronoun alone would not adequately express the indication,. 

For greater elegance the pronoun is often placed afier the 
noun; b avspas wtoc , b dvlpxs IxCivoi-. 

'2. \vrbc and Uihas are often substituted for Personal 
Pronouns of the 3. d Person. They in that case have no 
Article following them, but are succeeded by a Verb refer- 
ring to the subject they , as personal Pronouns , represent: 
auToc tihdt , he is come} iitiTtos uh rh dli\(pbv [a%g , he has seen 
our Brother. 

CHAPTER XXXV. 

OF TlIE PRONOUIf RELATIVE. 

t. The Pronoun Relative i b l-row answers to our Rela- 
tives who which, and that; i%woa rh ywx7xx rm qtoiolv \eye^, 
I know the Woman of whom you speak: &q rh ar^wro? , 
h b.?o7os dy.ih.wi p% ipirct > did you see the Man who spoke 
to me ? 

d'ffTtc is confined to the more sustained style of writing r 



9 6 
ytupffyk toy crfya'rov oo-Tiz h*K$t e^Oe'c j Do you know the Mail 

\vlio ( that ) came yesterday ? 

oV» ■, indeclinable , and agreeing with all persons and 

genders, in both numbers, is of very frequent use, as a 

Relative, particularly by the Vulgar j and in the colloquial 

style : ai yuwjKtc on* tlla , the , Women whom I saw. 

2. In speaking i) the first syllable is often dropped : t» 
X^tI '** F* '^>ief , the paper you gave me ( or that, or which 
you gave me. ) 

3. Some Writers place the antecedent after the rela- 
tive in the same Member of a sentence, thus; i$eiifo rh ottoIov 
KiynQ mbfuwov , I know the Man of whom you speak , or of 
what man you speak. The indeclinable particle hvrZ cannot 
be thus used 5 and indeed the construction is , by many 
Writers, thought to have two little analogy with the Mo- 
dern Idiom , and to savour too much of Pedantry to bt 
imitated. 

4. The Modern Greek has several correlative adjectives \ 

SUCll as TOffe? , ocrot; ; tqiStci; , o-frojoc : i X il r ' ocry ! v tv%w 07r,v Kdi 

a dlik(po<; t» he is as fortunate as his Brother; il'vcii nat o\%o[M 
701* toq 'czjoTov rev tile*, he is still just such as ( just what ) 
I saw him. 

CHAPTER XXXVh 

OF THE REFLECTIVE t'RONdU^f* 

t. The Reflective Pronoun is substituted for" the siniplfe 
Personal Pronoun 9 whenever the verb governing it expresses 
the action of the subject upon itself: thus , dyxTra. r'ht 
iolvt'qv r\s , he loves himself, and in the feminine^ dya-tra rov 
taurbv rw , she loves herself, ym^i'i toy lavr'ov um , know thv~ 
Self; and with prepositions \^oni\n\ \ivl toy iwtbv vac, think 
of yourself ; v\(auq %h tyivvvi^n^Lip tic to? koo-juiov cicc toy tdvrov /ucc£. 
We were not sent into the World ( born ) for ourselves 
alone, The simple monosyllabic Pronoun would in all the 
above Phrases be a solecism ; and it would be improper 
to say j yi®$i 4% } yfinfy hi vu The polysyllabic Pronoun 



li not, under similar circumstances, more correct, accord- 
ing to grammatical analogy; but, as it gives a better 
"close to the Phrase than the monosyllabic, it is admissible^ 
as a substitute for the Reflective Pronoun ; and one mav 
say indifferently lh tyivvlSypiv lid tov tcuirov fidg y or Ih zyivii- 
fjyijuiv oix y]ju<xQ. 

i. The Compound Personal Pronoun, r« xcy« om , Without 
Article, may, after Prepositions, be substituted for the Re- 
flective Pronoun : <pfbvTt{i lid hoy* o-h, %h kyiwyiSvipciv lid ao-jvmvc, 
to Uxtxkcc&x cctto Koy\s [ax , think of yourself ; we were not 
bom for ourselves ; I , of myself, understood it. 

CHAPTER XXXVII. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS* 

, i. The Interrogative Pronouns tig , ^o7oc , are construct* 
&I as in English: rig JjkS-i ; Who is come ? zrolos r» to t/Ve ; 
Who told ( it ) him ; za-olog iTwi av-rk ; Who is he? zxoix tTvii 

( Trai*, vii ) oiVTVi ; Who is she? aroiog 'cccr'QLVTVg toy ilti ; Which 

of them saw him ? Iwo-i ^ to fiiQhiov , give me the Book ; 
■zroHov ; which? ( Book. ) 

i. These Pronouns are also used as Relatives : lh '£%iv$a 
hi i/m tivri , I know not what he told ( said to ) me ; al 
sfUTwi izoioc, Jk8fi , he asked who was come; ti%iv$ug vrbaag yj~ 
hiding (i) ifyUvtn; Do you know how many thousands ( pias- 
tres ) he has spent? 

3. The Interrogative Particles tt^ , tt'qti , nS , 5^c., 
follow the same construction : i^w^a &Zg to t-nipu., I know 
how he did it , lh ^ iTzrav tron uxk , thev did not tell 
me when he came ; vfcwpiv «r» iv^yi , they know ( or it is 
known ) where he is gone. 

(i) Just as we omit pounds, because the nominal coin in which 
we make up our Accounts. Piastres , as pounds , are always under- 
stood, unless, from what lias preceded, reference to other coins be 
distinctly deducible* 



o 8 

4, The neuter r/ , used either in exclamation ', or inter- 
rogatively , is constructed with Nouns in all Genders? 
Numbers and Cases : ri avfyuvot; iTvai uvr'oq ; What Man is 
this? ri ywoCiKOL tTmroLvrfi; What Woman is this? ri fya uvat;< 
What is the hour ? In exclamation ri u<aiu ywaTxa ! What 
a beautiful Woman ! ri wjuoffx -arailia ! What beautiful 
Children! ri xa^ocfo n$b ! What pure water! 

Instead of zro? r and ri , ( except ri in exclamation ) 
the Vulgar use ri hoyns; how ? in what manner; of what 
kind ? ri hoyvc rb 'ixay.i , how did he do it ? ( or make it? ) 
kwaOa ri hvyw fb 'UafAi f I have' learnt ( fou-od out ) how 
he did it; ri \oy% w^emro's ihw' olvt'o;. What Maa of What 
kind of Man is this ? Hzvfo rl hoyHc thai ctvros a^G^utsro^ 
I* know **V*a£ /*/*£/ 0/' ( £/ze ) Man he is. 

CHAPTER XXXVBL 

' OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

i. Of these nxnk is more in use than ik : it has ge-' 
nerally a negative sense. It, in fact, answers to dur one y 
body , person ; for if negatively used, to he correct, a 
negative must be added , as we add no, thus; lb rb nh^u 
xdaic , no one , 720 person knows it. It is sometimes used' 
affirmatively ,, thus ; rh tilt v.dinit; , somebody saw him; 
and sometimes interrogatively :■' Ik u a xavu'c ; Is any one 
come? It is also used with the Imperative Mood, thus: 
ac rev vrtxw xx\«/c let, some one take ( hold of ) him; 
o( fxrv rh -ridoyi y.dnir,, let nobody take ( hold of ) him. 

a. The Neuter riven is of very frequent occurrence ,• 
as an Interrogative , wilh,. and without negation; thus , 
tXuc riyron; ( vapor f/Vyfc ) Have you any thing ( to say to 
irie')? maybe answered, according to circumstances , af- 
firmatively , e^fij , vai - pdhnrra ; negatively , W £^<y - oyj ~ 
rforori. In like manner it is very usual to sajr, Si* £*&> 7%<?rt, 
I do not wunt'f ' wish for ) any thing,. lit ula ri*or* } I did 
2K>t< jee any things 



I, ki,uwwec % ^ , 9v expresses the idea of an iiideterriii- 
Viate quantity : r.jJlir KxjuTrocot kt^avroi , a considerable num- 
ber of ( 'a great many ) Men came ; t*a£i:, **/ lyon 
Ksif/wUih tf«f«ta , (i) he played , and lost a good deal of 
Money ; nzp.'rwft 7t^o( a Considerable number. 

(I'voiot , trik j o-roiev. answers to bur whosoever, whoever ; 
it requires the indicative Mood, when referring to time 
past) orfoiH tc inn* tilpaM whoever said it was mistaken: 
it may be constructed with the indicative , or subjunctive, 
when referring to time pfeseilt, oirmc to x<yv, or hiyr; <r<pxh>,ti, 
whoever says so is in error: but invariably with the Sub- 
junctive j when referring to the future : ottom to s/Vjf , 
$i\ii to jMt&oiuM , Whoever* may say it will repent ^ 
■shall repent it. 

4- Sometimes , t6 give a still more indefinite turn to 
the expression \ the particles *ai aV are subjoined : o-rotn 
xxi av to s/V«, $* to juiravoidoYi whosoever may assert it 
shall repent it* 

In the hiobe sustained style, writers use J'rr/c ; osth; koli 
at i*«« , whoever he may be; oc t k *«< iV tc wV*T, whoever 
may say so, fyc; o,ti km <*.v um , Ih i%a lUaiov , whatever 
he may have said, he is hot right. 

5. These pronouns may be governed by the Verb : 
ar*ft ottoiov 0s'w;f , take which you please, will, wish (may 
wish)', HctMi oiTiQihyt . o^ti kx'i a\ Qihvc , do whatever you 
like : they sometimes , to increase emphasis , are placed 
at the opening of the Phrase : o,ti 0«m# , jca^e , do just 
Whatever you pleasei 

CHAPTER XXXIX. 
OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 
FIRST PART. 
• OF THE GENITIVE. 

i. The Genitive after a Noun Substantive in Modern 

Greek, as in other Languages, indicates possession: b vM 

(i) Itotia^e;, in the plural, is used as oiir generic Term Money. 



TOO 

t~« (pikY (jlm , my friend's Son ; o Avroxfd-ruf rue I'Wa ton:, Tfcs 
Emperor of Russia , See Chap/ XXXII , 5. 

2. It is used in speaking of age : Tftar x?' om7 vai M 
an infant three years old , or of age ttocuv x?' ovav twcu'i 
how old are you'? «kw« r|>/<ap, twenty three, ( Xf' 0yuy under- 
stood ) These and similar Phrases, are elliptical in most, 
if not all, languages. 

3. It is also employed to fix a point of future time; 
6s*.'ea oVaK$j>su(& tyiq ml/lit $ m , I shall many ^ or he married 
at Easter, and, in the same manner, tv X& u i^eaiis the 
ensuing year. 

l\. It supplies the place of the dative , which exists 
only in a few Hellenic phrases : We p.v -^api , give me 
some bread ; Ivan, tvk 7rx^oc tv vt$v£v t~ Ka.vp.et* , give a 
para to the poor blind man; tv Kiyco , I tell him. 

SECOND' PART, 



I. The Accusative ',■ with the preposition ik , is alscr 
Used to supply the want of the dative case : Key a iU- toy 
qii.ov pv , I say to my friend ; and without a preposition ,-■ 
{ittcl 7ov Ttufyicv vol ehSvi , I told George to come* 

We may therefore indifferently use the genitive , or 
accusative, and say pv eWe , or pi s'Ws, he gave me ; pv 
yaiviTai, or pi yalviTai, it appears to me ; Tv-xeyw or tIv Keyu , 
I tell him. The accusative appears to be very generally pre- 
ferred, and indeed, in the plural, it is in exclusive use; thus it 
would he a violation of the idiom of the Modern language, 
as spoken, to say rm 'Hukx , I gave them, We %y , give' 
them ,- instead of rvt, tWa , We" rvs. The genitive plural 
of the second person does not exist in the Language ; 
and that of the first , being a dissyllable , cannot precede 
the verb ; the accusative, therefore, of both is of necessity 7 
the only case plural that can be employed : paq iWi , aa; 
tt7rt' 9 he tald us p he told you , It has been observed, in 



3<M 

die declension of Pronouns, that the accusative plural of 
the Pronoun p ersonal of the third person , r«V , joined to 
substantives, as an enclitic, expresses, as well as the ge- 
nitive , the ida a of possession : thus , we may say, indif- 
ferently , o Tan j>«c ray, or o Trxrtfac t«c , their Father : the 
genitive may be more elegant and correct perhaps ., but is 
by no means in general use , at least in .conversation. 

2. Some Verbs active govern two Accusatives , one 
directly* of the Thing, and the other indirectly, of the 
Person: S/Wxa to vaili rd yfdjupard , I teach the Child to 
read; rhv erWe v^rdvi , He put Kim on ( on him) a caftan, 

3. It sometimes marks a particular part : ( the prepo- 
sition xara, in, with respect to, as to, being understood,) 
Kxfi iTvcj k'okkivx tcI uctTicL voce ; Why ( how ) are your eyes 
so red ? tovq tci, they pain me, i. e. I have pain in them 5 

( KCLTCL TV. jUOLTIOC. ) 

4. The Accusative case expresses the circumstances of 
fiine , measure, distance, &;c. , by the ellipsis of Kxrd : 
toy tl^hivcru Ukx xf ord ^ 1 served him ten years; h*.§t re £fs5t/, 
he came in the evening; r^tc $o'$yfc tm i&lo^dla , three 
times a Week; rh a^p.^ov , to day; frjufyxv understood: avrh 

to ^cofiov iJvoli fAXK^tid CC7T ihd lixx yJ-hhia this Village IS ten. 

sniles hence ; Ti^avh t° ytyos, a German born, or by birth; 
rrovov uaoti juxxfyTtfoq 'cltt olvtov ; how much are you taller than 
he? (Mav (jTr^XfAY.v , a palm : thus also , by ellipse of the 
preposition ik or Kara, the accusative may, like the genitive, 
mark a point of future time ; 8exw vac ta-wxefOE r'm aKKny 
KVfixKviv , I will come and see (visit) you next Sunday: 
by ellipse of the proposition lid , it marks the price of 
of a thing ; iTrdrKwx to dxoy'ov /uk houio<na yfoaict , I have 
sold my Horse for two hundred Piastres ; to nybfctcra. X'' K!CC 
yjmicL ; I bought it for a thousand piastres, 

5. It signifies the mode of action : Trnyxlw yiiiKo , yia\o f 
1 coast it , I go along shore ; ty put^d narfkia. Trnyatvw 
yuvid , ycdnd. Small Boats go , sail, make from, point to 
point: of similar import are evafftrx, one by one, lvo } Ivo 9 
two and two, by twos , or in pairs. 



TQ3 

G. It als* indicates the matter : : ytpdrt nfo , lull q| 
Water ; er^uivo ^d$xi<; covered with 'matting; u/a x^a n^c,. 
q pup of Water ; crot {wyaft u7to%yi^tol , xa\r£a/c , a pair of" 
shoes, stockings ; era x$?ra$/. t*jW a troop of children. 

7. It is also used to signify an arithmetical proportion : 
Hiflma. IfKa to. tKctrov , 1 gained ten per cent. 

8. Adjectives of the three degrees of comparison , in^ 
the accusative plural, are often employed , without pre- 
position, adverbially: IkQtc <*fy* >, you are come late, **&#*£ 
xxhx , if.0Ly.cx> , a<j)(Yiy.a , ykwyo$ct, , ttokkx , you djd well , ill % 

unbecomingly , quickly, much; also with the preposition 
Kami : tffitLt kztcI 7TohKoi iv^^i^Kf/hci: , I am exceedingly pleased 
hxCdltn: KUhkr,Ti(-ct , xiip'oTtfoi y KzhKifTet , you read better % 
worse , exceedingly well ; bfAihiTc kclkkivtu. , you s,peat ^ad- 
mirably. 

CHAPTER XL, 

OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 

i, When the Comparative is followed by a substantive^ 
the latter is put in the accusative case, with the preposi-- 

tioil, a tto , Qr Trapa : n Ttf/uxvioc ejfrai piyuMTtfci c^tto , or ?raf~ 

7w Ta-hiJoLv < Germary is larger tlxan France. 

1. Relatives and Adverbs are also put in the same case,, 
with either of the above prepositions , though tx^x is most 
usual: olvtqq ilvai 7Thxo}<L>T$foi; Trap o,ti (tto^Iio^i , he is richer 
than you suppose: e^uaGe 7^^10-7 o%ox iraf sera 'ihWiuo*v<Ti , fie has: 
learnt more than he has forgotten, Sometimes the relative 
is suppressed, and, in that case, **»« becomes a compara- 
tive conjunction, like than in the English, equivalent to 

« than (hose things which » £,«a0e wepwo-erefa -rxprc ihw/Libvwt ; 

but, to admit of this, the Subject of the two verbs must 
be the same : thus turn* twgiutk>9q ttx^ol <ttox«'{i(tQi , would 
not be Greek : it , indispensably , must be *tf on 

3. The Verb, when the same, is, in comparative Phrases, 
suppressed in the second member of the sentence : an^o* 
r%tufu rripv'rfoife wxp i-^k , he {aiows more to day than yes? 



ioS 

sjerday, instead pf ntf oV* vfaptpv lyQk 3 u^it <p?criuo7tjoc Trugx 
TTfuTOL , I am more prudent than formerly , i. e. mtf b y 7.i 

4- The positive , with the adverb yrhiov , more, is often 
substituted for the comparative : a'Sexf 6f <r« e/^a/ 7r\£oe p^ou- 
^oc ana « , (aVksra ) your Brother is more prudent than 
vou. 

5. It has been already remarked Page 3 1 , N. 6 , that 
the adjective in the superlative degree is used absolutely, 
Relative super onty is expressed by the comparative , 
preceded by the Article : l .\\i\Kij.t; yjrov avlfuoltfoc elrb t«c 
WkhKwzt , Achilles was the bravest of the Greeks ; The 
Vulgar sometimes add the adverb *hkw to the comparative , 
just as the lower classes in England often add more : 
n vkIqv ofjLOff'oTtfv yvmjKOL aVoAac, the most beautiful ( the 
prettiest ) Woman of the whole. 

6. The personal Pronoun is sometimes put in the Ge- 
nitive Case, after the Comparative : yyu^t rh *.«.KKYiTifa <r* 
( learn to ) know thy better ; aaVej uvxi piyuMTtfoc ^« , he 
is older than I : this construction is confined to the en- 
clitic personal pronoun. When the pronoun, not being a 
monosyllable, cannot become enclitic, it must be constructs 
ed in the usual manner, with the preposition T*j>a, or d*??. 

CHAPTER XLI. 

OF THE VERB, 

OF THE VOICES. 

i. The Active presents nothing requiring particular 
Notice ; but the Passive has many peculiar applications 
demanding the Reader's attention, (j) 

2. The passive Voice. 



(1) There is one rare use of the Active , that require* distinct 
notice , or the III. d Rule for the Peculiar use of the Passive Voice 
might mislead ; particularly without the restriction , I have added , 
* in a very few instances. » The Phrases there instanced , fall rather 



1 ® J ^ 

1.° Is used in a Reflective Sense, i. e. the action is upaia 
the Agent : eilvyepan , I dress ( myself , ) or am dressing \ 
Zvfi(Qfii&i , I am shaving. ( myself ) Yery generally the. 
reflective pronoun is used , when reflective action is in- 
tended thus , dyoL'&ci rov iclvt'ov tv, he loves himself. When 
however the action is upon the Agent's person , the Pas- 
sive is always preferred: 'Mvo^ai , I am dressing ; idifyjjuxi , 
I bathe ; Grhvvo{u.ai , I am washing ( myself ) xTy&pat 9 
I am combing myself , fyc. 

The Passive Voice in a reflective sense sometimes go- 
verns the Accusative case: «rao-cut/,3^a/ nva , I jostle, brush 

against some one j jUW vnxyyq vol GuctaoLhiidvai tvs of'rOfwVvf 9 

t&ulvi thou cKofiukoi , dont go. jostling, or brushing against 
people, for the plague is about. 

II. ° It very naturally passes from a reflective to a 
reciprocal sense : thus £yy.ci&w$t*$«. , we embrace each 
other , we mutually embrace ; li^h^a , we beat each 
other; aVra^o^o^eOa, we meet , ( each other ) 8$c. 

III.° It is used also, in a very few instances, to express 
what we get done for ourselves by the agency of another ^ 
as in the following formula of the Greek Marriage Cere- 
mony , when the Priest places the nuptial crown on the 
heads of the espoused , b Ixkoc t« 6e« M/^awx artfctv'onrc/j ri'p 
ixhviv r« Giy Giolcofccv, the Servant of God Michael weds 
( takes as his wedded Wife ) the Servant of God Theodora 3 
here (rn^avonrai properly means that , by the instrument- 
ality of the Priest, Michael places this crown, the symbol 
of their nuptial union , on the head of Theodora ; and 
that , thus , he makes her his Wife. Thus also , in com- 



under the Character of exceptions than examples of a General Rule v 
and ought to be accounted Idioms ( Idiotisms ). The Active Voice is 
sometimes used , as we use it, in such Phrases as the following, wheref 
others are employed to act for us ; I am building a House , Ktj'Coj 
fva (j7i7i-t ; I am sowing my Lands, $nvm tk xwp«<p«* fwu ; I am planting 
a Vineyard, cpuTsuco a^weXt ; and also in some very few instances where? 
we do not j as ? I have ordered a Coat; cprtavw e'va (fo'pej*^ 



ICO 

m%n Conversation , b rait ecm<para9w$ rh rawe .ff^c/z a cue. 
has married such a one, i. e, literally , has crowned, 
ner\ or caused her to be crowned for himself: and again 
fn'r e^wp/«r8wj has divorced Aer , has , by means of the com- 
petent Authority , separated 7?e/' from himself : the sense 
being active regulates the government accordingly. 

IVo Sometimes, though purely passive , i. e. in sense 
as well as form, it governs the accusative ; b Azfuos icTiovify 

rbv fy'ovov , Kcct rnv Zp>M cctsro txq eda«c i* vvrrxb^q DariUS was de« 

prived of ( his ) throne and life by his own Subjects. 
CHAPTER XLII. 

OF THE TEASES. 

I.I have thought it more advantageous to the Reader, 

in the English Text , and in the short notes severally at- 
tached to the different Tenses , in the conjugation of ypa'<p« , 
to do as much as- possible towards exhibiting their force ? 
instead of reserving the matter for detached explanation 
here. See particularly Pages 47 ■> 4°* ■> 5o , 56 , Text and 
Notes. I have not been so sillily pedantic as to think it 
either right, or feasible, to change the Nomenclature of the 
Tenses, though I have affixed to the immemorially received 
Names, second Names or Definitions indicating their force. 
Men who have already mastered the difficulties of reconei- 
Jing Names , however inappropriate, to the objects named, 
feel habit of too much value, in aid of Memory, to give it up a 
without a struggle. To young people , however , the habit 
of qualifying the first Names, by always repeating with them 
the second , could not, I think, but be useful. little re- 
mains to be said here ; but as examples are of great force 
in illustration, and I have given but few in the conjugation, 
I shall here subjoin those given by Mons. r David , on the 
distinction to be made, in expressing continued^ repftedtive, 
or habitual action, passion, or state of being, and in express- 
ing their single occurrence. 



jo6 

a. If I advise a person to practise writing, for the purpose 

/of acquiring a good hand , I say ypa'pe lid yd ^afyc naxa , 
which means write often , repeat ^e <zc£ of writing , till 
you have learnt to write well. If I request a person to 
write a letter to one of his friends , I say -ypa^e t« <pix\< <ra , 
and mean , that he should write once, and not repeatedly, 
Should I say y?d(pt 7 « <p/a« m , the meaning of my Phrase 
would be, continue to write to , keep up a Correspondence 
with jour Friend. In the same manner, in the subjunctive 
Mood: crpeCTe/ vi ypa'<pv;c $id ?« ^a'O^c xa^a ^om must write ( con- 
tinually, frequently ) to learn to write well; t^ttu vd y?<x^r< t» 
<p/x« ov , you must write ( a letter ) to your Friend, If being 
jhungry, or thirsty, I ask a person for something to eat or 
drink,I say luai Mi yd ma f mi yd <pdyco (i), give me (something) 
to eat and to drink ( now , this once. ) But, if I speak of a 
permanent obligation to furnisfr my food, the proper mods 
of expression is, lilt (m vd mm xai yd Tfuyo, give (^continue to 
give ) me my necessary supply of foocj, 

3. Tins distinction must regulate our use of the mv 
conjugated , as well as the conjugated part of the princi- 
pal Verb, in forming the future, and conditional Tenses, 
as I have already shewn , Page 56, at the end of the 
Passive Voice of Tfdtpo. Thus Um ™ yfd^u , or tid r« y^d* 
^w , I shall , I will write him ( once ) a letter ; 8?\&> 7* 
yfu<pu or 0a rv y?d<pu , I shall , I will keep up a Corres- 
pondence with him. 



(i) These latter examples require a caution, or they might perplex 
tjie subject they are intended to illustrate. The reader must bear in 
mind that c^to is not a present Tense , but part of one defective 
Verb , used as the Aprist of another defective Verb. They are , with 
this caution , being expressions of the most familiar use , the best 
possible illustrations ; as they shew this admirable accuracy to be 
an intrinsic character of the Modern Greek. No Goody Herbseller , 
either in Athens , or in any other corner of Greece , but would 
detect a Foreigner , by the confusion of these Terms , and smile at 
\t , as a most barbarous solecism. 



107 

4- In speaking of Bodily sensations ,'" particularly if of 
any duration , the Aorist is often used where we use the 
present: Ufi/w<ra, I am cold; irjvTafck', I am sleepy; hre/rop* , 
1 am hungry; ( i.e. sleep , cold , hunger have seized me. ) 

5. The Participle, past in composition with the auxiliary 
tX u > forms also a kind of indefinite past, and of pluperfect, 
applicable only in speaking of a thing present, or present 
at the time spoken of : <r« ocflirer olvtol 7 a iawrbtiz ; rd t^y 
lixKty f u-Yx , do you like these melons , I chose them my- 
self ; J7A9e KCLl Ui tjfZSrxZt TCL TrtTTOilCC fJM , TOL OTolx TO. U")(CL %lCLKiy 

/uhx, lie came and took from me my Melons, that I had 
myself selected ; tifiup.*<ran 7} zTttiv IiIxckxacz ; do you re- 
member what the Tutor said? rb e^« y^u^yov , I have 
written it down , I have it written, or in writing. Some- 
times instead of this participle , the neuter plural of a 
Verbal adjective , having the force of an adverb, ( see 
Page 102 , jN t .° 8 t ) is substituted for the participle ; thus, 
writ ifyz<T7yifia.fnc \%%i duoiKTa. , TJiis Tradesman ( shop- 
keeper ) is open, that is , has his shop opened ; ( t» 

tfyudTy^i ctvoiyuivc* ) t^u FfahiarTct IS shut ; tcv \yu clmvtx , 

I have heard of him , heard speak of him , heard his name. 

6. A conditional Phrase is in Modern Greek always 
constructed with the Imperfect Indicative : ay tlx* vrafc&te , 
vbihct Tkr ludii tic twV sttg^c, (1) (/'/had Money I should 
give it to the poor, or if I had had Money I should have 
given it to the poor. See page 56. 

7- For greater brevity , the Imperfect is sometimes used 



(1) The above Phrase might be translated « if I were possessed of ;» 
and then , both hypothesis or antecedent, and consequence would 
clearly appear to be in the subjunctive Mood : again, a though I had 
been poissssed , or should have been possessed of the riches of 
Croesus, I would not have given him a Para, must in Modern Greek 
be translated, K.au *' *h* 8X«»« ~t'k 77*p*£es rov K:ei«y, <Hv r.OeXa Toy 

&0}<7S>. i'yT3 it% U.0V6V TTXS*. 



in both members of the above conditional Phrase: ai %f%$ 

8. The simple Tenses of the Indicative Mood Active, 
preceded by the Auxiliary Particles, Si vol or 0a, express con- 
jecture: Au70f f£CC bjUihU VVyjCL jA IKlhw TVIV K07ri\htXV , Ofe K« T^C 

dyoLTra. That youth is frequently talking with that Girl, 
he must be enamoured of her; rov J'W Shippim , G& r?t 
i^aOe tsi' &<VaV 7S (pfh* rv , you saw that he was distressed., 
he must have heard of ( learnt ) the death of iiis friend. 

However superior the Modern Greek Verb is to ours, and, 
I believe, to that of all other languages of Europe in the 
expression of continued action , under every modification , 
the great advantage of our unequivocal precision in 
expressing Simple Futurity and necessary consequence , 
appears strikingly in such Phrases, as the following , when 
written , and destitute of the aid of emphasis ; oVo/oc ™ &'V5, 
%'i-hu 7o (tiToiHidiu. It may be guessed in this latter Phrase , 
that a threat is intended ; and that therefore the proper 
Translation is « whoever may say so shall repent it » 
equivalent to, I am determined, that he shall repent it. 
This is , however, by no means , necessary , or certain ; for , 
if the speaker be not himself concerned , but merely pre- 
dicting the consequence, it ought to be translated « he wilh\ 
See page lq. 

9. The future tense QIku is also used to express conditional!- 
ty, when referring to a future hvpothesis, vQim when referring 
to a past, as; Uv }o 'Uxviv, WiKtv to ^era^/aVr,if he had done it 
lie would have repented i^. This may be translated either „ 
whoever should assert it should repent it , or would 
repent it. The meanings are very different, though express- 
ed in the same , and therefore in a very equivocal manner, 
in all Languages of the South of Europe. The first transla- 
tion , « should repent it » includes a threat, equivalent to 
J would make him repent it. The second , « would repent 
it » , expresses merely the prediction of a necessary conse- 
quence , unconnected with any idea of the exercise of 
\olition , on the part of the speaker, or of compulsion towards 
the Person spoken of. See Page 5o, 



fgjtj 
CHAPTER XLItl. 

OF MODES, 

FIRST PART. 

What has been said on the Tenses embraces alt that is 
peculiar, with respect to the Indicative and Imperative 
Moods. 

OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE,,' 

I. Preceded by the particle Is , instead of vd , it suri- 
plies the place of the Imperative Mood. n£juw , let us go , 
without particle , is the sole exception. 

•2. It is also used in interrogation, as to the advice, or wish 
of a person , by ellipse of 6!m/£ or Ktyui; Not al KoL^r^iva-cb k&co ; 
shall I wait, for you here? Na 7rnya.hu drro^i ui rbv x°f* v i 
yj vd x.aitib<ra \tq o-ttuti ; Shall I go to the Ball this evening, or 
shall I stay at home? rl vd aa^cj ; what shall I do? ft ret ti#a ; 
what shall I say? 

3v This turn has peculiar force, in refusing compliance 
with another's wish, or in rejecting advice, as absurd ; iy<*> 

yd liQLvmca qtq v&yjti , nxi roc junv vrayco clcv yooov , aurs tivxt to 

iaovov d.l'Jyy.Tov , Stay at home , and not go to the Ball , that 
is out of the question. This Phrase has a spirit of Irony 
about it. 

4- This Mood is also used in expressing a wish, by ellipse 
of the optative particle S^iwon , Heaven grant : thus, b &oV m 
idq <fwri(jy] ; May God enlighten you , <pcojid vd tvc tk^ty , May 
the flames consume them ; kqmo xf^c vd 'x?y , evil betide 
them. 

5. The conjunction «V,- and its derivative adverbs of time 
9%cti , bvoTOLv when, whenever, as soon as; also a<p v from 
what time , as soon as ; eJOu? ott\s , immediately that, lsc. 
are constructed both with the Indicative , and Subjunctive, 
but; invariably, with these essential restrictions : that, when 
a particular fact is spoken of, they require the Indicative i 



iro 

crav tilt rov ixfyw* "yvyt ; as soon as he saw the eneniy , m 
fled whilst on the contrary , when what is customary, what 
•usually occurs , without specifying a particular instance, or 
fact, they require the subjunctive ; otolv &« nh f^fyft, fivyti, 
as soon as he sees the enemy , he flees. ( usually , in speak- 
ing , but improperly , fllies. ) 

In this latter Phrase , the Aorist is used, where we use 
the present ; because the acts are consecutive , and not 
simultaneous-, he sees before he flees. When the acts are 
simultaneous , the present is requisite in both members of 
the sentence : qtclv aot^drai , foyx^l 11 > when he sleeps , he 
snores; 

When both antecedent and consequent are definite ; and 
past , the verbs must be both in the indicative : b KcoVcxf 

CTQLV XXTtlvKCOVi TH S ' P 'UfAbttVf . 'lyilM {AKTVTQQ lit; «JtWC aS SOOIl 8S 

Caesar had enslaved the Romans, he became hateful to them; 
As a general Maxim, according to rule , thtis , or at 

jcaTa£v^«o"Ji t/c t«c vvu-nQKirat; tm , yinrii juiiktcx: iic aurwc. 

Whenever any one enslaves his Countrymen , he becomes 
hateful to them ; ottoioq , whoever , follows the same con- 
struction ; oVo/oc xalaWac™ a , r , k. Whoever enslaves 8$c. 

When olar , d? 5 , fyc. 4 afe followed by the Aorist sub- 
junctive, in the first, and the future Indicative , in the se- 
cond member of a Phrase, it indicates two future consecu- 
tive acts, or events : otoly %uwimni Q'thti &oi<; krivkipty % when he 
has supped , ( that is shall have supped ) he will come 
and see you. 

When by two Aorists, two consecutive past events , 
to be translated by our pluperfect , followed by what 
M. r Murray calls our Imperfect , as in the above Phrase ;> 
i Kouva? &. C 

6. The Greeks sometimes , form a Compound future, by 
adding the Aorist of the conjugated verb to the first form' 
of the future of e^w , thus- ; fchu 'ix €l &*""»'*« Hq tolq mtu, bet 
will have supped at eight. 

If* the verb be active, and the object of the action be 
expressed i they form a compound exactly similar to our 






Hi 
6wii : OfVw 'lx il ^i*fo-vpwov to Gt$tJwint ai^ov^ I shall have read 
your Book to morrow. 

n. In French , « when the declaration of one person 
is made by andther, that is, » in an indirect Phrase, after 
a past tense , the present is changed into the imperfect , 
and the future into the Conditional. In Greek, the Tensed 
and Moods suffer no change , under such circumstances ; 
and. we say, indifferently, in the present, h?yti , on U\u t« 

luc, •jrafaW , orxv \a% o;a t* x% i(jo7T)iv (0 U dit ,• qil U kit 

donnera de V argent quand il aura recu ce quon lui doit, 
he says that he will give him Money amen he receives 
what they owe (is due to) him; and,: in the past, tTW , 

en fchti Ttf luati •srapa'SfcC , qtclv ko.&a ojcc 7* Xftucrixv . U a dit , 

quil lui donnerait de V argent , quand il aiirait recu ce 
quon lui devait , he said that he would give him Money f 
when he received what they owed ( was due to') him. (2) 



(.1) This Phrase affords a good opportunity of noticing that th# 
indefinite expressions, on dit, it is said, People say, they say , ar<f 
almost invariably rendered by the Vulgar in our last mode : Xsfeuv , 
Xeid><r&^ ; Xe^exat , ^m^stron, are more refined. 

(2) By whatever difference of Tense, the above Phrases may h4 
Expressed, in the three languages, it is evident, that that they are , 
in all, equivalent to , « he says , that when he shall « « receive, etc. , r 
he will give etc. » and « he said , that when he should receive etc. 
he would etc. » When the nature of the Subjunctive Mood is philoso- 
phically considered, that, like the Imperative, it necessarily implied 
some modification of futurity, inasmuch as obedience and consequence 
must necessarily follow their correlatives command and hypothesis, 
these striking anomalies of the three Languages are easily accounted 
for , by an acquaintance with the subtHty of the humari Mind , and 
the very different, though nearly equivalent means, by which, under 
very varied circumstances, it reaches the same ends. I have thought 
this opportunity of illustrating what I may have to say , in' the Ap- 

fendix, on a very perplexed subject, too good to be allowed to slip • 
have therefore given in this instance, an exact translation of Moris. 
D. s Rule and the original French of his example; though , without 
such an object, the Rule, to apply to English , must like some others, 
have been entirely remodelled ; for after what has been said on the 
peculiarities of the Modern Greek , as to the future , and' conditional 
Tenses, Pages 5o and 108 , § 9 ,- it differs nothing , in principle , from 
the first part of Rule 6 , though the example is transposed. 



SECOND PART, 

OF THE INFINITIVE MOOR. 

I. There being no Infinitive in the Modern Grfeek , iii 
place is supplied by the subjunctive; Uku vd wm\ je veux 
Loire; that is to say, is used, in the three Persons, as the 
French ii'se it in the i. d , <Sf 3. d for they can use the in 
finitive only in the i. st ; je veux boire , and employ the 
subjunctive in the i. d and 3. d ; je veux que tu boives, $£Vd> 
id ttivq , je veux qu'il boive Uxu vd my ; whereas the Ancients 
would have used the infinitive in the three Persons ; bibere 
volo , te bibe're vblo , ilium bibere volo; 7riiin fixhcpu^ -nidv 

ill (&~hQjUOLl . 7TltlV txvrov €'*?yc l uai (l) 

'2. The Neuter Article rb is sometimes prefixed to the 
Subjunctive , together with the particle vd , as a Noun ; 
and the Subject of a Verb, as we use the Infinitive: u-,m 
xahh to va. txGrcQdvn r/c lid tyv ttoIp/Iqi t* , it is noble ( comely ) 
to die for one's Country. This construction facilitates the 
iise of whole Phrases as Substantives ; thus , to vd dv-S^M^ , 

KOLl VOL 6lda.£/l TIL] KOLKOL TOL 7T0Llbl0LTX , OLVTO llVCXl KOLKKWTiPOV tTT^OL VX 

td x°&wy . It is better well to train (nurture ) and instruct 



(i) The English in this exactly follow the Ancients; I wish to drinks 
I wish thee, him, her, it, you, them, to drink: so in the plural, 
We wish to drink, We wish i thee, him , her, it, them , to drink 
This comparison with French may serve to abate , somewhat . 
the prejudice , which many have rather hastily taken up against, the 
Modern Greek, when it is observed, that what they have deemed 
clumsy exists , as a very extensive anomaly , unobserved, I presume , 
by the impugners , in one of the most cultivated languages of Mo- 
dern Europe. There can be little doubt, that under advantages , 
devoutly to be wished , the Greeks will gradually raise their language 
to a rank not at all unworthy of the unrivalled Parent ; and will 
probably unite many of the pre-eminent privileges , and much of 
the fascinating naivete of her Infancy , with the peculiar Graces of 
the Offspring : for it is most certain , that a great part of the in; 
definable naivete, and playful simplicity of all Languages is due to 
the exercise of strong Minds, and quick and brilliant Imaginations^ 
among the' lower classes, 



n3 
Children than to indulge ( fondle ) them ; to vet dycura xa- 
ttis rr.v Gr«7f/Sa, avrr, thai i gt%(*tM &.^nv\ , to love one S GoUIllrj 

\% the (i) first of Virtues, 

THIRD PART. 
of the participle; 

i. Tire Active Participle undeclined agrees with all 
numbers and genders, though not with all cases ; for it 
tan only refer to a nominative, which is usually the sub- 
ject of the Phrase : olvtcuq at yt/»a/klc £hi7royToic_ rev ki'vIvvov 'iyvyat , 
these Women seeing the danger fled ; r« -sra/W ^kittovt-x^ 
ih a'fxvSa, h^ou^av, the Children seeing the Bear trembled. 

It is not the same with the present passive participle , 
Which being declinable, in gender, case, and number, 
agrees, with the Subject \ agtcus &1 yvtaukit , ffffivptwic re* 
kiyIv>oy . tfvyat. 

2. Whenever the undeclined participle, or the participle 
present passive , refers to any other noun, than the sub- 
ject of the Phrase, it is used absolutely , and expresses a 



(i) Good as a Grammatical Example , and an admirable moral 
Maxim from Cato , or any other Stoic , among the Heathens ; but 
Christianity requires one other Virtue, at least , to have precedence, 
the love of God , as the only solid basis of every other Virtue , the 
onlv firm security for the performance of any of our Duties towards 
bur Fellow Creatures , to which latter the qualifiying word Moral is 
usually most improperly limited. Silence is by many thought equal 
to consent. Stability of Morals , without Religious Feeling , is what 
I cannot understand ; Mons. r David is perhaps of the same narrow 
understanding with myself; but many of his Countrymen, and of 
my own , I know , have long since shaken off these , as they think, 
puerile , vulgar prejudices. Did not Arlstides feel accountability to 
the God of Nations, who maketh empires rise and fall? Did he not 
aet under a much higher principle, when he nobly rejected the time- 
serving expediency and treacherous baseness of the laxly moral pa- 
triot Themistocles ? I know thousands of my Countrymen consider it, 
as it truly is , amongst the first of Virtues. 

8 



i.4 

circumstance attending the action : the participle passive 
declinable is, in this case,' always in the nominative: ara^aourrjtc 

(tyo) ) cItto rrir %fivfvffr , tyttvi atKrju.bc , on nry quitting ( as 
I was setting out from J Smyrna there was an earthquake, 
eua/uoc is the nominative of the Phrase ; o/Iolq viatic tic To x®$' lov 
ixccy To an fa i /uxs , while we were in the Country our House 
ivas burnt ; KoAfoptvos aiTc % k To 1fOLiri{i > hhSav o! <pi\oi ts i 
His Friends came, while he was at Table ; vwyoLivdpivoi avroi 
tic To x a ?' 0Y i ^ £ T° Ko-fx&i t^, their Vessel arrived while they 
were proceeding ( on the road ) into the' Country. In the 
three first Examples, To car fat , ol <pihoi , To xctfci£i , are the 
Subjects of the Phrases. 

CHAPTER LXIV.- 

OF PREPOSITIONS.' 

a7]/\ or olvTc for, in exchange for , instead of , required 
a genitive , ph a/laarcS/fyc komov dfll kolkQ , return not evil fof 
evil ; d-Trhrnatc <piw cot?? i%$fi ; you have acquired a friend 
instead of an Enemy, aVn rl yd for hrcu-wc, Tv vC^Xnc instead of 
commending you insult him. 

In composition , it signifies ( against ) ctmjcefycwf , op- 
posite; dvTtixicc, the reverberation of the Sun; i. (before:) 

aVr/Vfo^Gef, the day before yesterday ; 3. ( Imitation y 

counterfeit : J dvTiv.Ktili , a false key. 

Atah (from, by, ) governs the accusative; this preposition 
indicates ( the point of departure / ) 'i$x o P LOLl d&i rb vr'aw, 
I come from the Town ; — - — 2. (The origin, J avry i k&k; 
<sra$dytTxi dwl rd e'mwjW ? this word is derived from An. 1 Greek; 
To thufict a<aro Toy <pfhov pv , I have received it from my friend ; 
tl/jLardTTo %y -ww ; ( I am/'/ om sleep, ) I have just awakened^ 
lam just, (hardly) awake - — -- 3. (apart:) w/aWV aVo to 

X*fh ^ e him by the hand ; — 4- ( abstraction ) $V«c aVo 

7kto to nfb % I have drunk some of this water ; woiec dno lo-ac t* 
%kaf*t; which of ( from amongst ) you did it? — — ? 5. ( the /nat- 
ter: )xvtt« «V» piwyp*, a cup of gold ( a golden cup ) yi/udfa 



1 1 J 
&h rife, full of water; see p. 102 , § 6. — * — 6. ( the efficient 
cause : tt*&* : - ; -'~^ '■"' *ty<**, he died of thirst; tmlw Qprnr, 
of fever • €*%? wmtiQn «tVo ^w A'%?hM<z, Hector was killed 

bv Achilles; ixffyfht tesrl % citot %; he hid himself 

through fear; 7. ( division, allotment : jea'Os s-t^t/ s^ej 

aWo '"-/a rr/Jaa-ra, each House has three Stories ; ( is of 
three Stories ) % lt77rtcv ( * v*/ ) &s»d€fca -, fsa& , g'i^c&z rhn^: , 

tt'^tvt kci-tIi Z7TQ Tfix yfofjici rlr y.xhha, the supper co,??.? twelve 
Piastres, we are four, that is three. Piastres a head; (three 

Piastres therefore fall to each) -8. ( an epoch pas %) 

lie la\ Sw etc* T* ya»/ti«, two hours after dinner; aV« jcrec 
thenceforth : aV« rvfa , Jtai £/'c to §£«c, henceforth ; Thus, 
in dates , the genitive also ; awi Xfifftv, after Christ ; ik fa 
y/ wa cxra/tcTia aVi Xf^ 7 ^ 1 1600 after Christ; ol-to xz.to£om.c 

noaiiv , fr°™ the foundation of the World ; 9. 

( time ) cIttq gfctlns , at nightfall 

In composition aW , marks, 1 . [separation, ejection) 

a 7 s!;m a , I throw away , reject ; a*™** ; getting up from 
his recumbent position , as a Man from a couch or bed, 
a Hare from her seat, <%e. , — — 2, Privation : ) aVarfip^ec 

inhuman; 3. ( cessation :J sVi^aya?. they have finished 

eatm^; aTtvz?-*-' a Uxxuff/a^ the Mass is finished [ the church 
has chaunted, the Church service is over, ) 

Aia • this Preposition governs both genitive and accusa- 
tive • with the Genitive it signifies, ( through, across , by I 
W irr&iTWfAOL i-r'ifzsn Idlm irehiTziaf, the army passed through 
the Citv : vhh hd fytfis , h* Ukx-jt.; , he came by Sea, hy 
L an d-- — _ 2. it indicates the [means) &£%' corefxa &nt S 
&*« f&, I sent it you, by ( means of) my servant : we may say 

in Greek Id ^ww ; With the Accusative it indicates i. st 

( the final cause : ) %*p* to Id yf^i u* , do it for my sake; 
.ATTiUn hi rn* vuTfiloL , he died for his Country ; *yk$§urcc 
raZra -rx t&idz Id tIt eScxfel fin , I bought these books for 
mv Brotlier ; Id cropa tv Walfa e\s, *) &afanaxu p in tlie name 
of your Father ^ for your Father's fame's sake , I intreat 
you* Tx^hvu , Id d pd% fym yxwmwe , he travels to acquire 
foreign languages , — — 2. ( the efficient cause h uphdh 



n6 

ilvarvx^i , he has become unfortunate through Idleness / 
( or Carelessness ) ; al \7ra1yil hx to (p'^ci/u'oy <r* , I commend 
you for your behaviour* e/^ua/iyyuAV, tyyvtl>y.ai h'avTbv, I pledge 

myself for him ; 3. ( the end: ) ipfotvtrt hd %* U'okiy, 

lie has set out for Constantinople; hot tt* thai olv\o VkctQciGy; 
whither is this Vessel bound; — — 4- ( the subject) ow 
upihQvQLv hd Tr'ohiuLoy , they talked of nothing but War ; 1/ eac 
fcxfvtlcu h olv% ; What think you of this ? 

In composition it signifies, through) thoroughly, distribu- 
tion ; it implies also intenseness of the simple. 

E/c ( in , into ) requires uniformly the Accusative; kxQouou 
tk % Kfijbfrain , t keep my bed; vyyaivco s/V to ^^oxuoy , I ant 
going to School, 

By ellipse of the Accusative , it sometimes appears in 
immediate contact with the Genitive: wycum tU ™ 'OUovby.* , 
I am going to OEconomus', to' ctWt/-, house, understood. 

KolIol, governs both genitive and accusative. Witli the 
Genitive 3 it indicates opposition, contrariety : avTcc uyi'hwi 
xolJcc cm , he spoke against you; %1'vri 7roh\d Kurd tcov r^aiKar , 
he said much against, spoke much to the disadvantage of ? 
the Greeks : With the Accusative , it signifies in , or at r 
and expresses conformity : tccff \v.iaov %* xaifor , at that time 
xefldlov TfOTTov. 7K7cv y in tliis manner; xa\d %; vfywc, according^ 
to the laws; xald %v yvcoym yx % in my opinion ; tafia. (rvyfitfiwk, 
by accident, accidentally. 

In composition , in addition to the above senses , it 
augments the force of an adjective : KUTa^n^ , very dry ;-' 
tf«?'xc7r%0Q , very white. 

Me , with, requires the accusative, and indicates union: 
irtryaivw f*« aJr«c , I am going with them ; and the name of 
the instrument or matter, with which any thing is done : 
yfdyco yX ri xovhJhi, y.1 to fjLihdvi , I write with the Pen r 
with Ink, 

Mcra, after, requires the'accusative; flat 'ikfy ynd 7fc?«-' vu'ifan f 
he will come in ( after ) three days. 

In composition it signifies change : to lyndnmva , 
I- repent it : ( I have changed my mind about It ) : 



«*7 
pi.7 (l$'1kkq , I change ; fjaroi^xivu , I change position, pasf 

from place to place. 

Ea*a, contracted from k$avoi, is used only in composition , 
.and indicates reiteration ,&s re, in English: jSMsrw I see ; 
%a.va$\i7T(j) I review, 

ITa^a, than., and also , against , as the inverse of kxtol 
according to* admits only of the accusative: lh iTiz -ruf iibiti4v 9 
I have seen no other than him; Trap <pv'<riv, against nature , 
wtLfd tvc v'oum; , against the laws. 

It is sometimes a conjunction , and always marks dif- 
ference , aS CLKKOL,, (ACt y but : llV fJM TO U7TtV (plhOQ GM , TTCLfd 

6 dlihfbe fjLM ; it was not your friend, but my, Brother who 
told ( it) me; Sex dtau crotpfa , cra^a loxw'trotpoc , he is not wise, 
but thinks himself so; llv rlv hKoracriv Olkkoc , ifdod Hwof , no 
other than he killed him : here the accusative does not 
follow rafct, because it is., in this instance, a conjunction (i) 
and not a preposition. It might without solecism be re- 
garded as a preposition , and the accusative put after it , 

tiV 70V tOKQTZiCKJtV CLKKOQ 7T3{> 'iXiTyOV blLt tlilS WOuld lead tO 

ambiguity , which ought to be carefully avoided. 

This preposition is oeasionally seen constructed with a 
genitive , signifying the efficient cause ; j3/£a/w rynaxJliv 
mtfft 7v relit , a Book composed by such a one. 

It is sometimes purely intensive : iJvm vctod ttokkol \u\bc ;» 
lie is exceedingly silly , an exceedingly great fool ; and in this 
case often retracts its accent , and becomes paroxytonon ; 
era pa 7rohXa ao>ao?. 

In composition it preserves analogous senses of change, 
opposition , intension : ttjLfaLiofioc , illegal ; TrafaSdiva , 
/ transgress ; to. va.^nhbm , he exaggerates ; avrd ro £/- 
Qhiov fxl 7rocfAfbu . this book pleases me exceedingly. 

Ufo\ before , since ', requires the genitive ; wp w'mi ypifQr 
five days since. 

(i) If not a solecism, it does great violence to the plainer princi- 
ples of grammatical Analysis to consider it a preposition. Habit very 
naturally , as in our own language , leads to the Offence ; but it 
certainly is a great offence against precision and perspicuity, wliicll 
are virtues of the very fin>t rank ; in writing and speaking. 



u& 

It has in composition the same sense: TfopQdw, I antici- 
pate, arrive before, get the start of. 

Tlfk, towards, governs the accusative only ; Ttaydlm tt(oq : 
xvtov , I am going towards. ( to.) him l£id , nfe t*"Iq&% x&^'oe, 
on the right, going towards that Village; 

It has the same sense in composition : nfwrxakS' , I invite^ 
(call towards ); i Yly.rfic o-«c tt^kxm:, your Country invites, 
you ;- 7rf07Tfixo % 1 run towards , I have recourse to. 

rVsf, governs both genitive and accusative : With the- 
genitive it signifies, ^c^/or the sake of, in favor of: b kfoc 
%'oX Q s ciTTtfavi v?nr. Tve woLTftlog , the sacred Band ( Battalion ). 
died for their Country :. u?ri ttokko. jVep £#«., he spoke much 
( said many things.) in my favour; In this sense , it is tfo& 
inverse of kutcI. 

With the Accusative , it signifies beyond , above: dvrh 
to' '(coov £# unlf 7vV ^riila. x$'o™t ; r l us animal lives above thirty 
years ; ^->y>i J/rsp rd Itxz/avjvx he exceeds his limits, he goes: 
beyond his Sphere ; It preserves in Composition the same 
significations: ^^aanilpuxai %v F^kkclIoc, they defend Greece; 
liTnopxird rx oftot ; he exceeds the limits. 

Other Prepositions are , amongst V/riters., in use in 
Composition of Words , and are sometimes met with, 
detached; but these all savour of Hellenism , and their 
senses, and governing influence must be sought in Hellenic- 
Dictionaries and Grammars, 

CHAPTER XLV. 

Of ADVERBS.. 

i. Many adverbs admit of two modes of construction, ac- 
cording to the nature of the Words with which they are- 
united. I.° When they are followed by a substantive, or pro- 
noun , not monosyllabic , they are connected, by a preposi- 
tion , governing its usual case : II. ° When followed by the 
monosyllabic personal pronoun, the pronoun, without pre- 
position, is in the genitive, and as usual enclitic ; Such 



are pxty , with ; noyrd , near ; irxva upon ; vttokxIco , un- 
der ; oV/<r<» behind; e/^oV, before: Thus ; with the aid of 
a preposition, we say 0a tray a petty pi %v <p,t\ov pv , I am going, 
I shall go, with my Friend; h cuthybg ^ nrov ttovrd t/'c ipi* my 
Brother was near me ; To o-Kctpvl uvea vTrokofia tig ro r^ot-ni^i , 
the stool is under the Table; otariva. i*i rh w^tm , behind 
the door ; rh ^hkira iurrfog tig tpivot 7 I see him before me ; 
with the enclitic , thus ; Qx vrxya petty r« , I shall go with 
him ; tth*-<pk p* Irov xovroi pv. My brother was near me ; 
etvTvi yi KC7ri\hcilh tvef K"2ppta.v x*? iv >i7r 0LvQ ty}q this Girl has riot 
a charm about her ; rh w$w vvroKctra tk , I found him under 
it ; asr' o'sr/o-fi) r« , behind it ; ph irt^xatg aw tpvrfa pM , do 
not go in front of me: the two last preserve the preposition, 
but it precedes the adverb, 

2. Tf/yJfv, or Tpyv^Q around , is, with pronouns, con- 
structed in the latter mode only ; r$iyvox pv , r$iyv?v p&g ; it 
may, with Nouns, be constructed with an accusative, pre- 
ceded by a preposition; Tf*yy$H tig. ro" vttyiti, tig ro dpTrtht p* , 
around my house , my Vineyard. 

3. E w wf , till , unto, requires the accusative, with a pre- 
position ; lag tig rh xfcivby , unto Heaven ; though sometimes 
before Nouns, and invariably before other Adverbs , the 
preposition is omitted ; "tat <w$ior , till to morrow ; tag r'ort, 
till then ; "tag vrbri ; till when? 

4- The indicating Adverb vol, there, lo ! behold ! is 
followed by both Nominative and Accusative ; by the fpr_— 
mer , when the word is of more than one syllable ; by 
the latter , when it is the enclitic personal pronoun : v&l 
b dliKtpbc o-y , there is your Brother ; m rov , there he is. 

Followed by ©■«, it marks astonishment ; p Wx^x-itxKtutg 
rbtrov, \tl <r ro %a<ro- t o-y ro t$aKot\ vd Try liv ro Q'lhtig TTktov , you have 
so often begged me to give it you , T have given it you, and 
now forsooth you no longer wish it. ( will have it. ) 

5. The adverb of time vrort , never ; with what strikes 
me as singularly happy brevity , and a most graceful 
energy, assumes the monosyllabic personal pronoun, as an 
enclitic ; l\v rh ilia wort p* , I never saw him in my life ; 



J ox* 
We arrive , perhaps, at something very near this energetic, 
turn , by reversing the natural order of the Words « In my 
life, I never saw him ; and in our impassioned stile , by a 
beautiful reiteration ; Never , no , Never , shall I see him 
more. The Greeks would here like ourselves , reiterate ; 
vot\ 7TC76 {am , lh $d rov tRS. Again , never in their lives did 
they harm him, lh rh 'Ifihz^av -nonk r«c, the sentence com- 
pleted would run , as in English , ttotI tk th <W tw? . 

6. The Privative Adverbs x u Vs > $''X?>fi > without; take 
the Accusative • li^uc vmv , without judgment , x&fii Tre ¥ K 
without Talent. 

•7. The Interjection oIkkoi^ovov , Alas ! is followed some- 
times by the preposition tk , and its case: olkkoIuoyov i'k i^ha \ 
woe is me ! to ye ! bravo ! sometimes by file enclitic personal; 
pronoun ; wy'i qm\ bravo! well done! bravely! and in the, 
plural, ilyi TWf ! English the same as in the singular. 

8. Met is used in oaths, and solemn asseverations, and ne- 
gations ; ju.ee 7vv TriaiLv {am } Um rh fio$m % t ^ Faith, I'll, support 
( stand by ) him; /ud rh Gm Ih rh %Bol , On my honor, As, 
Heaven is my witness, I have not seen him. 

9. a'c is constructed with both the Indicative a.n& Subjunc-. 
live; with the latter , independent of its imperative import^ 
it indicates permission , consent to something that has not 
yet occurred ; with the Indicative , adherence , assent, to, 
something already effected : thus , when I say , ai rh ndpy , 
let him do it, I signify that, without being much interested 
about the matter, I have no objection to it \ but if I say , h 
to iKCLjUi , let him have done it , be. it so , suppose, him to, 
have done it, <^c. I imply that I am not against it , I am** 
not displeased, though I do not approve it; «V , with the* 
present of the Subjunctive, indicates consent to, the continua- 
tion of what is taking place at the time we speak: ac rhlii^n 
let him beat him; ( set about beating him, ) ac toy li^, 
let him continue beating him. See Chap/ l\i , § 2. 

10. A'V is also optative; «c a&aftS v% rov ^otvmtco f kolI ti&ufc 
«f cLTroQy'vu ; the optative of the pathetic language of Jacob , 
on regaining a sight of his Son Joseph. ? let me but se& 
flint before I ( and immediately ) die x 



*i. There are, in Greek, three negations, l\v and 'o\t » t 
Vulgarly 'cyitKi , and the prohibitive juf, , vulgarly ptiV 
l\y is always connected with a verb and is never used 
independently , or alone ; lit fchu , I will not ; cyi on the 
contrary always, and it answers to our adverb No ; to Biiiit^ 
do you wish it? 'o\i % No. Ah, is used only with the Indi% 
cative, and ^ with the Subjunctive and Participle \ )M rh 
Wyjv<~<;, dont praise him; ySiv ovrat; ^a^aercc, not being accus- 
tomed. Thus in negative Imperative i. e. Prohibitory Phrases, 
it is always requisite to use the Subjunctive after /uvi ; 
ufa T9v xtittcIs, dont beat him i. e. leave off beating him \ 
Uiv rov kTVTrwrx dont beat him i. e. dont set about beating 
him. See Chap J 42 , §. 2. 

12. d'yj and { un form Negative Conjunctions , S'r« , yMri, x 
neither, nor; \h 'ix u * 7e n f° > * T * ^jfi'» I have neither Water- 
nor bread. In such Phrases as these , where the Negative 
is conjunctive, Custom is in favor of ^n , even with the 
Indicative: thus, it is most usual to say, llv i%v nfo r f/.y\n 
^uyJ , I have neither water nor bread ; and with a dou- 
ble negative , thus ; Xh \yv y.v\rt va^'o , juvn -^uyJ' though are 
would be more correct. With greater reason, in the subjunc-- 
tive , lh G^'aw voi rh ila , film vx rov o^ihwco , / will neither 
see , nor speak to him ; and with a double Negative, lit 

$ko , yvirt vol toy ilco , p.hn vd -rov by.iKy,<jo. 

i3. From these Negatives are also formed , *S* and yull, 
in which the particle os answers to our, even, so much as; 
lh rh ytto$i£ii , $e rov t^fe, he neither /mows, nor has ever 
even seen him, ( So much as seen him. J Instead , of, 
these Intensives , it is very common, however incorrect , 
to use the conjunctives «h and /uyP,i , particularly the lat- 
ter : Ih \x°^ y p*> Ti n f° £/ V to ennTi. IFe have not even (wot ) 
Vv T ater in the House. 

i3. The Affirmative Particles Na/ , Na/Vxs answer to our 
yes ; 's'^e/c -^uiai ; have you Bread? Na/ , yes. Mcu/o-ra is 
much in use as an affirmative , particularly intensively. 

1 4- It is considered more elegant to answer by re- 
peating the Verb in the Question , particularly , if affir- 



122 

matively ; thus , t^c/c -^opf ; have you any Bread? e^<y ,' 
I have ; i%us ro £i2h!ov ; have you the Book ? % ^x Q t 
I have; ayJhwu; rlc <p/\«f /uac ; did you speak to, or have 
you conversed with our Friends ? r«c auiKwoi I did , 
I have; %ft& rh dlih^'ov ^ ; Did you see my Brother? rov 
tlloL , I did; When the Noun governed is definite , the 
Article must accompany the Verb in the Answer ; thus : 
'ix^s '^ol(tI ; Have you any JFine ? ep^o , / have ; tyi* T0 
Kfuaf ; Have you the JFine ? To lx w > I have. 

lb. "law , perhaps , when referring to a future time , 
is constructed with the Aorist of the Subjunctive ; 't'troo; 'l\h y 
perhaps he will come ; /W rov iS»c , perhaps you will 
see him. 

1 6. The comparative particle cjo-ar , Vulgarly <rdv , like", 
just like, is followed by the accusative, though preceded 

by a nominative ; ol <p/hoi cry uwi adv tx$ kqkvs , your friends 
are seemingly ( just like ) fools, 

17. Many Adverbs such as nowd , much , xa,\a , well ; 
trvyyi, often ; 7TfUTct, first ; wkokcl , easily; Ivmokol , with 
difficulty , are compounded with Verbs , particularly if 
employed negatively, lb % cvxvo£hZ7ro, I dont see him often; 
ctv -lov xxKoyvopilu , I dont know him well ; y.h fd noxv^cL-hilrc 
dont worry me, pester me, turn my brain, orav rov 7rfa>Toul% 
when I first saw him ; avrb ro g$y£w« Ivcytohoavofyti , this 
trunk opens with difficulty, tuxoKoayofyu , opens easily. 

CHAPTER XLVI. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS, 

1. The copulative koli , and, is sometimes substituted 

IOr VOL' TTCuC Yl{A.7T0$U KXl KCif/.CiTCil fit T0<TW l}-(JTY t </ ; llOW Can llQ 

sleep amidst such heat ? aal is here substituted for m , in 
appearance only ; for it imports much more : since, if vet 
were used, the Verb would imply merely the possibility of 
the thing , and would therefore be in the Aorist of the 
.Subjunctive , ttco; iuTSfil rl mfinftqi instead of which it e.^ 



presses , not only the possibility , but the actual or present 
occurrence, which is its principal force; xu/mi, he sleeps; 
the possibility , 7tq$ riyyroftT, is but accessory. 

The Particle teal, has a very nearly similar acceptation, 
in certain elliptical Phrases , demanding an explanation, 
of something unpleasant ? or questionable : ti wxyx , y.at 
iluai aifAikm ; what liave I done , that I am ( should be 
called ) idle ? rt kolkov ry.xy.iv h UtfixKyc , koli hrov tv^xwoi; ; 
What harm did Pericles do , that he was ( should be 
deemed \ a Tyrant ? 

This Particle is also employed as the correlative of 
y'ohiQ , hardly , scarcely, when the Phrase indicates two 
immediately consecutive events ; y'oxi; tov tTlxv vM toy 
izTixvzv. They hardly caught sight of him before they 
seized him, 

2. Mlv , and ll , mark opposition between two Phrases, 
two Ideas , as our indeed , it is true , / grant , 8$e. , 
followed by but , but surely , fyc. ; yixfov yh , x*? hv ^ ■> 
small indeed , but lovely. 

3. a'V , if; or™, when; gtotolv , whenever ; «V I , as soon 
as , from the moment 8$c. : See Page 109 , § 5. 

4- A/or/ , because , compounded of Irx and v,n , an4 
kwnlyi , whereas , since , inasmuch as , are causatives ; 
rov ayot.7rc0 h'on tivxi kslkoc , I love him because he is good * 
to Ukq &-arul)i jx cLpiu I wish it, or / will have it because > 
( since , inasmuch as ) it pleases me. 

tfift&H , answers also to our for ( french , car ) which 
is a stronger expression than the former, and implies a 
1 md of appeal Xlv tov yvuffid, e^eiSw Ih tov uIol srore^ I know 
him not, ( how should I ) for I never saw him. 

On and vac both mean that ; but the first is simply 
l\ trrative , or affirmative ; whereas vx must be used , 
whenever any influence of one action upon another is to be 
indicated; xtyn on l phos yxs iTrviyn, he says that our Friend 
Las been drowned ; Ktyii oti to Uku , he says that he wishes 
it ; vo. could not be used in either of the above Phrases : 
but , I fished that he should see it , I ordered lnai not 



is*4 

to come ; lie did all in his power to arrive in time ■ are 
Phrases that must he all translated with vd : n^Ka. va. to ilH, 

tcuTo; , izor^oara^cc va /xhv USr, Ixxy.i to Ivvxtov vol <p(ix'<7)7 t/'c kik^, 

Instead of in the Vulgar very commonly use ttjq- kiyu 
htJc thai x.*hQs , he says that you are good. 

6. After Verhs signifying fear , ^, and yn^ru; are sub- 
stituted for on , with the Indicative , if referring to any 
thing present or past ; with the Subjunctive , if to any 
thing future ; yofrurai fwvus x^V 7 *f 7r*fdltc , he is afraid 
of losing ( lest he should, that he may lose ) his Money ; 
fop>t7Txi y.YiTTQQ b Qihoc; ts \h 'tkh he is afraid that his Friend 
rnay not come ; <pcfiuTai (ifa^ ?wc lx u!Ji > he is afraid that 
he has ( may have ) lost them. 

7. Thence it is , that ymwQQ , at the commencement of 
Phrases , is expressive of fear, approbation , conjecture; 
fxy.woc lh ifJ.ya.7ra, perhaps ( I fear ) he does not love me ; 
&fimw da; iwiifa^ci, perhaps, ( I fear ) / have disturbed, mo- 
lested you. 

Instead of py-rcds, the Vulgar say ^<£c kui ; ttu; v.a\ Xh to 
foV ; Would you not wish it? perhaps you would not 
wish it, 

8. The particle art forms a remarkable Idiotism (1), when 
prefixed to a Verb in an independent Phrase; for it in- 
dicates , that the action expressed by the verb has just 
occurred at the instant of speaking ; on fann^M , I have 
this instant risen ; on 'iyvyi , he is but this instant gone out. 

In analogy with the above sense , it has that of phm? , 
hardly , scarcely , and answers to the same correlative 
*ai* oTi tldi rev £^9^or r« , kou t^JQjf t7rclvQ % , he scarcely 
saw his enemy , before , he rushed upon him<> similar to 
the AncientPhras.es utvidi, ut peril \ dg tllov , os/tppm. 



(1) I fear this Word may appear pedantic ; but Idiom and Idiotism, 
m speaking of languages, are of such very different extent in their 
Import , that they never ought to be confounded. The idiom of a 
language is its general distinctive character : an Idiotism is a sin-, 
gular exception, a departure from that character, either partial ? g* 
originating with the Vulgar. 



h5 



C). Aid rot ( lid indicating the final cause ) signifies td 
the intent that . for the purpose of : See page 1 1 5 $ 

iqrijyt t/f rm TclXKixv bid vl ux^v ifa icttotiLW , he IS gone tO 

France to study Medicine. 

10. Ml to id , by means of, is very little in use ; it ig 
belter to form the Phrase either with the participle, or with 
the particles hon, fjre/Sw ; thus instead of /ul to yd u(xxi a^«fff#c 
lit lyu bftZir f heing indisposed I have no appetite, it is 
better to say , oVtclc a p fez tot , or kTruw , hhi upon kwu- 

vtqs , x. T. K. 

ii. Independent of its other meanings, the particle yd 
constructed with the Imperfect of the Indicative is expres- 
sive of desire, or regret of something wanting ; rx Jtw %i: 
rvto to ttotfsohi yJx KaBotfd £fu'<wc, that there were a clear spring 
in this Garden ; vx r,rov v\ E\aj«c §Aeu9loot, 7/ ey aoopof 'ct^ if8f*t 

ytvv. What a beautiful place ( Country ) would Greece 
become were it but free ! This Phrase shews its close 
analogy with ay. 

12. This Particle forms with the verb 'i%a , joined to 
iSouns of number, and of time , a very peculiar Idiotism; 
*X W T f e?c *f**t«K '& rh ila , it is three days since I saw 
him , or I have not seen him these three days ; t%ii 
T^7f tCbo/idltz yd ea-0h , he has not been these three Weeks. 
For such phrases , the following turn , with dp I and the 
negative Sir , is preferable ; thou TftTc y\A^xir dy y lly toy ulx. 

1 3. fi'ati ( to the degree ) that) is a correlative ttf th-3 
adverbs 1mm , to such a degree; xtco , So; and the pro- 
noun TOMTOC > SUcli; thoU TC70V XTXlliVTOC , UTTi o£K V%tV PU flYl i 

yd Six^m , he is so illiterate that he knows not even how 
to read. 

i4- The Vulgar use b-arv instead of 2«t*. As to /ay) , Sea 
the preceding Chapter § 11. 

1 5. A"»a, Ac/Tor , then , and the latter with the Article, ' 
to koivov , o6t> (therefore , wherefore , whence, on that or 
on which account, ) are conclusive particles ; dtxnmi , «fa Jy , 
he breathes , he therefore is alive ; tL*irri{v , olohl v. xUi 
it smokes, it $ therefore , burns : Komh is more in use it* 



\a6 

longer Phrases ; q KXifa tTvai ttok-Atiucv vr^dyixi %h TfsVo \oirh 
vd rh x^ VC0 H iU Time is precious we ought not therefore 
to waste it. 

1 6. A'yzuhd is used in resuming discourse , and in mo- 
difying what has been said ; kxkx nd^yuz kol) puyftdnig y.i-xv 
rtytwr , dyKcchd lit art xgu&fyroit , faii^i WtKiig '£%ii yd (wm , VOU 
are right in learning a Trade , or Art , though, indeed 
( rigorously speaking ) you need not, since you will have 
wherewith to live. 

in', M' okov on , /uoKoy hm , although , is an Italicism $ 
contuttociocche ; \h (2 dfttr'tt y okov o7tm iTthu ivuoopis , lie 
does not please me , though handsome ; dv kal although ; 
(A aV'ffe/, clv nil curxHfLos ; he pleases me, though ordinary ^ 
Or plain. The Verb may be used* pafto-u , %» kx! uvol-. *fx*ifMc* 
though the former turn is more concise and elegant ; 
P okov ry to , vet , notwithstanding , however , in spite of 
all that ; tlrcu &k&&iqg , (/.l okov %to llv (Hkco vd Toy ftdm ; he is 
rich ; but yet I will not have him ; we may also say ( ul 
'Skol tx Id h-kxtyi lb Ssku yd Toy vrdyoo, notwithstanding, or in 
spite of ( or with ) all his riches , I will not have him. 

18 KaV , rx\dxi?Tov , at least; yfd^i rov y.dv y.fx ypfitp/r^ 
write him, at leasts a short letter ; kxv is peculiarly ap- 
propriate , after the conjunction »• tt^ttu td rev b/uiKwrg , 
ri vJly yd rov yfd-^rig , jou must speak to him, or at least ( at 
any rate ) write to him. 

19. u Oao>c, But , however , often commences, butj more 
elegantly, closes a Phrase ; iTvxt clvtiIoq oycog lly ul ytd/xvn vd 
yiKa , he is smart, ( sprightly , quick at repartee , ) 
but yet he does not make me laugh ; also, l(v y\ adyvu vd: 

ytKoJ ou'jjc. 

20. AKKa, TtKiu , but * tTvoii ibfiop<p6C~j d\hd llv 'i%it Grtgvjud, 

he is handsome , but he has no talent ; yl dyx-n-d ? 7tkv\y lit 

QihuVov vdftt, he loves me, but I will not have ( marry ) him. 

•21. TTf/V , 7rfo rx vd , before, till, require the A 'oris t of 

the Subjunctive', %h QtKco yd rh oyiKwu, Trfiv hx&daa to fitp>K(ov tk, 

or &fi rJ vd haficiea k. t. k. I will not speak to him before, 
( till ) I have read his Book, 



*li. eV « , tk xcLtfbv ot*-, cVra; , while, whilst, meanwhile, 
meantime , are both conjunctions and adverbs of time ; 
Ah f/dydTTxc h u d kglt fives + you do not love me , whilst 
I adore you ; the two other conjunctions are considered 
less elegant ; ih xoujor ecr* hro? tlr T o •GrtpiQohi ry , i^moty ot 
xteflou , no.} cthtzo-oiY to (TTYjn , Thieves entered , while he 
was in his Garden , and stript the house ; oyrae It€^4^5w 
vs t° yu&& i wA0e to K*t?xGi tv , whilst he was walking along 
the beach , or shore, his vessel arrived. It is unnecessary i 
I presume , to notice that otrac is the undeclinable participle 
of the Verb Substantive. This being known, the Reader 
will , by referring to page Ii3, § 2, see this turn of 
Phraseology explained , and the principles on which the 
participle otr-xs is substituted for a conjunction* 



APPENDIX. 



SECTION r. 

What in the following remarks, particularly on accent, may to 
fiie learned appear superfluous or trifling , will, I an (old, be 
very acceptable to those who know nothing of Ancient Greek, ani 
study the Modern for practical purposes only. 

ALPHABET. 

-As some of the forms of Letters in use are, in the Alphabet, 
emitted , it will be necessary, as far as the means of printing .will 
allow, to add them. 

After l read another form £ , after , 3- after 77 , <& , after ? , p. 

The Letters and o> have no exactly equivalent representatives in 
English : they have both one sound, between the o in bond and bone 
English •, and as nearly as I can represent it , that of o in bonnet 
French, or bonnie Scotch. 

SYLLABICATION, s 

As the Nouns and Verbs declined and conjugated are divided with a 
view of* distinctly marking the variable part of the Word , and the 
accented Vowel, the-Ruies for distributing the Consonants have not 
hztu there observed : they are the following. 

A Single Consonant is to be written with the following Vowel 5 
as cps-fto, Xo'-j'OSj a-vc-ixo;. 

Doubled consonants are to be divided between the preceding and 
following Vowels, thus, 3x-Xoi ^Xwc-ca. 

Compounds when, divided, are to be divided into their component 
parts, thus, ££~flX6ov> cuv-s»-^svo{iai , Kuvo'o-oupot , Trpo-s-Tarra, »£-re. 

All combinations of letters found at the beginning of Words ori- 
ginally Greek (1) when in the middle , are to be written with the 
following Vowel , as M-r.tu £-t$cp.o?. 

All other combinations are divided between the preceding and 
subsequent Vowels, as 07-^00; ? ai^-ao?, eVto; 3 wcp6-»os. 

ACCENT. 

As some idea of the Ancient quantity of Vowels is necessary for 
readily determining the change and movement of the Accent, I sliail 
subjoin the Ancient Distribution of the Letters. 



(l) o£ cX 'Zi 7X 7? S[j. oi 3~o 6>, 6v 6p *X m y.s xr {iv tz\ izv tcj ttt co 
t3 ns. <s>.\ V'j, ott s~X <s~ era co citf cy^ tX tii. Tp <j-3 <?X op yQ •/}, m £i x,P» 

9 



VOWEIS \1S*D DIPHTHONG.*?, $OUSONAS$£ 



Loilg Y! W (J ( Soft * * 

Short s o 
Doubtful a i u 
Diphthongs long (i) 



9 Mute I Middle p 

( Aspirated <p ^ 6 
4 Liquid X pt v ' f 
3 Double £ ^ V 4s 
i Called Solitary § 
The Accent should always be placed over the iast Vowel of a 
Diphthong. 

There is an error of the press , page 6 , 6 £a(3o$ instead of 6 Xfl$'<k 
which affords a fair opportunity of explaining more distinctly the 
circumstances in which alone the grave accent is to be used. All syl- 
lables are accounted grave that have no mark of Accent ; but the 
sign of the grave accent is never used ? unless as a substitute for the 
aeiite , when acuted Monosyllables , or Words acuted on their last 
syllable , are followed by other Words (2) in the course of a Period: 
a^£}/po'ij p.vj £sv ef^ev tov dd'eXtfov too Kupioo (3 , aXXa tov tou Koptoo A 
athXaov , My Brother did not see M> B's but M. r D's Brother -J- 
iififi to [3i[3Xw ; Who took the Book ? T ( el^e ; What did he say ? 
In the first instance achX^o? retains its primitive sign of acute accent, 
being followed by an enclitic ; in the second it assumes the sign of 
the grave , being in the midst of a period , and not followed by an 
enclitic ; in the third it resumes its primitive ■ sign , being at the 
close of a period! 

GENERAL RULES FOR ACCENTING HOUNS. (3) 

r. a OXYTONA Isosyllahic become Perispomena in the Gen. S. and 

PL /see T.ii.i p. 16, and in all cases ending in vj of the" 3. d Declension.' 

See euXa^T,?. 

2V Imparisjilabic of more than one syllable (4) become paroxytona 
m all increasing cases. (5) See -r^u-piv, and perispomena in all cases' 
ending in %\- and ey. See BaatXeu? p. 24. 



(1) Except a.: and 6 i final, and, in the Fulgar Form of the Imperfect 
Tense Passive go, as e^pcfyou-jAouv , coov , etc. 

(2) The Interrogatives T t? ti, and acuted finals followed by Enclitics 
are the only exceptions. The above Rule , and the exceptions prove 
most clearly that the variations of tone must have been very nicely; 
observed by the Ancients. 

(3) See page 8 , line 6. 

(4) For Monosyllables increasing. See page 28, §. r. 

(5) Except "-yuvvi irregular. See p. 1 35, and Nouns having their final 
long, which, in all cases, circumflex a long penult before a short finaL 
See creorrip page 23 , §• 2. 



3. PARQXYTONA Isosyllabic become Perispbmcna in the Gea. 5. 
and PL if contracted by synezesis , as <pa£-icu-'.6»v in the G. S. of 
p.«t (Bta?,and in the G. PI. i.st(i) aad 3. d Declensions, 

4. Imparls yllabic (except of the a.a Declension which never move, 
nor change their Accent ) advance their Accent one syllable in th: 
Genitive Plural. See Sppts, •$$*». P. 24. 22. 

5. PROPAROXYTOKA Isosyllabic become Taroxytona in all cases 
where the final is long. See avOjxoxo? P- *7 > unless that final be con- 
tracted by synezesis, when it must be circumnexed. See >. w xo*ai^o, p 17. 

6. Imparls yllabic advance their accent one syllable in all cases 
increasing, or ending in « § , except the G. PI. of the i.st Declension, 
where they advance it two. See cubist;, odpe^a p. i5. 22. 

7. PEPJSPOMENA Isosyllabic undergo no change (2). 

h. PROPERI3POMENA Isosyllabic become Paroxytona in all cases 
ending with a long syllable, n , y$, ou; , a*, <x- ? except in the Gen. 
PI. i.st and 3. d Declensions, -where the final is always elrciraiffexed. 
See Mcuca teIx«s P- id> . 20, 

9. Imparlsyilablc become proparoxytona in all increasing cases, 
except the G. P. of the i.st Declension, where, as well as in all case^ 
endiiig in £ -. ? , they become paroxytona. See «p«f t a«, ^»u9^p. 22, ?.5. 

ACCENTUATION OF VERBS, 

In addition to what is said page 71? it is necessary alone to add 
that the participle past passive, in the Masculine and Neuter, is aeuted 
on the penult, and that in Dissyllables, an incipient Vowel ©r Diphthong. 
preceding a short final Syllable, is, on general principles , circmn- 
tiexed. See ii y a p. 47 , and £ Tu. a . fao p. 71. 

I.St DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC. 

The Vulgar mode of declining has here nothing peculiar, either 
as to Accent or Termination, beyond what is noticed, p. iG and r- 
except with respect to Nouns in tyi ? , which, whether oxytona, or 
paroxytona? are, in the plural, accented and declined like oet-yac p. 26, 
li ? [<-y, ;> a Builder, M%Hrr^ a PupiL 



(1) In the 1 .st Declension, if the penult of the N. PL be long 
a:- a' owolai from ^ 67701a 3 it is circumflex ed. 

(2) Ileterociites becoming Imparisyilabic in the plural ■> according 
*jj the Vulgar mode of declining, can hardly be called exceptions 
to the above: However written the penult of their plural is always 
■ euted S?* p. 2 6 , 7.7. 



. 1 I 

F. 
Kr/crr-aoa/c MfJ 

dloctc 

cihaic 

a.d DECLENSION XSOSYELABIC. 

In ordinary language some Masculine Nouns which are, in .lie 
singular, declined after the first Declension, are, in the plural, declined 
after the second, as ^aoTopvi; a master work man , chief Artl&eer , 
xopcupa; *- a crab or oray fish. 

S. P. 

Maa-Too-j-.'r . — • £2 01 

• ' jj or M(X77C$\i ' — v ' &jk 

. — ' - — ^ or w - — — ' ov; 





SL 




1 . 


K-r/crr- wc 


(0 


G* 


8 


or v 


A; 


VI 




V, 


n 




N. 


M*(&fT-»K 




G. 


n 


or 5 


A. 


n 




V. 


n 





Ka&ci/p-ac 



a> 



a or on - — — ' cv$ 



Nonris of two terminations are, by the Vulgar , dec'ined with 
tl.rete, and often accented on the syllable marked with double lines. 



M. 

tfos£ oz 


SINGULAR,, 

F. 

V 


u 


■ — — OV 


■ — — - ii or w 


)l 



(i) As' 7i t u et ci are all pronounced alike, «. and e alike, and • 
and 6> alike , and the three accents have precisely the same force 
in enunciation, they in letters, and in other writings of the Vulgar, 
are indiscriminately interchanged, as xi; for tq, and rr^ i$» uq? ei$, for 
each ether. 



ro3 





PLURAL. 






F. • 


(/} 


jj 


Cttf 


tv 


ss 


< 01 C 


eve 


>/ 


— cue 


01 


— i' 


— ■ ate 



M, N. 



The following Hetcrc elites belong to this declension : 6 Xo'^o; the 
Word or Discourse., T « Xo'^ta ; • puaXo'g the Brain, T a p^aXa, o ttacutc? 
Xiches , rat frXoutvf 6x?-' v0 ?j ^ e y ea! *j T # j^po'via. G. twv -/^q'vcov- to aXo-yov 
the Horse ?a aXo-p, or aXo'^ara' to irpocttrcov, the face, ra Tcpwxairx CL 
Tr^aiOTTaTa" froovfeipev* the dream, ra Sveiaa, or ovsioaTa- 

3,d DECLENSION IS0SYLLABXC. 

Nouns of this Declension are very little in use among the Vulgar, 
They, in a few instances,, form a feminine of adjectives such as thkx^r,;, 
by substituting 5Wst for the final $, euXaovi<SWa , and decline it after 
the i .st Declension of Nouns in a, pure. 

I.St DECLENSION IlgPA&XSYLXABXC 

In ordinary Language, Masculines and Feminines of this declension 
become Isosyllabio, by substituting the Accusative Singular unaltered 
for the Nominative of Feminines, and the same case with ? added 
for the Nominative of Masculines. They are, except as to Accent,, de- 
clined like Nouns of the i.st Declension Isosyllabic , thus. 
S. P. 



Ni 


V.f 


OVT 


CLQ 


€?.. 






a 


A. 






cc 


V. 


s. 




« 


y. 


r r 


■yoy ^ 


a 


G". 


— . 


' 


cue. 


A. 


— . 


' 


a 


v. 


S. 





a 


>:. 




<pKoy 


a 


G. 




' 


CLC 


A. 




■ ' 


Ci 


V, 




- --' 


a 



yift 



u; or cue 

, - — cjj' 

— — ■ ac OF cue 

, ' — t; Of atf 

P. 

Tfvy'ov ec or a/£ 



fhoy 



«C 


or 


a i 


H 


cr 


C'.i 




or 


ait 


ac 


or 


C'.i 


f .r 


■or 


«.' 



a.<] PECLENSIOU X?IPA1».IS\*1IABIC. 

In the language of the Vulgar, Nouns of this Declension are tei,.y 
variously declined and spelt. The following examples will suffice, to 
indicate the pronunciation. 

S._ P. 

K. yyvc K Or # yvaxr t( 

q. --— u^ i — t - cov 

Ac — " * or iv • — " €<• 

V. i — - I ' if 

$onie in eu; as AyOXsu; i I?peu; thus. 

S. * t. 

G. £-« * - QV 

A, i'X or m tic 

v. «■■?* *~c 
Mere by Syndesis, thus, as Sac^odfe* $efcu£c > ex&x$rti4$ f SawtXeist.; , 
*Or Saaeus ccveu; cxix^ei? £aciXeu$. 

S. P. 

jf. /Sap €'/a'c /3<*p c/ada/f 

6 V net t tailor 

A. if2 Or €/a/ uaociii 

\r. eta tia.acc.se 
Adjectives in uq tla. u thus. , 

SINGULAE, 



3U 




F. 


f* 




N. £aG 


UC 


Ca0 


1 

ux 


e*e 


V 


G. 


e/7 




t/itC 




n* 




►— « 




»-•« 


# 


7"* 


A. 


y OF vv 




11% 


or e.w 


tt 

* 


V. 


V 




act. 




V 






PLURAL. 






SN £a9 


not 


fre 


nous 


6rf 


ill 




*-~ 




T* 




~*a 


G.- 


imv 




flUV 




ttu* 




*~~* / 




f~l 




*""""/ 


A. 


licit 




tl'Mf 






V. 


not 




aa?$ 




ita. 



1 XJ 



Anomalies. 

P. 



N 7 or f yvvciiK 



W 



s.. 




or 




jvyolTk 


a 


yvfccix. 


Of 


or 




yVYOUK 


^ 


yVYOtTx 


e 


yvvcLi 




or 





yvvoitK ay 
yvicux. $£ 
yyvotHx. H 



ywoux. * 







singular: 










M. 




F. 




N. 






N* 7T0K 


i 


5FOA *.» 




ETOA 


t/ 




G. 


Ay 


A>& 






A* 
i 




A. 


vy 


plural; 






P 




M. 




F. 






m 


5 


N". ffoA 


KOI 


•ETC A. A£* 


or 


A*7f 


7TQK 


JU* 


G, 


K'jOY 


AW/ 








AUV 


A* 


fcofcC 


kco; 


or 


Aa£ 




h& 



i36 

SECTION II 

MOODS AND TENSES* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

$£ the two English Modes of translating this Tense , the first has 

reference only- to Action, Passion, or State of Being , indefinitely, 

as a habit , without regard to Time; thus, he writes yv ell , ht 

reads badly, he laughs heartily, indicating habit, may be said of 

persons whom we have not seen write , nor heard read or langh for 

Months. I am writing , the second form , is necessary (i) whenever 

we would express present action ; and it is an error to say , as a 

Foreigner very frequently does , I write ( instead of I am 'writing ) 

to your Brother, have you anything to say. I sleep goundly indicating 

habit is a very correct expression j but I am steeping soundly would 

be ridiculous. 

i XJSIPERFECT TENSE. (2) 

1 have added to what many Grammarians give as peculiarly the 



(1) Except in cases where, though in actual exercise, the act is con- 
sidered as always equally complete , I hate , I believe, never 1 am 
hating, I am believing. 

(2) If a Name should designate what is named, our Verb has, in se- 
veral instances, beetroften very unhappily managed, as must be evident 
en comparing the force of our forms of Tenses with the Names 
attached to them. I have been writing all day , though it seems to 
have the form of our perfect , may be , and very often is said , while 
the act of writing is still in progress, and must be translated with the 
Modern Greek Imperfect as above , or with the present -pa'epw. I have 
written to him this Week, indicates indeed a completed Action , but in 
an unexpired , and therefore still present period of time , and yet have 
written is given as the peculiar expression of what is called the Perfect 
Tense. I wrote to him last Week indicates a perfectly past action in a 
perfectly past period of time , and yet most grammarians give wrote as 
the peculiar expression of what they call the Imperject Tense. Another 
error very perplexing to Foreigners, studying our Language, is that did 
is very commonly in Grammars of Foreign Languages peculiarly an- 
nexed as a translation to their Imperfect Tense only ; whereas it 
is equally applicable as a translation of their preterite, and is used by 
us merely for emphasis , or to obviate an awkward arrangement iu 
negative and interrogative Phrases, in the same manner as do in the 
present Tense. While in the treatment of our Verb such confusion 
prevails , our Language must needs be difficult to Foreigners , and 
their Languages much more difficult to us than they otherwise 
would be. See page io5, line z<> 






.. l3 7 

form of our Imperfect, I wrote, a second form , 1 was writing, whick 
rJone gives a distinct Idea of the force of this Tense in Modern 
Greek, and in all the Languages of Europe derived from the Latin , 
that of continuation , admirably expressed in the Greek Name 
or Definition of this Tense irapaTaTixo;. Modification of Action and 
not of Time is its main scope : it always implies habit , or con- 
tinuation of action , whether the time be perfectly or imperfectly 
past; thus, I have written or been writing all day, and have not 
finished, must be translated with the Greek Imperfect , cr Conti- 
nuative i^pa^a oXyiv rfc "naspav , xai <^£v IrsXeccdca. So , Cesar wrote, 
elegantly o Kalcrao £yp»5s xaX&£. Alexander conquered wherever lie 
appeared, 6 AX^av^c; oww&tonn e^atvsTi, evtxodris ; My Brother wrote 
while I read, ev £ &ux$a&L fy«?8 6 K<hXcp©',- pew. 

AOtUST. 

To express distinct , completed actions , however numerous , un- 
der precisely the same modifications of Time as above , it is neces- 
sary to employ uniformly the Greek Aorist , I have written one , 
two, three letters to day , f<yp«,<J>a ev<z •> M»* Tfta 'YpaujjwiTa or'p.spov. 
Cesar wrote the History of his own Campaigns , 6 Kaiaa? Bypass Tr,v 
fccpiav twv sx^eiTetwv tcu. Alexander conquered Darius , 6 a'a;;*^-:; 
evixrae riv Aap;Iov. He killed him in his flight rbv ecpo'veucEM £'v w Eipeu-ys. 
This last example in which both the Imperfect and Aorist are used 
is a striking illustration of the very different force of the two tenses. 
As to Modification of Time , we have an advantage i ) in not con- 
founding a period of Time perfectly past with a period of Time yet 
unexpired , as last year , with this year , I wrote last year , I have 
written this year; but our advantage is of very inferior moment , 
compared with the admirable Modern Greek distinction of continued 
from uncontinued , completed action, in future , as v. ell as past 
time, in the Imperative and Subjunctive Moods ? as well as the In- 
dicative. (2) 



(1) It is singular that though, like ours, the French and Italian Lan- 
guages have separate forms of expression for these distinctions of 
time , they are in numerous instances confounded ; thus , je lui ai 
parle hier , gli ho parlato ieri , though not correct are common 
expressions , yet I have spoken to him yesterday, a literal translation , 
is inadmissible in English. 

(2) As specimens of this extreme nicety of distinction the follow- 
ing examples may be useful for exercising the Mind of a foreigner 
on a subject, which, however abstruse and recondite it may appear 
to him, is comparatively familiar even to the Vulgar among the 
Modern ^Sxeeks Verb? that intrinsically include the idea of ccnii- 



i38 

PLUPE&FECT* 

This Tense, -when used, which is but rarely , exactly answers 
to ours of the same Name; the Aorist is much more usual even iij. 
an anterior , or relatively perfect sense ; as I had closed my letter 
before he came in, eccppa^tcia to «ypau.|xa (iou Trplv oQacrr. /fe had gained 
the fort before his Enemy arrived, exupuuos x6 eppooptov rcplv (pOacryj 
o exSpo'c tcu. This confusion in Modern Greek is certainly a defect , 
because the distinction is occasionally important. Thus , partly 
through the defect of our own Verb, and partly through that of 
the Modern Greek, the Aorist is to be translated, according to cir- 
cumstances, sometimes with what is called our Imperfect, sometimes 
with our Perfect , and sometimes with our Pluperfect. 



FUTURE TENSE. 


Declarative^ 


Interrogative 


I shall 


Shall I ? 


Thou wilt 


Shalt thou ? 


He will 


Will he ? 


We shall 


Shall we ? 


Ye will 


Shall ye ? 


They will 


Will they ? 



The English Language , as it is universally spoken and written in the 
South of Britain, has a decided advantage ©ver all the Languages ai the 
South of Europe , both Ancient and Modern, in its expression of 
simple futurity, (i) A little attention to the original meaning of the 
Words « shall and will » will afford an easy solution of all the dif- 
ficulties about their appropriate use ? as auxiliaries , as wen m inter- 

muation,, such as £5 , £taTpt3&> are exceptions , and are used in the Aorist 
when continuation is intended to be expressed : thus tuTb? avOpwTro? Qa 
liar> 7toXXou? xp°' vou ^ &* s Man will live many years, Q a ^larpt^w £6ca xpo'voug 
tic, TaXXtav , I shall spend two years in France. 0a jokimo ^s'xa xP 0V0U S 
rpotTuoTvn;, I shall serve ten years as a Soldier and not 8a £rj , ^laTptSw,, 
x&p.vu. Verbs implying commencement, continuation, cessation, and 
phrases implying habit naturally require Verbs dependent on, or 
qualified by them to be in the continuative form, as apx,i£st, axo- 
aouQeIj wauei va ^pacpyj he is beginning , continuing, ceasing to write, 
and not va -ypa^Tfi', 7Tp£7T£i eva i-upacpt va xo'tttvi xaXa. A Razor should 
cut well 1 and not v « xo'^. For further illustration of this very curious 
subject , see David's Parallel of the Ancient and Modern Greek Lan- 
guages. P. 92 — 99. 

(j) See Mitford on Harmony in Language, 



i'^gative as in declarative Phrases, TVill originally was , and , when s 
used as an independent Verb , still is expressive of volition; shall ? 
no longer an independent verb , vyas expressive of obligation or 
necessity, and indicated a duty, wish, or intention to compel, (i) As 
no man can be supposed to force his own will , when speaking, or 
writing of himself , shall therefore , as an auxiliary, can have no 
ambiguity, but must have a simply future sense : as again no one 
can exercise volition for another «, will , when used as an auxiliary f 
is free from ambiguity , and has merely a predictive sense, The 
reason for the use of shall in the 2. d Person in interrogative Phrases 
is plain , for , without emphasis , the very act of asking a question 
is inconsistent with the idea of an intention to compel the person 
questioned , though not with that of an intention to compel a third 
person, therefore shall thou 7 shall you? are questions about simple 
futurity , whereas shall he ? shall they ? are questions implying an 
intention to compel. (2) 

The Modern Greek has no anterior , relative , or compound future 
in general use , which is certainly another great defect. The Greeks 
sometimes indeed form one compounded of the future of g^a and the 
Aorist Subjunctive of the conjugated verb: See page no, § 6 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

As this Mood necessarily implies futurity , without considering 
the Modifications of continued and uncontinued Action, it is impos- 
sible to understand the appropriate use of the two Greek Tenses, 
particularly referring them to the Tenses similarly named in the 
Indicative Mood: The Present is confined to action etc. , to be con- 
tinued , the Aorist to action etc. , not to be continued^ 



(1) Whenever Volition on the part of the Speaker, or his intention to 
compel the Person or Persons spoken to or of is included in the Mo- 
dern Greek or other Foreign Form of the Future, instead of the i.st 
English, or Simple - future Form, the 2.d English Form page 47 , 
must be used. This is equivalent to, Sing, i.st lam determined as 
to my writing , 2.d I am or we are determined as to thy writing 
3.d , as to his or her writing - Plur. i.st as to our writing 2,d as to 
your writing 3.d as to their writing. 

(2) Will I ? Will we ? are preposterous Solecisms , because it is 
absurd to ask others about our own volition. Wilt thou ? Will ve? are 
questions about the willingness of the person spoken to. When , 
without emphasis , as in writing , we ask about a third person's 
willingness, we either by some adjunct , or by resolving the verb p 
make it clear that will is not used as an auxiliary , but as an independ- 
ent Verb; is he willing ? will he bo willing? etc, 



i4o 

SUBJUNCTIVE, 

Considering that relative futurity, under some modification or otheF ? 
is also always necessarily implied in this Mood , the limitation of the 
Tenses in Modern Greek to two is easily accounted for , precision as 
to the Modification of Action being, under such circumstances , by far 
the most material. When hypothesis is referred to past time , the 
indicative answers every valuable purpose ; as indeed it seems to do 
with us ; for we have nothing to distinguish our pluperfect Indicative 
from the more general form of our relative, or anterior perfect 
Subjunctive , « though 1 had been possessed » equivalent to should 
have been possessed , See Note to page 107. Even when referred to 
future time , we may substitute the future Indicative for the present 
or perfect Subjunctive, both having a future sense ; thus , for 
« if he come » « if he shall come »for « if he have supped before ten» 
« if he shall have supped before ten, i> 

SIGNS OF HYPOTHESIS. 

I have given may and should only as auxiliary signs iu this Mood ; 
for, after a close examination, it appears to me, that , in hypothetic 
phrases, all the others given as signs , when purely signs t distinguished 
from independent verbs, are resolvable into should. Even may when 
purely a sign of hypothesis is always resolvable into shall or should. 
Tills seems to me for an Englishman translating into other languages 
the readiest mode of detecting a sign , or intrinsic part of the con- 
jugated Verb , ( i. e. ) its being always reducible into shall or should. 
Iu hypothetic Phrases, when not so resolvable, the others indicate the 
hypothesis as merely possible or prob.tble , and if translated generally 
require some adverb equivalent to perhaps , or some independent 
verb, as it is possible or probable that I shall etc. , that I should ete. 
In this restriction I , of course limit, myself to the hypothetic part of 
the conditional Phrase , whether it be placed first or last. Where 
nothing of the hypothetic or contingent character appears , it requires 
not a thought , to translate may or might as independent Verbs , 
expressive of ability, permission, inclination , etc. Should, whenever 
it includes the idea of duty , is an independent Verb., equivalent to 
« ought to y » and must be so translated. 

CONDITIONAL FUTURE. 

Declarative Interrogative 

I should Should I 

Thou wouldst Shouldst thou 

He would Would he 

We should Should we 

Ye would Should ye 

They would Would they 



t4* 

The above' is , in all respects , analogous with the simple future , 
and is the correct form for expressing necessary consequence , 
whenever the hypothesis is expressed with a past tense. Might 
if not resolvable into should . implies that the consequence is 
merely possibb or probable. Could, when properly a sign, and. 
not a catachresis , or abuse of Idiom, is optative. Can, in correct lan- 
guage, is never a mere sign of Tense, but is always equivalent to a m, 
or should be able, etc, 

COMPOUND CONDITIONAL FUTURE. 

English is formed by adding have , to the above , as I should 
have, etc. The want of distinct forms for the sense of this expres- 
sion and of shall have is perhaps the greatest defect in the Modern 
Greek Verb, (i) See P. 107, § 6, and note: also P. in, § 7, 
and note 2. The last line of the Note refers to the Paragraph 10 
lines above Rule 6 , beginning « When &tov « , the figure 6 being mis 
placed. 



(1) Except the loss of the Ancient Infinitive and Participles, so 
singularly precise with respect to Modification of Time and Action, 
and so commodiously , and so gracefully blending themselves in 
substantive and adjective forms with the current of the most har- 
monious Periods. 



*4« 



s^z^ts^x^ss^&s^tstssi 



DIALOGUES. 



A I A A or 01. 



A. 



JJo you speak Greek ? 

A little (i) , very little. 

How long (is it) since you began,, 

pearly six Months. 

"Who's (2) your Master ? 

One of the Deacons of the Public 
School. 

Is he a good Scholar ? 

I think so, fcvut I'm not a compe- 
tent judge. 

Does he know Hellenic ? 

They say so : he is one of O^eono- 
mus'(3) Pupils ; and, being a 
Man of application, and of good 
intellect , he must have made 
considerable progress. 

What is OEconomus' Opinion of 
him? 

He speaks highly of him , and 
recommended him to me. 

How do you think I speak ? 

Tolerably well for the time; butyou 
still with difficulty pronounce 
the aspirated consonants, and 



O 



MIAEITE pwpaTxa ; ( ^yuanx) ; 
OXt'yov, xcp.aart , xop.,u,aTa>a . 
'Awb tco'te toc apyj. aere ; 

Eivai 7T£pt Ttou e£ u.viv£$. 
nolo; elvai ^ic^aarjcaXo's aa;; 
"Eva? ^taacovo; «t:o rd ayO-zic>, 

Eivat 7:po/.oti.{x£vci; ; 

Eroxafr/^at , £ev el 4 aai ap? isca~ 
vo? va xpivtt). 

H^supEt. sXXvjvtxa; 

As'^'ouv on ra v)|s»pet" eivai w.aflvr 
tvj^ tou Otscova'v.ou, xai e-jv£i<5*ri efva* 
ETCtjarsX'fl?, acal e^et xotXd xa^xX;, nae- 
irei va ercooV.o^e icaXa. 

Tt Xe'^ei Oijcovou.cs nzfl aurcvj 

Tov E-^aiveT, xat jjls rev IcrSg-Yiffe. 

Il&s oas epatvetat va SfuXw ; 

Slq Tkpo; tov xatp,iv> dpy.&Ta' wXr ( v 
^uaxoXeusaSe axo'p.Y) va tcog^eosts t« 
^acs'a ou^wva, xai gcpaXX&Ti au^vi 



(1) See Note Page 4. Type confines me to one Accent for the 
English , but that will answer my object , indicating to a Foreigner 
the obligatory position of the English Accent generally, without any 
reference to its nicer modifications in refined elocution. The lev; 
slight liberties I have taken in the Translation for the purpose of 
making the Phrases tolerably idiomatic will very little interfere wi*h 
a due appreciation of the Greek Words severally. 

(a) See Note Page 10. 

(3) Pronounced, OEconomusis. 



&M often wrong m accent : you 
paroxytonise, (i) as the Vulgar 
say. ( i. e. you throw the ac« 
cent on the penult. ) 
AH that will correct itself with time. 
I ought for the moment to be 
satisfied withbeingable to speak 
so as to be understood. I wish 
no more. 



II. 



Good Day. 
Good Day to you. 
How do you do my Friend ? How 
is your Health ? how are you ? 
Very well thank God. God be 

praised. 
Where ( whither ) are you going. 
Into the Cottntry. 
What business have you ( what 

have you to do ) there ? 
I mean to pass a few days there, 

as I have now nothing to do , 

and wish a little recreation after 

my late close application to 

Business ? 
Is there any Society ? 
There are several Friends of mine, 

with whom , I walk out during 

the day; and in the evening we 

play at Cards. 
How can you walk during the 

day , hot as it is. 
It is not so very hot : indeed the 

day before yesterday it was 

cool. 
Have you then a different climate 

there from what we have here. 

We are suffocated with the heat 

here in Town ; how can it be 

cool there ? 



143 



OXa Taura <hop0o'vovTat p.s i tov 
xatjftv 5 x.ara to frapov rcpe'ikSl va 
euxaptrnGw, av vijjKXt' kkXo? va c[juX'3> 

V6uv. A 67 Znroi alle, 



B. 



KaX f.'jJocf, c&q, 

KaXs qol; •fyxepa-. 

Ti jcauveis <p(Xe; itm; e^ecs ei's ttqv 
u^eiav cou ; 7ra? ey.eic ; 

Kc.Xa , £o'|« sot OsoV 6 0;dj 
va e'x,T(l ^oljav. 

IloCi wYiYatveis - 

Et? to x&>pio. 

Ti va xap.YK IjcsI ; 

Ey^ci) ar>to i-bv va irepa^w (xepixx^- 

Xe(«t;, xat 6£aw va £sy.cupaa3S KOfi- 
p-aTt cb;o reus aitep!xap.£VG'j; jco'ttou;. 

Eivat auvTpocpia, EJcet ; 

Eivai ttaptjeos <jnX?t, (i.e tou; -otto''- 
o'j^ "jrspiTkaTw tyiv Tnp,;'pav , }C3t.'. T3 
(3pa£u ^a-'^oaev yjxpTta. 

n5>; rarropElre xae Trepi7raTcTT£ tviv 
r.fAi'pav ui TOfftfv fcVtfv ; 

'Aae S'vt elvai woXXvi fc'cn » p-aXt- 
<ra Trpcr/9s; Yrrev Jtxl ^poaca. 

' AXXo etvai Taxa to xXip.05 exei na< 
d'XXo erSo> j et£ tyiv ywpav ^viYo'[i.j9x 
arco tt.v xauaiv, ttw; •va wai ^poatx 



(1) Where Words of more than one syllable are not accented the 
aceent is eitbet on the Capital Letter or the letter y. 



1 44 

So it is ; corne and see ; you will 
pass your time agreeably : you 
will meet with real friends, who 
lore you with ail their souls. 

My Friend , I like Men's Society 
very well ; but that alone will 
not do; I should like to have , 
a few Ladies among them 5 or 
the Country is to me a Desert. 

Dont be alarmed : you'll meet with 
Ladies : Do you think we are 
so many Monks , and live in 
solitude. We have , among the 
rest , a Lady of Constantinople, 
(1) a late arrival, who is the ad- 
miration of us all, for her ta- 
lents , excellent education, and 
graceful manners. 

Is she handsome? 

Not very; She's little famed in 
that respect : Beauty is not her 
charm ; but she's not plain ; her 
countenance is rather pleasing. 
That's not enough for me , my 
Friend. A Woman to be per- 
fect must have Wit and Beauty 
united : in my opinion , this 
latter is the essential ( the chief 
excellence ) of the Sex, 

Ton talk at random, like a hare- 
brained boy: however come with 
nie , and , after you have seen 
her , you may judge. ( for 
yourself ) Grace of expression 
emanating from an amiable 
cast of disposition, and a highly 
cultivated Mind often throw a 
charm over the Person. 



Fivxt oixw; , sax vi 10 r t ; , S •'/<;:; 
w'spasst -nroXXa xaXa' QiXzi; aupet cpi~ 
lo'j; etXtfcp'tvstg , ot orroTot a' dqanrouv 



$tXs 



tgus cpsXou? rw-; i'yj* 



fltoXXv.v uwoXrj'l'iv , irXr,v S'h \jA odd- 
vcjv , »al aYX7v5> va cruvsupiflouv xat 
oXtyats '<ptXat?' ti $k 4 avj ?) ifyxh jw 
©flfctVcTai taaav epviiua. 

' Evvotx coo, Qs'Xct; svpei xiat yyto~r 
x=;. Sappst; w£>; &tue&3 JtaXo'^c-pot ^ 
xct- £oujxev ei; rnv y.ova£''av , avoy.-M 
xt' 6'Xa; jxiav ■jvoX'/rttfoav.. si vat ve'ocpep- 
p.s'vyj Y.cr\ tt,v Go?jy.oc£op.£v oXot cXitx, to 
■77v.tiju.3c-r,;, TTJv xaXr.v ttg; avaTpocp/jv, 



Elvat xcfl wpai'a ; 

"Ojk to<tov , x«,-a tout© £iv vj- 
froxipzl' 'h MpatOTY]; ^sv si-vat to itpo- 
TspYiaa ty!; 3 irXviv <^sv stvat aa^r/iaV 
to -nrpc'soirov txs utaXt^a stvat euaps<rcv. 

Auto <^sv \j.z <p8avsij a^eX©£. Trpi- 
irst p,t-a •pvatxa , <^ta va vrm svts- 
Xr,; , va evo'v'/j xai to •jcvsVju.x xal ty;v 
siaopcpixv' e^st^ri et; touto to teX'su- 
ratov TipoTspYij/.a, <ruvi'caT«i xaTa tvv 
■vvwar.v y.ou, oXn r, custa tou JUnXuxoi 
-yayou?; 

Asv ojAtXet; cb; cppovtw.ee, rap a &>$ 
vie;. eXaopop.uaXo?' 6>; toVov £Xa y,a£u, 
x.a»! enrav txv 1$y& Ss'Xs-ts xptvai. H 
/apt? t5)v Xo'^tov iro^-a^coax arrb ty,v 
xaXoauvYiV tv}* $ux*i?"» &** TW[ xeXait 
TviTa toO voo; * ^tv&Txt cFU^va 50X10" 
p.o; tou Gtop.aTO;. 



(1) Long Words in English , as in Greek , have necessarily two 
strongly accented Syllables. I shall , as in Greek , mark only the 
more prominent of the ty/o. 



i45 



in. 

Heartily welcome , Friend : pray 
walk in. 

1 salute you. ( the English never 
use such an expression , but , 
always, instead, employ some 
specific salutation ; as, Good 
day , I'm glad to see you , 
I hope I see you well. ) 

Sit down. Boy , bring the Gentle- 
man a pipe, and tell your Mis- 
tress to send in cakes and Coffee. 

1 am delighted to see you. I've 
not exchang'd a word with 
you for several days. 

Do you bring us any News ? 

Shocking , a dreadful Business, 



r. 



What now 



r"> 



IV, 



Have you made the Bed, 

I have made it. ( Yes , Sir ). See 
Page 121 , § i4. 

Give me my Tobacco Bag , and 
bring me a light. 

With pleasure. 

This Tobacco's very strong 9 
where did you get ( buy ) it. 

Where I always get it. Is n't it 
good? 

It's good ; but I'm afraid'? will 
affect my head. 

And suppose it does ( should ) 
a little, that will do you no 
harm , as you are going im- 
mediately to bed. 

Bring me. a cup (glass) of water. 

Will you have wine also ( with it,) 

Ko : bring me rather a glass of 
spirits to mix with the water. 

As you please. 

Have you been to the Tailor. 

I have C Yes > Sir)- 

Has he finish' d my Goat? 



K«X<d? CipiSETS , <pl)« > KOTClflCffSTS 

2a? jratper*. 



KatKffETe. ITai^ta , (pspeti tt; vj-- 
•yevEia; tou i'va t£ijjhm6j« 3 ka\ £?7T:re 
ty5; y»upa$ va <rs''Xv) to rXuxo >cal rev 
xa^cpe. 

Xa:pou,ac va c«? t^ai, v/u to'exi? 
■yip-jpsct; ao ou osv aa; couur.cra. 

Ma; we'cete tiitcte ( x^ve'va ) v3ov; 
Tpcffcepi /.cd cpptxra repa"yjfc*T'a. 
Ti rcaXiv ; 

A. 
"E$-pto<s*s to xps££au ; 
To ^pcii«?a. 

Awes p.cu to xairvoi?c'j'YY l » xa ^ 
^>spe u.(a (pcotia. 

MsTa x,apas. 

Aut«5 6 y.aTrv&s eivat wcXXoe a<J>u?* 
ttou Tsv £7fVipe; ; 

"otto'j Tiv Tce'pvoi iravra" eHv eIW. 
xaXo; ^ 

K«ao; eivai, «Xwi <po(3e3aca ftKjitwf 
pi £aXiT{h 

"A; aa<; £aXttfri y.cfmaraxt* ds« 
ca; x.a|i.v£i y.7.)cov) e'ttekJ'ti SeXets we~ 
cei ( irXa^iacjci ) dp.E'ato;. 

<J>E'pE UAOL KCXiTZO. VEpO. 

Opt^ETE xat xpacri j 

Ox,'-" xaXXnjTEpa va jae (jJEpif; sva, 
-7TcTr ( pa!<.t pawcl, va to aia^artocra) u.e 
to vepo* 

"(>,Tt d-yarrixTE. 

'Eik^'ii et? toy pa^TYiv ; 

'E<TTi-i'a. 

'ivreXsicotfE to pouy^o p.ou; 



Not yet ; but lie says he'il bring 

it to morrow at noon. 

Bid you see it ? What does it want. 

He has not yet put on the buttons, 

nor are the button holes made. 

(There's no believing the. fellow ). 

The fellow's all falsehood. He 

had promis'd to finish it in 

three days , and a week has 

pass'd without his having yet 

brought ( come to bring ) it 

mc. What excuse did he make. 

He says , as usual, ( the old story ) 
that lie has not had time; there 
have been two festivals , and he 
has not been able to work con- 
stantly. 

Be it so ( Well , well ). Tell me : 
has the person [we were speak- 
ing of been ? 
J V horn do you mean. That Jew 
to whom you. owe Money. 

The same, to be sure. What other? 

Yes ; he has; and he waited some 
time f he went away out of 
humour, 

Burn him : hang Turn : so much 
as he has robb'd me of 
(made by me J with his exor- 
bitant usury ; but however , 
having once agreed ( passed 
my word J FIE give you the 
money to morrow , and you 
shall go and pay him. 

You'll do well. 

'Tis time I shou'd go to bed : light 
the night lamp, and take away 
the Candle. 

Good Night, (r) 



To elth; ; f{ Xs'iim''; 

xa.'. at QnlzioJi; Sh alvai )caawp.$vai..,v 
Auto? 6 dsvflpwicc-; 6'Xov 4 r£ ^^ £Tai "' 

Tfc't; r.uipai? , dhc/paun pfa'Jf&tfLx-' 
<^a ,~ x,%\ a»o'[xvj ^sv $X6e va pi to 
^pe'pip. Tc irpo'jpaaiv co r J ^uxs ^ 



A'yct to cjv£^(}tC[xevov , ttcu; £sy 
ctjrs xatpov* *^rav xal <5uo crx,o'Xat? f 
xxl ^ev' ^jjtrb'pso'e iravfa va iSVjXsot*. 



As' £vax. nV; {j.ou ,- r*X9e:v 5 Xs'^x* 
p.tvc; 5 

IIoTov Xete j txslvov tov *£$p!iTc;v 
ei; tov orcTov xps^celTe Trapa^e;. 

Au-ov , j3iSatx* d'xl woTov aXXov , 

MaXt^-a yJAQs , jtal ca? srrjoffixEive 
Jcaftwo'<r^li eop'av" e^u^s j&sGKdStt£«p'i£Yi > 
p.e'vc ?. 

<£ama va tov xxy'f &i ttayip vi 
xv/ifxvtG^/i' To<ya pi ex-Xs^e p.s tH 
^tacpspsv tou to U7?sp£oXuoV £7rei<H 
cp,co> eVjfiipuvYiaa p.td ^opa , aup'.cV 
ecu £t^u itapa<hc Hal &a m^ftif va 
T&tf TrXripuur.;. 



©& jcaasTe' xaXa. 
Twpx TrpsK-et va rXa^iaorw* faxfyi 
tb JcavT-Xi , xzl Traps. t6 ^oj; Sf©S 

KacXr, v'JKra ca;, 



(i) I here relinquish Mons. r David's Dialogues for several reasons^ 
and , among others , because the* Phrases are generally too long, too 
political, and too marked with National prejudices and Antipathies r 
to be suited to an elementary Work like this, His Anti-Angiacaitf 



1 Mr Lady. 

P. What is it? (What's the matter.) 

L A Visit. 

P. Fresh congratulations ? 

I. Yes , My Lady. 

P. Did n' t ( i ) I tell you, I wou'd n't 
see any one to day. 

I. Six are gorie away , but the 
seventh wont go. 

P. And who may he be ? 

I." Sir W. Arnold, 

P, Precisely the Man that annoys 
me beyond every other : beg 
him to excuse me , as I'm 
engaged , and cant see tym 
to day. 

I. Yes my Lady, 



PHRASES FRO^ PAMELA"? 

PAMELA AttD ISAAC, 

I. MtXe<W: 



*4? 



II. Tt eivai J 

I. Mia iisia-AvUq} 

II. IfxXiv x at ? £ ' rtQr f' c ^ 5 

I. Nat. Mt/.e^i 

II. Ac'v cot (a) eirca on <Piu,jp&v (H\) 
fls'Xw va &v/Qo> xxve'va ; 

I. "E£yj ga-u-j-avj 6 e'Sd'0^05 <?sv (SeXs; v« 

avax^P^^?* 

II. Kai 74's eivai aura's ; 

I. 'O I1T7V6U5 E?V0X<?, 

II. Exitvo? jxaXt^a , ottou p, evoxXst 
urrsp >:a8e aXXcv. Eirts tou va as 
cufATraOricri , <^taTi i'xw CwHiJlaiii 
tTveO a' c'u.tc &<%Et . xai a?3|6spov ^i» 

r,j}/r?G(>S va tqv (jTJs^exOco, 



IOED B. AND SIR. W. A, 



W. Well met. 

B. Stay, , 

W- Eh ! let me go : L:d Arthur 

does not alarm me. 
15. Tell me plainly. 
W. I neither want courage spirit 

nor dexterity. » 

B; Answer. 



E: KaXri avrauoats. 

B. Sraorea. 

E. E ? a<|e? as va u^a^to. *Q 'Aprolijj 

^ev pis gq(3i£s«, 
B. EtTTs [xou eiXtxpivcos i . ', . . 
E„ Asv p.ou XtiTrei p.r,T3 xap^ix, Orifts 

B, *Ai?Gscp(Qr,Ti; 



Spleen could be very advantageously answered, if it were at all 
worthy oLan Answer. I have much too high an opinion of the 
Author to think he would in a second Edition repeat it. He wrot* 
in haste , and seemingly in anger , and he wrote in Greece s at 
a very critical moment , though he published in Paris. This may 
excuse him ; but would not excuse my re-echo , whieh could do 
him no honor. Even if competent instead of attempting additional 
Dialogues of my own, I should prefer offering, as I shall, the" Greek 
Language of Greeks , short Phrases from two Comedies, the last, 
Ivloliere's Avare translated by OEconomiis. The few Phrases of a Ser- 
vant , at the close , I have selected for the purpose of giving some 
Idea of the great irregularity of the Vulgar in spelling. 

(1) Pronounced didunt, woudunt, 

[a) The Genitive would he more in conformity with present usage. 



i48 

"VT. I who have travelled. 
B. Answer me. 



B. Awcxgt8v5Tt jiei. 
W. What would you wish me to E. Etc tJ 8 £ 'Xec? va cc\ **ox«te.s 

answer ? 
What I asked. 



B. Etc o, ti ae epcaTr'aw. 

LORD B. AND HIS SISTER. 



B. I had better speak to Lady B: 
she will communicate to Sir W; 
in my Name what I intended 
to say to him. 

M. My Lord , may I come in ? 
B. Walk in. 

M. Are you willing we should have 

a little conversation to day ? 

B. Yes ; indeed , I want to have 

some talk with you. 
M. You seem discomposed. 
B. With reason. 
M. I feel for you( I enter into your 
feelings ) Pamela seems, from 
the moment she changed situa- 
tion , inclined to change her 
manner also. 
B. What reason have you to speak 

to her disadvantage ? 
M. Sir W has made me acquainted 

with every thing. 
B. Sir W is a blockhead. 
ST. My Nephew is not to be thus 

contemptuously treated. 
B. My Wife must be treated more 

respectfully. 
M, If you do not keep her within 
prgper bounds , you'll find 
her a Woman like the rest 
of us. 
B. Her conduct is in no way 

blarnable. 
M. Pru lent Women allow no room 

for suspicion, 
B, What suspicion can any one 
have of her? 



B. itaXXwepx vec cuiXraju pk tw 
MtXe^ri Aaiipro/. Aut^ fle'Xet ' Aver 
9=pip e£ evo^aTc'? p,cu tiq ifo 
KapaXtc'fvjv ra caa dyjx. •popm 
va ?£> ei7ra) e-v^* 

M. MtXop^e, ^a) rr ( v a'thiav va &ta> r 

B. 'liXOe. 

M. 'A-yaira; cvifxepsv va auvejxiX^ffu- 

B. Nat , paXi?a ty® xpeiav va fyr 

Xrlffto p.a^Yj (joy. 

M. MoO ^aivecrai' ffUYXUffftevOf. 

E. Me £i'xatov. 

M. 2e ffUfAwaes. H ? Hap.&« , a/ 
oo r'XXai-g xaraVaaiv , ^aiverai 
6'tc 0eXet / aXXa^ xat to yM;: 



B. Xlo'av atTtav e%£is £ia vie trW 
«fca0aXv>« ; 

M. O Ka|5aXu'pvj; {/ ewXvipo^opvjcsV 

ei; ra ivavta. 
B. O KejjaXis'pvji; eTvai p.fc>po'$. 
M. O eve<|i:o$ jaou £ev wpfe'wit va 

xaTacppovrirat cutwij. 
B. Ttjv pvaixa'^ou Kpixzi v« ttjv 

TtfAOTS. 

M Av <5*£v tav xpannGr); ei£ ri xa- 
e^xov , etvat. xat auryj -pv?) xar 
6cb; xa) aX Xoiuac, 

B. H ^la-yo'p tios ^ev cftcu &\<mm* 

tvi'YopstiSj. 
M. At cpso'vtp,o; ^watxe; «Jej» <ft£doj>. 

atTtav Qtto$ia$. 
B. Ilofav Oira^iav viiiwcpsl Tiva; \fs 



$t She is too intimate witli Lord M. 

Arthur. 
8. Lord Arthur's my Friend. B. 

M. Ah ! in such matters Friends M. 
have more in their power than 
Enemies. 

B. I know his Character, B. 

M. And might he not deceive you? M, 

B. You wish to rob me of my p«&ce B> 
of Mind. 

M. I am jealous of your honour. M. 

B. Have you any good reason to B. 
make me feel alarmed about 
my honor, 

M. Sir W told me. M. 

JBo Don*£ speak to me of Sir W. B. 
I have no opinion of bis pru- 
dence, nor d® I believe what 
lie says. 

M. Allow me to communicate an M. 
idea of my ov/n. 

B. Well! let's have it. B. 

M, Do you remember with what M< 
zeal and earnestness Lord 
Arthur dissuaded you from 
marrying Pamela. 

B. I do ; but what would you infer B. 
from the dissuasions of my 
excellent Friend. Were they 
not well founded. 

M. Brother, Lord Arthur 's Arga- ivl. 
ments might have done very well 
elsewhere. But in London a 
ISobleman loses nothing hj 
marrying a pennyless Girl, if 
oi reputable character. I was 
not incensed against her , on 
account of her supposed mean- 
ness of condition ; but was 
displeased solely with that 
lurking ambition, which I fancy 
I see in her. Lord Arthur , 
not being related to us, could 



149 

"E/ji -jrctpi ttgXu Sacpo? pi tq^ 

JVUXo'p^ov Aproup. 
C MtXcp^-c; 'Aprcup eivat (ptXog 

fxoy. 

E, ei? *apou.ota -rcpa^para q! 

<piXot ^livavrai rcsptaffo'teppv <xt:6 

toa>$ i^Spou?. 
TvoptCco tgv ^apsoir^pa TOU. 

Asv >5u.7ropcua=c va a.-na-^f,; ; 
2u £*ite!$ va pi xapv/is va yjia& 

ttiv Y,a'jyjav p.co. 

IMe tcovsi <5\a tyiv Ttp-Tflv ffou. 
'E^ei; )cav£va inQavov Xo'-ycv <^ta 

vi [is xap.vis va c^cpri8a> tS'ta tt ( v 

TIU.W p.OU J 

O Ka^aXisp7)c p°3 eiotsv . . .-♦-. 

M'fl pou avacpe'pvi; riv KaSaXts* 
pvjv" <5"£v eya> et; xap,p.tav uwo- 
Xr,ytv t« eppovr'aara tcu, x.ai ^ev 
Tbt^cuo e-i? tcu; Xc'-ycu; tcj. 
Na coy Etirtb sva g-o/aap,dv, ©ttou 

Nal, EiTcs acu tov. 

'Ev6yp,siaat pi Tro'cr.v (T^cy^riv , 
/.at pi 7to'g7,v £uvap.tv 6 MtXo'p- 
(S'o? 'Aprcup <Ji E-rrapa/.tvEt va art 
vum.^su8t[)5 TTiv liajteXav ; 

Nai to Ev6yp.cyp.ai. AXXa rt <jyp.- 
weoatvsis a.7ro tou; dwveTpEMTtxoys 
Xo'you; too KaX.au p.ou oiXcu ; Asv 
ri<>av dpa ^e OipsXiwas'voi sis to 
otxaiov ; 

'AeSVA'js pou, ol Xc'vct tou 'Aprcip 
■ripiropoyeav va rvat ^p-nctpci ei; 
aXXov ts'ttov. Ec; TW Aov^pav 
eva; KapaXu'sr,; <5iv yjhti t:~c- 
te; , av vjixcpsuOy; piav 'Kxiayr^ , 
aXXa Ttar ( i/.svviv >co'pr,v. Eyco ^ev 
•ftyavaKTOUv y.ar' aurru <^ia ttiv 
6-iPOTt9ep.svviv eyjiXstav rfi; tux*)? 
tyi? , ap/r) eXowoufMiv iv.ovcv cJ'ia 
exewiav T'/iv *pu77Tinv Jtsvo^c^tav , 
d-rrcD p.ol e^aivsw) va (BXetvo)- Etc 
auTW. O' Il'Ao'p^o; 'Aprcyp, w? 
U.Y1 ^x fJN ' xap.p.tav ou'Y'Yevsiav ps 



i5<* 

not enter into tliis. Indeed if 
we reflect on his earnestness 
then, and his intimacy now , 
we may believe that he per- 
suaded you to relinquish her 
from his desire to make her 
his own. 

B. You are exceedingly acute. 

M. Believe me I'm very seldom 
out ( mistaken. ). 

B. I hope for once you are. 

M. I hope I may be ; but I think 
Pm not. 



^iaa;, £h i^uvaro va QWS'fSfi ri 
toioutcv" p.acX'.ra ccv cc-ict.oQuu.lv 
rov rite Troflcv-TOU - , xai to -rrapov 
Gappo- , ry.Topvju.Z'j va Tcf^e-uoaw 
p.ev ou as erit&e va tyiv a^aTj?, 
<ha T/iv £"7rt8utjt,iav too va tyiv 
aTjoxrir.ar, afrro?, 

B„ O voi>5 ecu sfvat irapa ttoXu offlijj 

M. U\ri\ja£ p>ou 6- 1 cX/yai? (fopaTs 
a<pxXXw. 

B. 'Eatti^co on Teutvjv tyiv cpopav a- 
wara^ai. 

M. Tb eTTtOyixw, aXXa ^£y to TEt^eu©^ 



P. My Lord I am here at your n. 

command. 
B. A Style like this no longer suits B. 

the lips of a Wife. | 
P. Well then, my dear Husband, H. 

what are your Commands ? 
B. I have, determined on gratifying B. 

you. 
1*. Your whole study is to load me EL 

with favours and kindness. In 

what way are you now think- 
ing to afford me pleasure ? 
B. We will in two hours, set out B. 

for Lincolnshire. 
P. In two hours ! II. 

B. Yes, get every thing ready that B. 

you yourself may want , and 

leave the rest to Mad. e Jevre. 
P. Alas ! he thinks no longeF of IL 

my Father. ( Aside ) 
B. She is confused ; it seems to B. 

displease her. ( she does not 

seem pleased. ) ( Aside ) 
P. Mv/ Lord. ' XL 

B. You have changed your Mind B. 

about leaving Town 
P. I shall always do whatever II. 

you direct, (as you please. J 
B. She awakens my suspicions. B. 
P. I have n't courage to give H. 

him uneasiness 



Kuf :e , l£ob eijiai ibta tig rh$ 
7rpot.rTa'va< ecu. 

Autos OTpcnro: $h apu.o'£st ttXe'ov 
ei; roc yj.ily\ jxta; au^u^ou. 
Nat a^a-moTs k acu avep , ti $k 
icptic&iiq ; 
'AT?e^aai<ra' va at ey^apKptau. 

'(■OXyi cou •& ^povTij £ivat vx p.e 

i-nvop^-cV^cq oltzo eOep^soia; , xal 

^apira;. Et; ri ^oyjx(z<ta.\ TMpa, 

va, p.£ t\>xoL^cr,cr,q' ; 
Msta (Jyo &pa- 6iXo.fjt.av Vjuiaeuait 

<5\a ttov KovTe'av rou AivxoXv* 
Met a £uo wpac; 
Nat, £Toip.acrov ra -rrpbc x?"^ a: ' v ^'-^ 

<ha c^e Ta Xotrca , cppcvTi£st -h Kupx 

Te'Ppvi. 

( Otp.ot I $£v evOuasTTat ttX^'cv tov 

•rraTspa p,ou. ) 

( li/pa^TOi* 9^ v£ "*& oti ?^V 

£ucaps<r?.L ) 

Kupi£ . . „ o " 
Ficat ^.ETavonafvw va d^ap; tt,y 
fto'Xiv ; 

©saw y.ap.-j) fravTOTE £, ti xatl 
av pi 7rpo<ra^T,c. 
( Me {S&Xe* ei; UTrc^'tav. ) 
( Ai'* -r&Xp.w vd tov papuy<i). } 



& Wtiat means this change. A 
few days back London dis- 
pleased you; and now yon have 
n't heart to leave it 

P. As you wish it should be so, 
let's go. 

B. I have no wish to go, unless 
merely to please you 

P. I am obiig'd to you for your 
kindness. 

B. I am quite perplexed at this 
coldness of yours 

P. Excuse me , my heart is ill at 
ease 

B. And why my Lady 

P. On my Father's account 

B. On your Father's account; Ay? 

P. Yes my Lord it would dis- 
tress me to leave him 

B, What can be wanting in my 
house that your Father can 
require 

P. While deprived of liberty , 
he feels he wants the best of 
tilings. 

B. His liberty is deferred for the 
moment. 

p. I know it very well. 

13. Who told you 

P. Lord Arthur 

B. Have you been talking with 
Lord Arthur ? 

P. Yes my Lord 

B. Who was present 

P. ]Vo one. 

B. No one ? 

y. On the subject of my Father, 
it was requisite that our con- 
versation should be private. 

B, ( She's right ) aside 



i5i 

B. TlZJ.lkQ,, Tl X9UV3V stvsMi touto ; 

e^uo;*f€5ou<i£, T<6pa (?£y as £a" 

era -h x%?&ix v« t/jv &ipriGr,<; ° 3 

!J. Eirstff^ depsaxat apt ( crcj , sa; (cc) 

ps; u,o'vov (J'ta vk <r£ su^apt^cca, 
II, Eiuxt UTTo'xp.sco; 545 t/iv /.aXoo6* 
viQv crou. 

acv. 
II. SuLtTcafeiae p.s l^o rw xxp<ftav 

jxci c«vox«pv;u.svy3v. 
£. Atari MtXe<% j 
IT. 'E£ at'tia; tou xaTpo's uoy, 
B. Ata tov ftatipa sou « ; 
IJ. Nat, MiXo'p^?" , jjflsXs ^ou »caxa» 

cpavT] va tov aepvicu. 
$. Ti %«-rrcpsT vx Xst'^ri ei's t3v ousm 

jaou £ia T* ^oetoj^Ti Toy -rra- 

too'; ff&y j 
IT. Tcu Xci7Tii t$ xaXfiTspov , et<p' cw 

to'u Xeiwst ii sXsuGea.'x. 

B. H eXeuQspta tou &ik t^v iao« 

dva.SocXXsrat. 
H. To r,yeupo> iteXXa xxXx. 
B. IloTo; <yoi to £ir:jN ; 
n. 'O MiXbg^o; 'aotouo. 
B, 'ftjAl'XlQCSS pi tov MiXo^ov 'Ap~ 

to'jo ; 
II. Nat, Kupte. 
B. nolo? tjtov Tvacvv j 
If. Kavs'va? ; 
B. Kavs'va? ; 
IL Ata TTiv uwo'ScCTtv T?3 srarpo's y.oii ? 

itpeirgi va "^iVcTat oiuXia {avci/.w^. 

B ("E^ai ^«cy, ) 



(a) Sou , ck; before the Verb more vernacular, and y I may say „ 
at present, more correet. 



P. Are you displeased at my* n 

having conversed with Lord 

Arthur ? 
B. No, I am not displeased. B.' 

P. He is the only Man I esteem , IL 

for I think him honourable and 

sincere. 
B Yes, he's a good Friend £• 

P. He is truly worthy of your II. 

Friendship he speaks nobly and 

with sincerity. He has all the 

characteristics of nobleness and 

( correct feeling ) 
B. ( She 's lavish in his praise ) B- 

aside 
P. He has great regard for my IL 

afflicted Father 
B. ( There's no harm , in her B- 

speaking well of him on that 

account. ) aside 
P. My dear Husband is n't it n. 

possible to relieve his mind ? 

B. Yes we'll set his mind at B- 

ease ? 
P. But when ? IL 

B. When ! When ! as soon as B. 

possible. 
P k He's easily discompos'd , how IL 

sorry I am for this little failing 

of his. 
^. Prepare yourself for our de- B- 

parture 
P. I am ready, whenever you n. 

please 
B. Tell Jevre to come here B. 

( hither. ) 
P. You shall be obeyed. II. 

B. Don't go, unless you like it. B. 

P. When with you, I cannot but n. 

be pleased. 
B, Shall we invite any company. B. 



2b 1 xaxo'fa'v^at on toatXYiffa u.2 
xcrv MtXop^ov 'Aprcup ; 

Ox,t? ^s'v p.ot (u.c. jagu) xattocpaivsrac' 
Eivat 6 jao'vos ap/ow, orrou Ttp.tb,. 
xa: jaou cpaivsfxt di-iocrEJ3a<70<; xxJ 

Nat, e'tvat xaXb; cp<Xo$. 
Etvat a^to? dXr,0tva tti;' cptXta^ 
oou. AaXet jcaXw; » xat ja£ etXi~ 
ttptveiay. E-/,et 6'Xa rot flrpoTSpinu.a* 
ra ty}; su-ye/etas , xal ^>tXc<ppo-' 
cuvvi;* 

( Tov e"YX.oip.tcxCet wapa -rtoXu- ) 

' Ey^st - jae^sXviv d-yaTrYiv «po$ ■ tov 

raXat-irtopov -rcare'pa jaou. 
( Av t3v eTwctvvi ^ta touto , edos 

(S'ev eivat -rcovripia. ) 

'A-yaTTViu.sMS jj.su avep, etvat <$"uva- 
tSv va jayiv T{i.7ropou|/.ev va 7-ov 
Ttapvi'yopviffcdfi.ev j 
Nat , 6i'Xoaev tqv irapn^opTisst. 

*AXXa tto'te; 

IIo'te Tro're' csov ra^^a r^airwe- 

«JWJX£V. 

( Zuy^u^era't euxaXcac' IIoctov jaoij 
x,ax.ocpatv5Tai tcuto t6 juxpov eXar- 
Tfa)lXa tou • 
ETOtjxaaou (ha va dva^tdpr'cwp.f.v^ 

*Eip,at erctju.vj orav Oe'Xv;;.- 

Eire tyjv 'ieSpviv va eX6?5 e£w« 

O ptajAo; cou*, 

A"v <^£V J/ cat. e'ux.apiCVi'AsvYi , [jx* 

eXO^. 
"O-rav eTjxat p.a£fl sou, $ev i5{mfg- 

pw va y;p,ai ita'pE? e&-/aptg7){/.5vy». 

©eXsi; va TCpoc/iaXsVoy;^ guv* 



P. As f*r as I am ccucerned, I 

care not for any 
B. Suppose we ask Lord Arthur. 

P. Lord A would be less dis- 
agreeable to me than any one 
else. 

B. Do you like the Society of 
Lord A. 

P. I have no wish for it; but if he, 
were with us , it wou'd n't be 
disagreeable to me ( it would 
in no way discompose me, 

B. ( She appears to me innocsnt 
Let me not suspect her ( aside 
For the present we will have 
no one. If you find it irk- 
some ( get tired ) we will re- 
turn to Town 

P. I am uneasy about my Father 

B, Talk to him. Assure him that 
I keep your wishes in view. Get 
ready for setting out.. 

P. I am ready, whenever you 
wish to set off. 



j53 

XI. "Ocov to xar' e(xe, £ev {/.s'Xst p.ot 

B- A? ^pccxaX$'cwixev tov MtXs'o^oiJ 

'a P t:u ? ; 
IL O' MtXo'fch; 'ApTGup rOeXe (xs dV 

oape^via^ 6Xt^'a>Te?cv dnrb xaQs 

aXXc; • 
B. 'Aps'axsi est (a)-h c'JVTjo'f'a Toj3 

MtXo'c^cu ; 
IL Aev TYiv £-rri3ya5> , aXX' av $tov , 

<5"sv rlSs/.e act ^apu<pavvi. 



B- ( Ms cpaivsrat aOwa. M« tyiv' 
PaXXouev etg uirc^tav. ) Ata tvjv 
wpav £sv OeXsi eXSfi xavEvets- "Av 
PafeG^, es'Xoitev iw.sptyzi ilq tviv 
IlaXtv. 

II. IIcvco <ha Tiv Trar^fa u.cu« 

B- 'OpXviasTO'j, peoattoasTOv o-t e'xw 

irpo ocpQaXp.oiv tg'v ^g'6cv coo xas 

rev t^txov Toy. 'ETOtixacou £ta tov 

fAr,csuaov^.a.;. 
IT. ©e'Xo> elp.ai. eTOtavi otav. O^cr? 

va dv-xx^pTiccofjuv. 



PHRASES FROM THE AVARE. 



EXENTAVELONES, (i) 

ZQITZA. (2) AND CLEANTHES. 

In conversation at the back of 
the stage. 

E. ( thinking himself alone conti- 
nues.) I riont know that I have 
done right in burying in my gar- 
den the twenty five thousand 
piastres they brought me yester- 
day. My Gardener is careless 
enough, and never goes into the 
garden, unless 1 drag him there 
withme Somuch the better. Ne- 



E^vTao£X(.ovTQ? ? Zwr'r^ xal JQsav%)5 

( cuvojjuXcuvte; etc to eaurepov 

TOO GsaTfG'J )° 

E, (voiu^wv ort £ivaipt,ovo? s^axcXouOsT) 
Aev e^cupto cu.w? av s*y<y sxap.a, JtaVa 

*■ tt' E^WCTiC St.; TO TTEOtooXl p„0t> Tat? 

ety.oct7r='vT£ y^Xtao^s; "Ypoaaa 3ca0a>? 
p.ou Tobcpav I^Qe'?- O rap^oXapYis 
p.cu etvat dpxsTa cLu,eXy;; xal <5"ev 

TCOTfEt '? TO TTSpSoAt CXV <Kv TOVS 
G'JOCD {/.OT^t JAO'J. To'g-o) jcaXniTEpa. 
M' oXov tc/Uto £UocriTr£VTe y^Xtscch; 



(1) Sixty Needles, Pinhunter 

(2) Diminutive of Zwn\ 



6kinfli: 



i54 

ver the less, twenty live thousand 
piastres is a considerable sum 
for any one to keep about him. 
(He sees Cleanthes and Zoitza ; 
hush ) Hola ! I shall betray 
myself! My warmth has de- 
prived me of my wits . I 
thought I was alone, and was 
making my calculations aloud. 
( To Cleanthes and Zoitza. ) 
Hola! what's the matter? 
€. Nothing , Father. 
E. Have you been long here ? 
C. We are just come. 
E„ Did you hear ? 
€. What Father ? 
E. Here , now. ...» 
C. What? 

E. What I was saying. 
K. No! 
E. Assuredly ( You did ! you 

did! ) 
Z. Excuse me. 

E„ I see you heard something. 
I was saying to myself how 
difficult a thing it is now a-days 
for any one' to meet with 
money, and was saying happy's 
the Man that has twenty five 
thousand piastres about him ! 
K. We did n't venture to ap- 
proach you , lest we should 
interrupt your calculations. 
E. I have done well to tell you 
all , that you may not mistake 
the matter , and imagine that 
I was speaking of myself, that 
I forsooth had twenty five 
thousand piastres about me. 
K. We never meddle with your 

affairs. 
E. I wish I had them ! twenty 
five thousand piastres ! ! ! ! 

K. I dont believe thai 

E. That would be a glorious thing 
for me. 



«YjJo'ciffa, v'« va $a£fc xavs?<j fi.avC( 
tcuj eivai (xta ttoctotyi; apxeTa* • • » 
( pXsrcst rev KXeavfrnv xal Ttfv 
Zwtivfrxv' ot^a ) AtSot ♦ 'At^c p.ov 
01 ya wf o£o0a> ! O* 6u[ib$ (xou 'wtipe 
tov vaiv ! @ap£<&<?a tto>$ elji.au fie-* 
vc; ftou x' eXo^apia^a &{>«• ( IXfiy 
xiv KXeav&nv x*l tw ZamrCaN ) 
E" ! ti elvou J 



K.. TiiroTe Trot-rep fui'j - 

E» Ei<j8s ttoXXtiv wpav e£$J 

K- Tcopa or' iiASa^ev* 

j£. H)co6ffar?. • • • • » 

K. Ti Harsp p.ou : 

E. 'EcSVo, Trepa » • • " 

K. Tl; 

E- "Oca eX^a. 

k. "oxt! 

E- 'E^a~avvo? ' £i-aivav7o<; ! 

Z. Me euu-rraSaTS '• 

E- 'E-^co ^Ae'-nrca , 6'ti Tkeuaare x^rj 
Tt. fifuXeuca pi tov ept,auTo'v {icy s 
-reo'ffov eJuaxoXov sivat va eufvi x&e 
vcT; aa-nrpa rriv <rr,u,spov. &ai e'X«« 
-ya' KaXoTuxc? , oeri; £'x a ttxoatT 

W6VT6 X'^ao £S 7p9<JflF* H$~|* T0U ? 

K« K* ^aei? t^sv EToXu.O'j<raas; va «a$ 
-rcXr.-siaaafxev , {atiww? J'laxo'tj'wfuv 
T&i>; Xo^aptacp^ou^ era?. 

E* E f 'xap.a xaXa , xai <?«? ,ra eiira, 
p'Xa, ixr.-rroj; &xa?£T6 '£avcfcpocpa to 
Trpsq-fxa, xac cpavTaaOyj-rs? qti eXe- 
yz <ha t6v sp.a'JTo'v p.o'J, on t«x* 
e'X<j> jxaT'Ct (aou tixocu^TS "^iXus^s? 
-vso'craa. 

K.. 'Hjact; ^»v ep^ocCvofxsv tt£ tc<; 
uTro0?a:£'.; oa$. 

E. "Asatcots va toc Etxa ! Ebcoatftsyre 
viXt^*5 700'GGa! ! •' ' 

1C- 'E-/w ^b -n;t<r='^ ^'- • * • • 

E- Tsuto -flTCv iToXXa xfeX'n ^cuXetflj 
-yta '[is'v* • 



K- Eat the?* it* things. - . - K. 

1^ For I am in great want of E. 
3I6ne". 

K. I think.. .. K, 

E. I should be quite at esse if I had j;, 
them. 

K. Yon are. ... K- 

£. And I should not complain E- 
as I do cf the hardness of 
the times. 

For Heaven's sake ! my dear K- 
Father , there 's no room for 
--our complaining of the times ! 
All know that you are rich 
enough ! 

E. How ? I rich enough ? All E- 
1? say so are liars ? A 
greater falsehood can't be. All 
who spread such reports about 
me are mischievous Yarlets. 
: il disposed. ) 
Dan't he angry. Z. 

E. Ah ! it drives me mad. My E- 
vn children betray me , and 
become my enemies. 

K And is every one your enemy K 
that c::ys you are rich ? 

E. Yes ! These reports of yours , E- 
your extravagance will 
be the cause of my ruin , 
( being betrayed ) or of their 
coming at night , and cutting 
my throat, ( haad off) thinking 
me made up of Florins. 



Aura S'x ewok •Kpjqp.xza. . « . « 
K iyjj itoXXr,? ecvcfyutv a~o acrrfsJ 

*Eya <r:7x^cy.at. .... 
' HO =Xa s I a a : rt $XXa fa ax ski y, U c ; s 

T ! 

av -x t:/y. • 

KcC: cil; E?or&e ..... 
K*l ^iv r,9ilx va x}.xio)!i.x'. , 34*- 
Qla; xaavo , yx tov xa-.piv , cr; 
civ a: ijoXXa ^j^y^x; • 

Av a-ya-ra; tou Gsov ! Ks)i ITaTr- 
reason , ^cv «vci. Toy to'ttcv tou va 
xXa-isSs a~; £:a rev xa'.oov ! "OXot 
to '£eup6UYj ort evSTc ttX'vUtc-v a;- 
*etc*! 

IKk ; 'E^-cb ev/j ttXgutcv apxsTo'vj 
"Oaci to >.s'-;;jv tlv?-. i^sv^at ! 3k- 
faXpTspov $£U[&a ^sv euttc:-:: va 
•yew. KaawTpairoe elyou oqct Sixa- 
tccioow Tsroia Xvyia fia t' eaeva. 

M? oi 8'jptc'vsTe ■ 
"A ■ tcutq as ^aiuov&st. Ta (<^'.a 
u.cj rexva va ui Trccc3 v :c^cuv ? xai 
vi ■yivcwreu ix®? i gtou< 

• Kal iyfj?6? ca; eiva;, c^--.; Xe^eip 

0T1 EXBTS ^XC'JTCV; 

ZNa-sxs ' Autoe ecu Ta J.o'y.a x.x\ 
Ta ;;:ji orou 6e va ^aOouv av?!3 

va [is -rroo^coccjv vj va e*X- 

6:jv tw vjxto. va usu xoicuv to 
xs9aXt , votct^evre; ae ffaxxj "Vii'.a- 
t&v (jpXaoi. 



SYESTAVZLOrfES A>'D ZOITZA. 



E. There , so much for our lady 
like beans ( Dandies ) they have 
no more strength than a gar- 
den stick. There my child. 
s what I have decided on 
for myself. For your Brother, 
I have fix'd on a "Widow , 



E. Tux '$k Ta Capuptxa v afxcvTcTsf/.s. 
Eivat fioa xxt\ ^uvara lax its nx~ 
Aouxia. Et& ^a xo'pr, jjtou. TouVo x~i- 
^acica, £tx tov eaauTo'v ptcu. Aia Tcy 
a^EA^c'v cou £^'.a/.2;a p.vav xa-ctav 
^T,5av , Tree! tx; c'rrcta; u.e 'a'Xr.aav 



i5o 

they were talking to me about 
this morning , and I'll many 
you to M r , i*. 

2. To M.rB. 

E. Yes! a shrew J, prudent, mid- 
dle aged Man ! he's hardly 
fifty. Every body 's loud about 
his Wealth 

Z. I'd rather not marry, if you 
please Papa. 

£. And I my child, my sweet, 
my darling had rather, if you 
please , marry you 

Z. I beg you'll excuse me Papa 

£. I beg you'll excuse me, my 
child. 

2. I am Mr. B's most humble 
Servant. If however it be 
the same to you ( With your 
leave however) curtsies, I'll not 
have him. 

E. I am yours most humbly ; but 
( bows ) with your leave you 
shall have him, this very e- 



Z. This E- 



srenmg 



E. This Evenii 

Z. ( curtsying ) that can't be Papa 

E, ( bowing ) that shall be, my 

child. 
2. No! 
K. Yes ! 
2. No, I say 
E. Yes I say. 
Z. On this point you will not 

force me. 
E, On this point I will force you 

2. I'd rather die ( kill myself ) 
than have him for a husband 

Jl. You shall not dip, and you 
•shall have him. Did you ever 
see such insolence ? Bit! any 
one ever see a child talk in 
this way to her Father ? 



J ixxv$pl§to fie r'av xupix^viv Bap£a> 
Xa[AT0UjU.7rav. 

Z. Me rov xupiT£nvB^£aXa{A7rouf/.irav; 
E. Na(<j*s I A vSpwrrov -snXw.tofi.Evov> y-ou 

cfipdvi^.ov , xal 'ptixrao'v • Mo'Xt; e^ei 

tou; TCevrivTa. Ta wXcvtyi tou ^a 

oAot ice 9Y)p.i^cuv. 
Z. E'^w, Tvdrep p.co, $h urav^peuoaau 

av eivat dptcjAo; ca;. 
E. Kat ''yw , x-o'prj jxcu , xo>v/.fc>vd pou f 

yacWfjisV/i poo , 0e va as Vav^ps^co , 

av eivat optcrjj.es oa?, 
Z. 2a; £yit£> cu'YX," l ? y i <Itv ■> iraTspp.ou* 
jE. 2a; £/jto> <Ju^x«p7)Giv , jco'py) pou 1 

Z. Elfxai Ta7r£ivo-rarvi £guXyi tcu Bap£a° 
Xap.7vo6{X7va."O k u.cd? — (xau.vei cyji~ 
p,a TrpocrJcuvTioecoi;) ae tyjv ac^stav ca? 
t^ev Se'Xw tcv ewagsiv. 

E. Etaat TairsivoTfltTO^ £ouXg<; aa?. *»-*• 
"Op.ti)? ( zafivst xat wires oyr>[ 1 - rL ) 

pi tyiv a^etso oa; > 0e va tov eirapvi; 

Z. *AivoiJ/e : 

E. 'Awo'ijiei 

Z. ( Kauvoycxa g'/tiM. ). Tooro £sv -p 

\erai ivdTSp p,ou. 
E. ( xaavcov »ai auTo 1 ; cyjip.a ). Toutc 

8s va ^ivy) Jw'pY) pou ' 

z."o r J 

E. Naujxs ! 

Z. o-yscrjes , aa; Xc'f to.' 

E. NafycG&s > oa; Xs'^'co. 

Z. Et; to'jto to rcpa-yaa o sv fliXsre ft* 

Kva^Jtaastv. 
E. Et; touto to irpa-/iJt.a fls va ca; 

dva'yx.aacD. 
Z. ZxoTo'vopat xaXr.repa , xapa vx 

'-rjapw TOicuTou avapa. 
E. Asv ax-OTo'veaai , xai tov &-rracpsi;. ; 

Fta 'c^s? d^tavrpoivia ! £tc?£ xcW 

X7.V£l? JCOpJT^t va 'puXYJ TOlCUTOTpOWtd? 

tov watspa xcu ; 



2, And did ever any body se« 
a Father marry his Daughter 
in such a way ? 

£, It's an excellent match. N6- 
body can find fault with it. 
I'll engage, all the world will 
commend my Choice. 

Z. And I'll engage that no one 
in his senses will commend it. 

E. ( seeing Demetrius at a dis- 
tance ) There's Demetrius ! are 
you willing we should make 
him our judge. 

Z. With all my heart. 

E. Will you abide by his judg- 
ment. 

Z. Gladly ! I'll abide by whatever 
he may say. 

S. Tis settled. 



SS7 

2. K* e!c?e itork Kdve't? war spa, , va 

'frav^t'Sip TOiOUTOTpOTTCd; tw xo' d 

pnv tou-; 

E. To pspo? sTvat TtoXXa jcxXc'v. Terrors 
^"ev Ij^ftt vd VJj Jtavet?. 2toi-/yj|ao, 
€d\>eo , #Xo? 6 xo'cp,o; 81 va "rtaivsav) 
Tflv exXc-p |j.cu. 

2. K' s-jfcl) s-cr/r.aa (3dv<i> , ore fcdvst? 
cppo'viao; <^sv fie'Xst t*/)v &7ratvs<rsiv. 

E. ( SAc'tfmv tov AtiuYjTpaxviv d-rco JAO." 
xpcrt ). Nd 6 AY)^.y!Tpdi4Yi? ! Oe'Xet; vod 
•rove >td k u.o)p.QV y.piTviv jx,x; ; 

Z. Zrep^w. 

E. As^eca*. tyjv Kp'atv tcu ; 

Z. Mara x*p«S ' eu^api^ayjiai £t? o,rt 

etTvf . 
E. TeXetworel 



Demetrius Exentavelones akd Zoitza, 



E. Come here Demetrius ! we 
have chosen you to decide 
which of us two is right, I or 
my Daughter. 

D. Your honor no doubt. 

E. Do you know what we are 
debating about. 

D. No; but your honour can't 
be wrong, for you are justice 
itself. 

E. I wish to marry her this e- 
vening to a steady, rich husband 
And this madcap gipsy has been 
telling me to my face that she 
despises him , and wont have 
him. What think you ? What 
say you ? 

D. What do I say ? 

E. Yes ! 

D. Humph. ! Humph ! 

E. What ? 



E. 'EXa '$& Anforrpaxn ' ff' e<hdXe'£au.stf 
vd icptvip? vie, ck-no rou<; &\id [iz; iyj-i 
^(xxtov , e-ya) , r, r, xo'pv) p.cu. 

A. II suyevia ca; , AuQs'vra. ' xwp^ 

dj^oXiav ! 
E. -Eljsupei; -rcspi tiv&s elvac 0X6*^0? jxa^ 

A, 'OvV tcXtiv V] su-yevia ex? ^ev eairo- 
peiTS va e^'/its athjcov , rS'isTi eia9s 

E. 'Aitttys 82XM va rr.v UTrav^ps'^6) p.' 
evav' av8p.co7rov /sat (ppo'vtpov x.cd 

r.Xouctov iv rauTM. Kiaurfl "h (rp-'-fXa, 
^ Top'p'va, p,l TW77S jcarx Trpo'cro)- 

7T0V , OTl TOV Jt«Ta?ppOV£t, Xai $SV 

tov liraipei. Ti ce <patverat j T4 

Xejsic ; 
A. Ti Xs^to J 
E. Nal ! 

A.E w !e? 
E. Ti ; 



»S8 

D. I say that, in the main, 

I am of your opinion for your 
honor cant be but right ; but 
the young Lady , however is ? 
not altogether wrong; for.... 

£. How ? Mr. B is a man of 
great worth. He's a Stran- 
ger it's true; but he's of good 
family, respected, mild and a- 
miable, and in good circum- 
stances. He has no children 
by his first marriage. He had, 
as he says, two, but they were 
murdered together with his 
wife while on one of his Jour- 
nies. Whom could she meet 
with better; 

D, True I but the young luadj 
may say, that you are a little 
hasty in the Business ; and that 
a little time is requisite, that 
she may see whether their 
dispositions suit, 

E> Humph ! this is a chance that 
any one ought to catch at with 
open arms. I am here of- 
fered an advantage that I shall 
never again meet with. The 
Mans to take her without 
Dower. 

D. Without Dower? (fortune), (i) 

E. Without fortune. 

B. Oh ! Then I have nothing 
more to say. There indeed; 
that's an argument that at once 
convinces me 

Ec And as for me! it is a con- 
siderable saving for me ! 

D. Assuredly ! the matter don't 
admit of ( is past ) contradic- 
tion. The young Lady indeed 



rr.v •yvwti.Tiv <ra;' i-^v^r.-h EU'ye.vta gx; 
^ev ejxwopeiTS va p.T|v zynre «?ixaic<^ 
OU.W? — scat aurr, r, xa-tj/o'jXa <?:>» 
t/ti oXcv to a^txov. ETretcJ'Yi. 
E. IIco;; O gupitTfl? Bap^aXaiATvcytt- x, 
eivai av8po)7rog d^io'Xc-jo; ' Ss'voc elvat 
dXriOiva, eivat 6'u.ai; Eti-jEvr^j 7;iOQp,svo;) 
"jfXuxo;, r'aspo; , xal ircXXa y.oj3e&<*/r 
ju.s've;. A it 6 tov 7vp&70v tou ^«u.oV 
£ev e^si 7£*va. AOu ei^s > xa6o; 
X^ii , y.oX row Ttvqwav v ua^i p.i 
TTiV *p va tX3C T0 ' J 1 £ i; ^ a T&u T ~- 
^El^t. II&IOV SXXoV £{Jt.T;0feT &J7T1 VflC 

e3pT) xaXiiTeoov j 



A. AXvjSiva • IlXr,y ^ x'oxxava 'jMrepst 
vaoa? £i7r?j, ort *(Jav v.a .pia^f 
©Xfysv 7a i7psc-j'u.a7a" xac or* yjieia- 
&TCLi o)Jrpq xaipo? va tVKi xai autr 3 
av ri y.Xtoi? tv); sty.TTopsI va 'ratpetacwj 



p.£7GV.. .. ■ 

E. E"! AU77) elvat (*{a eyxatpia, t*jv 
<57rc ; iav wpe'iret JCavEts va 7>)v dcJ'pa^n 
pi 7a <SVo 7cu x s 'f '•#• 'E-ycd £upi<;x*> 
£(S"u tuav £U7U)(,iav, 7r,v circ'av aXX«*8 

TCU 7TC7£ c^EV 6e VCC 7^V eUpft). O «V 

flotowe; rr,v ETraiosi vwpl; ^pclx.:*; 



A, Xwpl; Tvpcua ; 
E. Xcapt; -rcpoTxa ! 

A. £}" ! E<Su 77AS0V £s? 4/0 717TC 

eitco). BXeure7S <$a ; Na sva; 



: v* 



E. Kiajlu-s ' toIjto "yva t' dalva Eivai 

xajx^can oiJtovoata! 
A. Be P a.i3Ta7a ! To Ttpavaa (^i'v sr.iJ'i - 

X&70'. av7tXo , y.'av. , A>.Yi6iva,r) xc'py) ca; 

ep.7Tcp£i va ca; &v6'J k u.ia*/3 , 07!. 6 -•;»- 



(r) The former is the legal term, the latter more usual in con- 
versation.. 



?3ar remind you that marriage 
is a very delicate subject, and 
requires consideration: that one 
may thereby become happy 
cr miserable throughout life : 
that a union, that is to last 
for life should be form'd -u ith 
great care and circumspection. 

E: Without fortune! 

I). You 're right ! that settles all. 
I don't dispute the point. But 
some may say that in such 
cases one ought undoubtedly 
to consult the inclination of 
the Lady. And that great dif- 
ference of age, disposition and 
sentiments frequently exposes 
marriage to distressing vicissi- 
tudes, 

E. Without fortune! 

D. Humph ! You need not repeat. 
1 know all that. Who can pos- 
sibly resist. But some fathers 
■would think more of gratifying 
their daughters than of their 
pockets. They could not endure 
the sacrifice of their children 
to their own gain, but would 
rather endeavor by every other 
means to establish the union 
on the congenial sentiments of 
the parties ( espoused ) so as to 
preserve uninterrupted its ho- 
nor peace and joy , and. „ , 

E. Without fortune, 

D. True ! this stops every one's 
mouth. Without fortune. How 
can any one resist such an 
argument. 

E. ( looking towards his garden, 
hush ) Hark! I think I hear 
the dog bark. Perhaps they're 
after my Money ( to Demetrius ) 
Dont stir, Til be with you 
instantly. - 



uc<; eivxi TTfafua a&XXa 7u£/)Xcv ? 

XXI X? £lJ ^ £Ta « TTpOCOXY.v' OT» , U.3 

Tsjro •j.-xozil ik fivri xxv=T; euru- 

on, y.ix crjvTpcpix, -fir;; 0='Xii £tap-- 
xiaiiv p''x?* Osvx'rcu, irps'wet va, 
cuu^uvrirai p.l usyaXriV ffxr^w xal 
•^acaTTlcr.T'.v. 

£• Xoop I- Tvpotxa ! 

A-' Exsre ^txai-.v ! TcSto r« Xcr'?rrst 8Xa.' 
Ai\ era; avT-.7ixQu.at. 'E^TrcpoCv Sjwas 
tiv«5 va ca; ecrauv , cri ei? waso- 
p.o(x; Tresirxcs'.; , avaacpi^^toc wos- 
«sr y.ivtT? va Traparrjp'r; rr.v x-Xectv 
T?fc KoTriXa*. Kai , on *j p-s-yaXn 
£tx^op x rris 7jXix'x<; , xal tv;$ ^.^ 
0£C3u^ , xxi Tcbv cpovmy-aTtev xaiAvet 
rev -yap-cv va uws'xsitom iroXXax-.; etj 
GX«£ep« cypfk^xo'TX. 

E. Xwct; ttocTxx ! 

A. A' i £e l v xpJ'-a^rai va pi to '{-avxet- 
t^t£. To '?s'j;u ^oX>.a xxXa. ITo'cc 
^capoXo; Ep.irop=i va evxvTto>6vJ 5 
IlXrv , eivai xxurocxoi -jrarepsij t 
etnve; -poxp'vouv xxXr-cOX va eox cZ>i 
p(C«»v Tr.v x-Jpjv twv, ivxpa TW 
caxxcOXav :wv. Ol Ttco^TOi (5^v utto~ 
^s'pcuv v* 6'jcia^ouv tz ts'xvx to>v 
e«? to c£tov xt'ooo?' aXXi gnrfiShi 77s- 
ptoad-repcv aro ^rav aXXo rrpx-yjix , 
vx GeasXic'vwjTi to auvotxsVtov et; tv!v 
cK»«^pwvtav too av^popvou, yj 5«ot"« 
dta'fjXsTT^i d^taxowov tviv tiit/iv ? 
xstt tyjv £ip7ivy,v , xxi Tr ; v xafav tcj, 
X4I 7) eivoia. . . . 

E- Xwpl; TTfoTxft .' 

A. MaXs^a ! touto xAsUi xo <?£u.m x%» 
ftiVo;.- Xwpl; wpolx* ! II5>; v'«WT4- 
C<x9ti xivel; si; evx toioutov Xc'-yov ! 

E» ( x-J7Ta<^)y -?rpo5 to 7cepiPoV-r«»j 
cc-ycc )• A'l^cT ! MoO 9x^x1 v'axouo 
tcv uxuXXov vx -yau^T). IIx; xxl 
Treipal'cyv t ajTTSX ixoy ; ITpo; tov 
AttavrrpaV/iv ) M"/i c.".X?^.' Na tte 
x' e'fQxoa, 



x6o 

Exexitavelones , Demetrius , and 
Master John. 

J£. Come now Demetrius and lend 
me your assistance here. Hola 
Master John, I have left you 
till the very last. 

J. What's your pleasure. 

E, I am going to give an Enter- 
tainment this evening. 

J. Marvellously strange ! how's 
this. ( how now J. 

E Come tell me , will you give 
us good fare ( a good dinner 
or siipper. ) 

J. And why not, if you give me 
plenty of Money. 

E. What the deuce ! Nothing 
but Money. These Men talk of 
nothing else but Money ! Mo- 
ney ! Money ! Nothing runs in 
their heads but Money. 

B. Nor I , in my life did I ever 
hear so impertinent an answer. 
Humph ! A mighty art forsooth, 
to provide good fare with plenty 
of Money. This the veriest clown 
.would do. Nay our old Cat 
would do as much,, A good 
Cook should know how to 
give good fare for little Money! 

J. Good cheer for little Money ! 

D. Yes. 

J. Faith, I wish your honor would 
let me into this secret. Other- 
wise , take my place, tie on my 
Apron , and do Cook : you 
meddle (and make ) with every 
thing : you're like Garlic in 
every Dish. 

E. Peace ! What shall we want 
John. 



(l) Kup TtavvYK-. 
E. EXa To>pa » AY,ar}Tpa)aj , va \ki 
GorMay; £<$«• E" xvp I\avW] ! ecs'vtf 
g a.yr,xot. &Xov x,' u<tepa. 

F Tt *vt) cuptcmo'; <ja; ; 

E. 'E-fa), *op Ftavvn, 6s va xa|i.oi inotyt 

r° Mci'y^Xcy. 8a\i/.a I ttco? xrav aura ' 

j&. Ficc 7T£s ja£ 6s yx p.2; xap/ps jcaXa 

F- Mua apt, "ytctTt" <?a p.ol £oJ<re wouX- 
Xa "yptfeia. 

E. Ti ^iaScXo •' 6'Xo "ypo'aora. Tlut* oi 
avOpwrcot £ev s^ouv a>.Xo t:ttot$ 
va 'ucuv , -{Aova^a •ypo'aaa, •j'oo'aaa , 
'ypo'aaa ! Toutov tgv Xo'ycv . g^ou« 
-rravra'? to vou rcftv «ypo'<7cra ' 

A. M/zv^' e-yco ^sv Tjjcoutrasis rov friWv u.ou 
toVcv ao^iavTCCwov aTPo'xpiciv- A - 
Ms-yaXv} Te'xvyi p,aflc, va xaa\j xavets 
xaXa cpa-yviTa p-,s rcoXXa ^po'crta. 
Touto to xau.vet xat 6 nrXe'cv oupio?- 
^ociaTr,;. To xoqxvet. x 7) "/ara [/.a;- 
O xaXo; ou-a^-tp^ Trps-jret va xapvvp 
xaXa (pa-ynTa u.s oXuya 'ypo'sia. 

r» KaXa t^aia p. el Xi-ya "ypoata ; 
A. Nat ! 

F. Ma tv aXr'Oeta cra'^-nroupsi; 7) acpeiv- 
^ia <y (xaGet p.st x etp.sv auro rob 
p.y^txo. Ei £el (at; , wap' tv a£;'a 
p.' xat Cwjou ttjv «ou£ta p.' xal ■ys'- 
vsi pt.astpa;. 2i 6'Xa Ta irpaaaT 
avaxaTcoveta' ei^S piica , aav tou 
Kpou|i,a6^ 5 '? Ta tpa I a, 

E. 2uotcyj! ti 8s va p. a; y^eiaoQoOv xl>p 
Fiaw?} ; 



i) Usual in speaking te an old Servant. 



jf* ; "Let vour Steward look to that; 
he knows how to give good 
cheer for little Money. 

E. Pshaw! I wish you to an- 
swer. 

J. How many shall you (sit down) 
be at table? 

E. We shall be eight or ten : say- 
eight: where eight can mrtke a 
meal , ten may (will find some- 
thing to ) eat. (i) 

D. Certainly. 

J. Well! say ten pounds of meat 
for Soup and Bouille , ten 
Fowls, a Lamb for stewing. 

E. What the plague : this would 
be enough to feast (entertain ) 
the whole Town. 

J. Roast. . .. 

%. ( Puts his hands on John's 
Mouth ). A Murrain on you I 
You'd eat ( me out of house 
and home J up all I have. 

J. Saltfish ( Sturgeon J Salad. . . . 

E. ( Stopping his Mouth ) More 
still ? 



tbt 

V. Ap,' V5C £l<5a> V] TTlTpOUTTC.'? Qv.; (a) ! 

Auto; '£s'p' va xi[x xaXa ©al'i p.si 
Xi^a •ypoaia. 

E. 'nfpou 1 'E^w 6c'Aw va p.' cc7;c/.pi(to;; 
ecu- 

F. HoV 6a vac? \ tou tpawef; 

E, ©i va 3 pa<r6e bV/rw , r, &h%. Ba'Xe 
c»tw , TPta^'cuva x.ai ^sV.a. 

A. Bs'Paia ! 

r. KaXo ! BaXet si; ouxat^&t; fcpe'a; (Sou- 
£tvb <ha cou-rca >oo Spans', A^& 
•pviSsi;. "Ev' apvt S'ta p,a*ystpY!t>7d..., 

E. T*. <fra(3oXo I Au~a cpGavouvs va 
atXsucwa oXyi 77jv TroXireia ! 

T. 'Orcto 

E. ( fis&si to /ipt rou at; to co'pa tcu 
x-jp Fiawm ). A' xarnpajitvel 'Ecu 6s 

va ok; oXo to 4 ©id; p»ou. 

T. Hypi^ta * 2«XaT .... 

E- ( psexa tcu opa'Cci to sou.!z}i %xj\j.&', 



(a) ©ETTaXtxov i'6o; va Trpccpspwaiv u; sttI to irXsT^ov tk dpcsvt/.a ova'para 
jAS.apSpcv 8vjXuJco'v. H' <juvr<Qsia sp,eivsv a770 tcu; waXaiou; Acoptst; pa;. 'Ex.stvei 
aX6«yov,« *n TapTapo; , ^ $60770;, 7j Ia8p,o; », )tal 6'Xa tk ouota^txoc twv 
cjcauTo);' t'-^e wept AiaXs'xTwv IaV.&a©'„ Zu^/.epov. OEconomus. 

(i) It is difficult here to give, in English , a correct idea of the 
different senses of the Aorisl ©sfycuvs , arid the Present Tpw^ouvs. 



O NOMAS TIC ON 

OR 

LIST OF WORDS OF MORE IMMEDIATE USE 

UNDER DIFFERENT HEADS, 
t 

N. B. This Mark * indicates Words to he of Hellenic origin not y«t g&* 
nerally in use, this mark § Words of foreign oiigin very generally ia use* 



Of Heaven and the Elements. 

lisp: tcu cupocv«u xa\ tuv soi^dm. 

(.TOP , o ftelifi , gen. cu. 
Jesus-Christ, 'incrou? Xpico§", ou. 
The Holy Spirit, T d &ytsv iw*3fA«. 
The Virgin , ^ wavoqia 5 t'a? , Vj 0so- 

The Angels, ei- #YTsXoi, mv-j 

The Saints , 01 07101 , uov. 

Heaven , 6 eupavo? , ou. 

The Heavens or Firmament , to 
^ep^'w^a , «to?. 

Paradise , 6 7rapa£st<r«$ , »u. 

Hell , vi xo'Xa<r.? , s<o?, 

Purgatory, to xaflapTTiptov GrCp), iou. 

The Evil Spirit , © ^ia(3sXo? , ou. 

Fire, ^ cpwrta, ta;. to wup, t&u Twpb?. 

Air, 6 aspa? , a. 

Sea , Y) 6aXa<j<ra ,. vis. 

Earth, -t\ «p5, r?. a ( to x^M*** <xto? 3 ) 
Land opposed to Sea, ^ cepsa, 
ea<;. v) £vipa , a;- 
Sun , o y.Xio?, t'ou. 

Moon, t« cpe-^?epi , toOY vi eeXrvv), *i$. 
Star , o a<rvip , epos, to a^pov. 



Ray , Beam , % * farls , Tvc?. Sun 

Beams , ar *jXta*sai kxtTv^, 
Cloud , to «6we<pov , oi>. it clouds, is, 
or is becoming cloudy, ffuwe^ia&et. 
Wind , o av2{xo^ , ou. d dspa$. it i» 

windy, ©usx. 
Rain , $ (3poy^ , $;, Heavy Rain # 

pa-^aio, £pox*- Drought , dva- 

Pp°X l *« * avcfiPpia , a?. 
Thunder, Clap of Thunder, ^ £pov* 

rri , r;- It thunders, ppovra. 
Lightning, ^ » T paicyj, ifc. it lightens, 

a<rpaiTTet« 
Hail, to x***&» l °y. it hails 9 xaXatfa* 

O/" ptTTTSt x a ^*C'* 

Thunderbolt,* 6 xspauvbs , ©u, a ? p fl - 

•jteXekc 
Snow, tox^o'v?, too. it snows, ^tovj^«K 
Frost, 6 roryo; , ou. it freeze* , iqi.- 

p'vst. 
Ice , ^ jtpu?-aXXo? , cu» 
Dew, ^ ^po'ce? , ou. ^^pcffta, t*s* 
Fog, Mist, x xaTaxvia, ta$. 
Earthquake, £ seiff^o? * ou. 
Deluge, Flood , 6 xaTaxJw^s ». «&' 
Heat, Vj £eVr,, *>;. 
Cold 7 TO jtpuov j «0* 



t.6'5 



Of Times and Seasons. 



Bays of the TVeeh. 



Slept tc2 xaipoij xat twv uswv tguetoU?. JlI Huipa;? r?i; E$£oaa^G$« 



Day > 7) 7Wpa, a;. 
Night , v] vuxt« , a;« * tv:; vwere$. 
Pnooii , 70 [££<rousp(j iou. 
Midnight , T a uicavyar*. 
Dawn , r, au-p , m\ 
Daybreak, T a ^pap^aTa. ra £v)ttsp«- 
fxara. it dawns, or is dawning-, 

Sunset , -jn J'ugs?. -ra PaotXsua* TOU 

4Xi«u. the Sun is setting , pcwi- 

Xsuet 6 rXtc?. 
The Morning- , to* woupvo , ow- 
Evening, T o 3pad\i , emu- adv. a<rro- 

Ppadfis* This evening , alroye. 
Hour, % wox. half hour, gu<ra Spa. 

quarter of an hour, T o * Ts'raprov, 

cj. to § jwuap-ro , »u. 
To day, cr'aepov. 
Yesterday, E 'xSe«- fyis- 
To morrow, auptov- the day after 

to morrow , T7jv £fti» %ip»* , 

■rijv i^aupiov- 
The day before yesterday , wpoxOs?. 
The day after to morrow, uegayciov-- 
Aiter dinner, T & etovynipa. 
Week , r, ip^oji.a<5 , a , bf. 
Month, c p. viva:, * tou u.vjv»V- 
Year, 5 xpevo; j cu - ~ : -> c"tc:, cj;. 

t, xpcyia , ta<;. I wish you a happy 

new year , <j« ; sfigopn aaXw 

a?y;.JCpcvisc. 
Moment , r ^i^ar) , %. 
Spring , r ( afootfe , r,;, 
Summer , T k axXcxatpt , io». 
Autumn , to «p8ivs'?rcapev , ot>. 
Winter, 6 y^taava;, a. 'Tis winter, 

y_c'.a«viaa£. 

Festival , ^ £ pT7i , ifc. Holyday , 

r. <ryo'Xri , n;. 
Working day , r- -^.Hur^yr. } »j$. 



Monday, rj foutepa, a?. 
Tuesday, -» T piTV>, *;. 
Wednesday , ,, T*Tpa£« , «;. 
Thursday, yj ««pni , w;- 

Friday, V) Trscpxcrxrjv: , -/:;. 
Saturday, T o'§ <ra££aTo,cu. 
Sunday , yj xapiax^ , rfc. 

Z%e Months. 

January , § b iaveuapto? , iou. 
February , § b oeSpouapto; , tw» 
March , § 6 fiap-to?, iou. 
April , § 6 dwcpiXios , wu. 
May » § o p.ai'o; , ton. 
June, § 6 louvtoc , iou. 66epig , /)?» % 
July , § 6 106X10; , toy. 6 aXcavicp/;?, n« 
August , § £ a5?o<j<rc; , cu. 
September , § 6 vsirripppcoc > &»" 

o rpu-y^'vi; , vi- 
October , § o 6*T»]3pi©$ , icu. 
November , § 6 voep.€ptos , igu. 
December , § 6 £fexep,£pcog , fcuw 

Fasts and Festivals* 
At 2y,o'X7.t; , a! 'EopraTs* 

New Year's Day , to* vs'w ere;- 7j 
( r.aa'pa ) tow av(cv BaatXeiou. r.ai- 

Circumcision , ■£ "respire^ j ife. 

Epiphany, Twelfth day, 7 a 0eo'f«- 

vsta. ra «pwra« 
Carnival , v\ dr:ox5£ta, et«;, piur. 

oti d-rvo/.peiat;. 
Lent, r, casaxs^fl , vj;. v^ Teffffa^a^ 

Fast, r, vvj^eto, eia?. to fast , to an- 
stain from flesh, vyiceum. Tpw-y« 
vr.q-'.'ia'.ua, - aapax.o<riava.tO break 



1 64 

fast voluntarily, xaraXJoj. - in- 
voluntarily, dcraivojAy/.. aor. {,0 riV . 
To eat flesh, Tpw-fta x;ao-/aXtva , — 

Passion Week , ^ pe-foXi] i^oaa^a. 
Palm Sunday, T a ,3ai'a , afwv. 
Good-Friday , r, u^-aXY) Trapao-y-suYi. 
Easter Day , V) Aauwptt , %. 
Easter, T o fla«x«. 
Ascension, ^ava>w|>i;,* ews- 
Whit j Sunday, « wevrwKos??, 
All Saints, ■« soprin twv a"y'wv Travrwv. 
Christmas day , T a xpr^cu-^evva, wv- 
Harvest, 6 Sepierito? , so. 
Vintage , 6 Tpy-yc; , ou. 

Ecclesiastic Orders. 
IlcOt ey//6Xr,aca^tx£)v A'^iwaaxcov* 



Patriarch , 6 warpia 



ptapjno?, cu 



et*. 



Metropolitan ? c ^rpcwoXtTus , cu. 
Archbishop , 6 apxiemaxases , eo. 

6 ^ccr-irr,; , ou. 
Bishop , 5 e ^'eraoTro? , cu. 
Legate , 6 Ii«pxo£ , do. 
Presbyter, Priest, 6 7;peo-guTepo; , cu- 

& -^a-a; ; 5- c Upeo; , s'w;. 
Archdeacon , 6 ap//.£tay.cvo; , ou. 

Subdeacon, uire^tajocves , ou. 
Deacon, 6 £ta*ovo? . ou. 
Archimandrite , 6 apx l pww£piT«s, y 

or r,. 
Curate , a sV/iuipto; , tou. 
Prior, 6 v.-vcuucvc? , ou- 
Monk , 6 >wcXo-fssQ; , ou. o * [xoysc^ov, 

CVT0?. 

IVun,^ x.aXo-j'p£'.a,i'.5;-r,*(jt.ovaCcuca,r^. 
Preacher , | Upw^pul , usee?. 
Hermit , 6 ao-y^r/jc , oo. 
Convent , Monastery, to {xova<r>ipiov, 
iiu- t. uiovt; , ?i;. t$ p.sTc'x,i , i&u* 



Customary Articles a/ food, 
Ta irXeov covstOiapivs cpa-^TaV 

Bread, T o ^uul , too. — new bread, 
fynetpo*. I gain my hread — *- 
my livelihood, £j5«ya£«> ~* t^F" ! xc '- 1 * 
Water , T q vspov , ou. clear , pure 
water , aaOapo* veoo'v. — thick , 
disturbed ftoXo'v- — cool , yux,poV 
hot , £ e <ro'v. lukewarm , tepid 9 
XXtapo'v- — boiling, 3pa<rc'v« 
Wine , to 1 >waal, tou. 
Meat , to xpsa£ , eaTO?. 
Fish, to $apt, tou —fresh, § ta- 
fe'Ttxo. vtoTuo'v. — stale , cayXov. 
Boiled Meat, to €p.a<ro'v. to vco>- 

3p«?o, cu. 
Roast Meat , to iviTov , cu- 
Cake , Pie , to § ftizciu^iKi , iou- ' 

to -Xay.cuvT'.ov , tou. r, /xixct, a;- 
Soup , § ri acu-ra , a;. 
Broth , to £(Ofv. , wo> 
Salad „ § r, axXx-ca. , a?. 
Sauce, § r, caXT^a , a;-* to eu^au.- 

p.a, arc?. 
Ragout , Hash , 7 b £prup.x , octo;. 

to y,xpu*£uu.a ; aro?. 
Dessert , § roc cppcuTTa, wv- ra orca- 

ptxa , civ. 
Cheese , to Tupt , tou- 

Table Articles. 

Ta wepe tt,v Tparr^ocvv 

Table , to Tpa~e£t , tou. 

Chair , § r t joapeaXa, a?. »«(M>cXa, «£.' 

Table cloth , to Tpas»&>{AaYTiXo, cpu 

or oy. 
Fork , to xvipouvtj t«. 
Knife , tj fiaxatpe , tou. 
Table-napkin , § $ tcst&tt* » a;. 
Spoon, to xouT&Xtj tou- to j(ouXtapt>tflu- 
Gravy spoon; sauce-spoon, bootccX** 



Plate, § ri iriaTTC, eu. to rciva'xtcv, tcu« 
Dish , § to irtocTTO , ou. Vj cbrXa^a, a?- 
Candle , § to xept, toy. Taper , to 

K*yt6xe'pt , tou. 
Lamp , § $ XouT^spva- * o Xuxvc?. 
Night, Lamp, § to xavTtXt > tou. 
Wick , to cpuTtXt , »u- 
Candlestick , 7 b Xuy^vapt, toy. 
Snuffers ,- tc i-aXt^oxspt- t» xepotpa- 

Xl^C , IOU- 

Chafing Dish , § Vj ^ouJ3ou , ou;. 

7j OYJ^OU. 

Basin , § % Xexavy) , y;. 
Water Jug , to xoup.dpt , iou. 
Cup, Glass, TJjcou^a, a?, to 7roTr'pr,tou. 
Bottle, § ^ p.rort'XXta. to {/.-nroxocXt, toy- 

Large — , p.7roxaXa. 
Tea or Coffee-cup, § T b ©XtT^a'vt, toy- 
Saucer, § T b £dp<pt , tou. 
Porringer , 6 § TsvT^pe; , s. 
Cover, § rj iroo-a^a , a;. 
Large Basket, T o xo^ivt iou. Large 

hand basket , yj xaXa'Sa, a?. Hand 

basket, T b xaXa&t , toy. 
Bread tray , % ™vax«ATY! , ri;. 
3 ^ Pints, § r. dxxa , as , plur. at 

sxxa^e; , oc^cov. 

Animals etc, us y d for food. 
Z»x e^woVta, xal t^ixcpopa sI$yi twv 

XpSOTtoV. 

Ox , to pco^t , tou. Ox-beef , T b 
Co^ivo'v , ou- understood jcpea$;. 

Cow, xd^cXa^a, a?. Cow-beef, to 
a^sXa^ivov xps'a;. 

Calt , -rb t/.ca^apt, toy. \ eal , to 
(xocr^apictcv. 

Sheep , T o irpo'Pa-ov. Mutton , to 

TTfc'SctOV, etcu. 

Ewe, 7) TrpoSaTtva , a?. 

Lamb , 7 6 dpvt, toy. the Meat , to 

apv:a',ov , tou. 
Hog 3 Pig , 7 g -ycupouvt , iou- o yor 



i65 

ps? , cj. Pork , to yct'ptvov s ou-' 
Fowl , rt cpvtGa , aj. § to jco'ra , a?* 

Hatching Hen , yj xXcocrffO. , a;. 
Cock , 6 ttjtsivs; , ou. 
Hash, Mince, xpe'a; dpfSeXtirov , -*« 

xeims'vov. 
Sweetbread, T a fXuxa^ta, t5v. 
Tart , § ^ ^t Ta . Must-cake , %. 

u.ou<raXsupta , iaV- 



Ham 



, to ^otpojxept , iou. 



Sausage, § T b Xouxavtxo, cu. 
Smok'd meat , 6 7rx<roup{/.5c; , a. 
Force-meat, § 6 xscpTs? , s. § 6 vtoX- 

y.a; , a. 6 cap(i.a;, a. 
Caviar, T b ya£tapt. toy. 
Salt fish-roe , 76 au-^OTa'pa^o , ou. 
Pilaf , § 70 TctXa^t , tou. 
Sweetmeats, § ,5 X aX6a; , a- 
Melon , 7(5 wsTOvt , tou. Water 
melon , 70 ystjAcvtxo , ou- § t& 

xap?rou£t , toy. 
Cucumber, T o d^cupt, tou. 
Gourd, to xoXoxuvOtov , tou. to xoXo- 

xuOt , tou. 
Chicken . to wsT?tvo'wouXov , ou. § t& 

xotottouXov , ou. Chickling , to 

xXcoacoxouXt , tou. 
Pigeon , to wsptce'pt , tou- young 

Pigeon , to ireo^reGaxt , tou. 
Woodcock, yi 6pvtO&«xaXi£a, a?. § yj 

[AiTcxaT'Ca , a; , tq £yXo'xoTa , a$. 
Partridge , 71 irep^txa , a?. 
Thrush , V) x( x Xa , a;. 
Figpecker , 6 auxo^a^oc , ou. 
Lark, 6 xopu^aXb?, ou. "h ^aptflpa, 0,5. 

( y\ auTaptGpa. ) 
Quail , to opTu^t , tou. 
Pheasant , 6 ^aatavo; , ou. 
Turkey , § ?! xoupxa , a?. § t$ 

VTtvTto, tou.- ^tavo; , "j-aXXog. ou. 
Go.ose, Ti /r.vcc, a?. Gosiin, to W 

vaxt , tou. 
Duck , ii iraTTirta. t<J -sraTTTrt. ic«» 

Duckling , T o -na.Txi:dKi , tou. 
Hare , 6 Xa^'b; , ou. 



1 66 

Rabbit, § to xcuvs'XXt , tou. young 

Rabbit , to xcuvsXXaxt , tou. 
Beer , to £apxa<h , too. 
Wild Boar , to a-yptcpupouvo » toy. 
Stag , * v) e'Xatpo; , ou. to eXacpi> tou. 
Game, to a-yptfu , teu. to xuvy.^i , toy. 
Fat , to 7raxc? , oug. 

Seasoning for food, 

Ta etpTUGTtxa. 

Salt , to «Xccc , ecTO$. 
Pepper , r d 7rtTs'pt , toy- 
Pimento, jj «MMpt&-, a;. 
Oil , to Xa£t , tcu. 
Vinegar, T d £t'ch , tou- 
\erjuice, ^.apupl^si.^ a?. 
Mustard , to eivcfari , t«u< S "h JW 

^a'p^a , a?. 
Clove , § to ^apcucpaXo , oy. 
Cinnamon , * to xtwau.cau.ov 9 ou* 

§ r> xavs'XXa , a?. 
Caper, ^ xxTnrapyj 5 w?. 
Laurel , vj <5a<pv>i , v»?. 
Mushroom, to u,av.Tapt , *eu. 
Onion , to xpojjtu.u^t , tsu. 
Garlic , to 1 cxc'p^o , ou. to % ctao- 

go^ov , C'J. 

Orange , to -nopTcyoXXt , toy. Se- 
ville Orange , to 1 «ep«v?& tou. 

Lemon, to Xtu,dvt , too. 

Parsley , i p.av^ctvt;, oa. ?o p.ax£- 
^ovtot, tou. ii u.upwd N tsc , ta;. 

Celery , to cts'X'.vov , ©u. 

Purslan , vj -yXy^t^* , «c- 

Endive , mxpaXuh? , i<$W pa^t'xt. 

Lettuce, to u,apc6Xtj tou. 

Cress ? to x«p^ap.ov ^ ©o- tk x»p<5'a i - 
p.a. Small Salad , eaXarct «;wo v 
xap£ap,a. 

Butter , to SouTupov * eu. 

Lard , to jrotptvov waxo?. 

Mui ? T o -yaXa , tw •yaXaxTO.;. 

%g , to «u76v ? ou- bard egg , 



Poached egg, au^a t^*^«- 
Omelet ^ to ©-90077070 > ©u. 

Fish* 

Shellfish , fa 6r?.*xo'£e»u,a » wv. 
Cray- fish, * xapaSufa, ©;, 

Prawn , VJ -yapi^a , «?. 
Lobster, 9 d^axo? , ou. 
Muscle , to p.6o\ » tow. 
Oyster , T d q>i&'» tou. 

Scallop, TO XTSVt > tou. 

Razor-shell, i cwXYjva, ««. 

Sole , ^-yXwffoa j v)$. 

Eel , to xs'Xi > tou. 

Roach , y, T^Xvi. § to p.irapu.wouvn 

Pilchard, § yj cap^a'XXa , a;. 

Anchovy, Smelt , % caapt^a , aj, 

Vegetables, 

XopTaptxa. 

Peas , § tk Trt^'XX'.a. Chickpeas, 
to pepiet, tou. Parch'd peas , i 
Tpw^aXioc j i«£. 

Artichoke , ■« dTxivapa , a?. 

Spinage , § ta ciravaxxta, twv. 

Sorrel , V) ijuviOpa , a;. 

Bearss , ra xouxta , twv. 

Kidney - Beans , tcc ^>ai?ouXta> to)v» 

Turnip , , to 70776X1, tou. 



Radish 



•0 ps-rravt 3 sou- 



Carrot, * to ^auxo; ? ou;. Ta peuxta. 
Leek , 70 irpaoov 5 cu. 
Asparagus , to cTvapa^^t, tou. 
Cabbage, to Xa^avov » ou. to xpap.- 

-ttI, tou- to xpaprfieXst^avcv. 
Cauliilower, to xouvouui<Ji » tou. 
Pickled Cucumber , -/} ^oupapu/a* 
Sourcrout , r, X&xavap k aia , ta;. 

RlCC , TO p'.^t J t&U, 



£ke Dessert 

Tk 0170) pt>i«« 

Apple , -• jxrXov ? oyo Apple Tree ? 

X u,»Aia , toe?- 
Pear , to Air& 3 uu. Pear Tree , 

Peach , to po£axwov , ou. Peach 
Tree , ri po^ouuvigc, t«;. 

Apricot , § T9 xxuw , tou. § "h t^c.jta' 
Xou£a j a;- Apricot Tree , £ *xr 
ff'.a, ta;. r T£a?~aXou£ta > ta;« 

Cherry, to scspast, ie5* Cherry Tree, 
7) xspcwta > ix?« 

Fig , to aujcov , su. Fig Tree , r\ 
crista, ia;« 

Plum , to ^aaKffjcyivov » «u. Plum» 
Tree , x £a{*.a<T/.7jVta , ta?- 

Strawberry , § *j «ppaouX« , «;. 

Grape , to c<x<puX'. ? lc ^* Vine , t® 
apiciks. j tcu» 

Pomegranate , t& fxa^t , tou. Pome- 
granate Tree, -fi pco^ta 9 t«?» 

Sweets , Sweetmeats, to "yXojm , eu= 

Walnut , to xapu^t , tou. Walnut 
Tree , r, xapucWa , ia;. 

Kut, to XsoToxxpov, tot>. . § Nut Tree, 

TO CpOVTGUJCt, tou. 

Chesnut , to xa?avov , ou» Chesnut 
Tree, r, xa^avta, ta;. 

Almond , to ApbyfaXw, ou. Almond 
Tree , yj d[rj*y£aXix , ir$. 

Mulberry , to sux.aut.tvcv, ou. Mul- 
berry Tree, r, cuxau-tvia , tac« 

Quince, to xu^vt , tou. Quince 
Tree , ■£ y.u£a>via , ia;. 

Olive and Olive Tree , $ &aia. a?. 

Ztegrees of Kindred, 

Baflaol rJfc su^zvii'a;. 

Father , s ^a7 = pa<; , e- * tgu -jraTpo;. 
Mother , -n ftTit-soa , rri; jMfiTpf's- ^ 



167 

Grandfather , *a*rad$. © tc«7t* 
tjouXiq; , 7j. 

Grandmother, r, repojATiTMp , epos. 

Great , Grandfather , 6 ftpo'ira*. 
tto; , ou. 

Son, 6 ut^$ , o5- 

Daughter , rj roj*}, r,;. yi Suptvs'pa t 
tUq {KryaTpo?. 

Brother , *" a£ri$a£» ou. — Mater- 
nal , a^sXqpe'c a^» {/.rjTs'pa , — * 
Paternal , d™ iwrspa. Brother 
and Sister , or two Brothers f 
tk doiX^to;. 

Sister , Vj a$eX<£$ , ffc« 

Eidest , fAs-vaXYiTspo? , epvj , 
■jrpsaj&TegfGS , ep« , e^sv. 
to'toks; , 6 > vj. 

Youngest , pxpoTepo? , epvj , epov. 
vscorspo; , spa , spov. 

Uncle , Gsig? , ou. 6 {z.:rapji.TP*; , 01. 

Aunt , r t Qilcc , a;, rl a^xta, ta; 



epov. 



Nephew , 



Niece 



ave^io? » 
ti «ve<j»ia •, ta?. 
Grandson, — Grand Daughter , 

? "^ e^'vovoc, ou» 
Cousin , 6 ei-e^sX'f 0$ , ou- 
Brother in Law, •yuvaHcawJ'eX'p*?, eo- 

6 ■yap-Spo? , ou- § 6 jccuvvoiocto; , ou» 
Sister in Law, ^'yuva'.xaiJ'cX^, n;- 

^ x.ouvvotaTa , a;. 
Stsp-Father, 6 refispb? , ou- 6 u.y)" 

Tpuio? , ou. Step-Mother, r, iveecpa, 

a;,v\ u/flTpuia, uta;. 
Son in Law , 6 , ■£ wpo #, Yovoc , ou. 

Step-children, tx vgcf&M , tav- 
Daughter's Husband , 6 ■yau.^po?, ou. 
Son's Wife , ^ vuftwyi , n;. 
Parents , 01 -vovcT?, ecav. 01 Y 0v£t ^'-3 £iwy» 
Husband , Wife , 6 , r, au^up;, ou. 
Bridegroom , 6 wupf to# tcu. 6 «yapt- 

£ob$ , ou. Bride, ^ vu|A<py) , yj;. 
Illegitimate , V o'9o?, vj, ov. §p.ira<rap- 

^o ? . 
Godfather, § 6 xcujiTrapo; , cu- God- 
mother , yi xouanra'oa , a;. AIs© 

Persons giving away a Bride. 



1 08 

Sponsor, b ava^e;? eu. % o vovo?. ou.' 
Female, Sponsor, -ft ivo^ex©?, *> V0VK '- 
Godson, God daughter, 6 , •/) ava- 

<^jxt6? , ou y 6 |3a7rTtGtpMo'(; ou> vi 

Woman in Childbed, r\ Xe^tiwa, a?. 

iNurse* ^ (3uSa<rpfcj a$.Yiirapa;j.avva,a$. 

Relation ,6,7) (ruyyevvi; , ou;. Rela- 
tions ^ oi awfyiizTi; ? &v. 

Friend , 6 cptXo; * ou. - — $ cptXvi , n;- 
r <ptXsv<x£a, a?. 

Enemy , expo's , a ,. o'v. 

Widower, Widow, 5 yrn?o$ , -h y^'pai 

Heir Heiress ^ 6 , -h xXnpovo'[/.o?. 

Guardian , t Iwtfpowos * ow. Ward, 
* e £7riTpo7reuo'jj(.£vo? , y\ lwtrp-6w6U0jfc6* 
vvj . o j tq j avnXtxo?. 

Betrothing , 6 appa£tovia,o-p,os , su. 

Marriage , yj uivav^peia , siaq. 

Wedding , 6 -fapif? > ou. 

Alliance by Marriage , -fi o-utiitsOs- 
gesa , stag , The Persons so al- 
lied , to cuu/rceGspetdv. t« cup.7f&" 
fispiaaa. 

Different States of Man 

and IVbman. 

Atacpopet jtafa^ao-st? tou av^'po; Jcal 

>% fUVaiKOS;- 

Man Mankind generic , 6 avfloW- 

7rr^. Man specific , husband , 

6 av^pa? , tou av^pe'?. 
Woman , Wife, ^ -yuvawea, a?. 
Old Man , * 6 ^s'pov , ovto?. Old 

Woman , i fpata * ata$. Old , 

syspos , -ypsia, eta?. 
Young, new,veoc , ea , e'ov. Young 

Man , youtli, 6 vsc<j, Young 

Woman, ^ via. 
Lover, Sweetheart , & a^awViTticos , 

cu- 6 epa<po? jou- o epwfjisvo; , r oVya- 

■jTYlVucii. *!0 epa^-pta: vi spwpivY]. 
Infant , to 3pe<^j , oos. ChHd, to 

wauJ'l ; t*u« 



&oy, tS otyo'pt > f«J- ^^ > ■« K^l 

little Girl , to xopaatov ? tou- 
Bachelor , 6 avuirav^poij*, ou. 
Bachelor , Spinster , 6 , yj wasS^vos. 
Master , Mistress of the House ^ 

6 vGixo&upy};, Yj. ^ votaoxupa » as. 
Man-Servant , Maid-Servant , • 

<^ouXo$> iq e^ouXa. 
Maid-Servant , § $ ^owrMxri. Vi £cu- 

XeuTpa> ac« 
Peasant , 6 xapiarvi; , n. Peasant 

Crirl > "fl x^P 1 * 710 ^ •> a s* 
Stranger , Foreigner , $ ? ' v *> , », ov. 
Pauper, cpT«x5? , ri » o'v. 
Mendicant , Beggar , 6 friTiovfts , e». 

^WIAO^TV)? , CO- 

Thief, 6 xXs'^tyis j yj or ou« 
Of Dress. 
Ta TSspl t« evouu.flifaJ 

Cdat, to 90'pep.a 9 aTo;. § to poux-> ou^ 

Hat , § TO -ACLTzillo. * TO CX'.OC^tOVj tou- 

Wig, § vi itspouj«ca, i'j. 
Cravat , § Xat^o^eVfl? 5 vj oi* ou. 
Cloak , to e^ftxpo'pi j tou- fi £7kavto©&-' 

pe'0.a j ccto$"* 
Waistc6at, § 7 b ^tXlxSi. § to cw+~ 

xap^t j tou. 
Smallclothes, Breeehes,§To 6pa>4tjtoui. 
Drawers , to eo'w3paxo , tou. 
Stocking, ^jiaXT^a. § ToxaXT'Couvtj to3»! 
Shoe , § to TvairouT^i , tou. 
Shirt , § to uTT&xauacovj cu. 
Sleeve , § t b aavtxt , ou. 
Cap , § 73 cxoucpta , ta?. 
Scul'lcap, to cpecrt , tou. 
Packet, § i tCe'tcyi, toc- 
Ribbon, String , Lace, >j jtop^sX- 

Xa ) a;. 
Button , to xoixirt , tou. 
Buttonhole , ^ OviXeia > eia;. also 

slipknot. 



iLtlot , c Ho'iatcc? , cu. 
Glove , to jretpoxTi » iou. 
Handkerchief , § to p.o.vriXi , .ig3- 
Chaplei, string of Beads, to xep,- 

TToAo-yt 3 iou. 
Watch , to iopoXcfyov , iou. 
Buckie, § ri oiiATTia, ta$. 
Garter , xaXT^cch'r/K ? w or &«, 
Ring, t3 £axTuXt£i9 iou> 
Comb , t6 xts'vi j iou. 
Razor, to Sjupacpt > joC 
Sword , to eTvaGl s wv». Sword 

W ound , 7i oTvaSta , ioc? 
Cirdle , -h luv/i , r, ? . Waist-band, 

Pistol , § 7) *iff4a ? «?. Pistol- bail 

W ound 5 rj -ju^oXiet 3 ta;« 
Bridie, § to ^ipx , iou. * * x a ^ lv °» ? 

cu. r& -/aXtvapt , iou- 
Halter, § to" xa:nsrpi , iou. 
Saddle , * to £cpi-nriu*v ? iou, S ^ <*&- 

Xcc> «?. 
Stirrup , ^ TraTrjTpta > ia§- S f« 

&"fXtj iou. 
Whip , r\ p-c^ifa ? a;. 
Switch , to pafi^i , iou . 
Boot , to uro'^yiaa , ar&?« 

Spur , TO <pTSpVl<7TiGl , tOTJ- 

Bead-dress , § to exoucpcoact j aTO?. 

to y.T£%tc 4 u.a j aro?. 
Petticoat , to /jucroooucavo , too. 
Apron, r) src^a, ta;. 
Gown, Tocpcuq-avi; iou- vi § pop/rca^ a;. 
Pearl , to p.as^aptTapt , iou. 
lieeklace, r\ apfx«.3ia, ia;. tf toocx^'-"* 
Ear-ring , to GxoXctpiai ■> %yi' 
Curled , § xar'Capb; 9 ti ? c'v- cyoopo? 3 
7) , dv. One -with curled hair , 
c7oupcaaXYi;-Hair-bar.d or buckle, 
to xor^aps. to ^ou-^po'. 
Fan, to av B p,'.rvipi 3 iou. 
Busk , § o p^ou^o? ? cu. 
Bracelet, T 6fJpaxioXij tou< 
Pin , vi xap^ir'Ca , «g. ti &sX#r 



169 
Pincushion , § to xou|3apt , iou^ 
Scissars , to t^aXi^i , tou. 
Thimble , 7) «S*xn>X"fi6pa ? K£» 
Needle , to 1 peXcvt , iou. 
Thread , r\ xXwc^ » vfc. 
Paint, to <pTia<st£i , t»u- t» xoxxtva^tj 

iou. I rouge, (p-riavcfAju. Rouged, 

cp,£vc<;-. 
Beauty-spot , •$ sXaa eta?. 
Rose "Water , pc^oVap.o , cu. 
Hair-Powder , r, cxo'vyj , vj?.. 

BOX , TO XGUTl , IOU. 

Jewels, T« cS'to'p.avTtxa 9 6>v. tk «£* 

Tpa^ta 3 twv. 
Diamond , to £iap.rm 9 iou: 
Emerald , to cpaooq^t , tou. 
Paiby, to pGUpvrciVl 9 tou. 
Toothpick , * $ o^ovTe^XutpU , ihg. 
Cloth , to wavvt j tou. 
Distaff , ii po'xxa , a?. 
Spindle , to" a^paV/rt , iou. 
Silk , to p,£7a^i ? icu. 
Worsted , to p,aXXl 9 tou. 

Starch, glue , § ^ xo'XXa 9 a?J 

Soap , to ca«ouvt 9 tec, 

Sheath, Needleease, ^erixTi,^. * 
^eXovo6rjxYi 9 yi?. 

Ta p.€py) to$ cwp.aT0s„ 

Body , to xopp? , tou. Shape , Stae 
Height , to avaqr«{j.a 5 aTC<j. S to* 
p.Trct, , tou. Waist , r^ u.£jti ? vi?. 

Head , -re x£9aXt ? tou- 

Face , TO* WpOClOTTOV, CU. VI {XOup'fl 9 

»>c. Vulgarly, toc p.ouTpa, «v. 
Forehead, to xoutcXXo ; ou. * to y.£- 

TtOTTOV 9 CO. 

Eye , to part 5 tou. Glance, ^ p,a- 

?ia ? ta?. 
Eyebrow , to <ppu^t , tsu. 
Eyelid, to gXs'^apcv , cu. 
Eyelashes, t« p,aTo'xX6c^a 5 twv, 

X3 



Pupil of the eye , i X o>n , # j 

&ar , to auTt , toO, 

Hair , >i rpfya , as. Head of Jfaitf, 

the Hair , rcc p.aXX*.a, tfov 
Temple , * 6 xprra^o?, o'u. e j^JXcv'-* 

Tf*s » f 
Cheek , /§ to' ftayouXo , ou. 
Nose , a (A-jrw , yjs. 
Nostril , to' pouQouvi , i*u. 
Beard , ra •yl'vma , etwv. to shave, 

£up(£op.at , shaved , ejuvs;. 
Mouth, to* co'fta, arcs. 
Tooth , to' ^o'vtc , uS> 
Tongue , r, -yXuffcra , vjj. 
Lip > to' £61X95 , »u;. 
Mustachio , to' fx,Qu?& , wS, 



Chin 



, re wyjyouvi , toy. 



Keck , o Xatpi? , ou. 

Ihroat , 6 ^pojp"^ , u^o^J 

Back , ^ paxvi , vie. 

ShcMder, vY?rXa™, *» ? ; 

Arm, dj3p«x''cov, evo£. to' £%"j toy,' 

Elbow , 6 #ffiwv«s,- a - 

Fist , » ^boq , «u. Blow with the 

fist, V) YpoQcay a?„ 
Hand , to' x j 'p e > copuLr 
Finger, to ^a'xtuXo , ou. 
IN ail , to vu X t , tou. 
Stomach , to 1 so\).i%i , teu. 
Chest , Bosom , T d qrMi , ouf. 
Breasts, T « €ufra , av- 
Belly, tf-jfoUwc , tap. 
**.ib , vi wXeupa , a?. Side . to' tfX&u- 

TfAVel , £ o'^aXo? , ©3- 
Thigh , to' fwpl , tou. 
Knee , re* 70'voc , tou •yflvaroc* 

Leg , Tfi' CKe'XoS , OU?. TO TC0<£l, jeu- 

Calf of the Leg , 77 ayrfc, a;, to' 

•ya^pojcvvj/Atov , tou. 
Foot, ro" tro^apt. Sale , yj 7rar«uva. 

I kick , xXtrioto , & kick, x) w0 t- 

&a , ta;. 
Heel, jf ©rlpva , a;.- Shoe-heel » 

§ to* Toxxftdvt > io3| 



Colour, complexion, Tl ' tfifUtfMf 
rorm , T0 ' ffx^f**»'*r6c* 
Gait, Carriage/ w , *pojpfi a |ui,*to<i 
Plumpness , T o' wo^o? , ou 5 . * 71 eu- 

orMfA'atta , ta?. 
Slenderness, Slimnesa, 71 Xi-Yvrfm;, 

Brain, 6 p.uaXi?, Brains 3 T « ji.uaXx» 

Blood , to' «?p« , aro;. 

Artery , *1 ^tvipta , ta ? . 

Vein , ti (pXs|3a, sfc. 

Muscle, b puuv , o'vs;. 'tV wevT-'txaxi, 

tou. 
Skin , to* mr?t , too, ro' ch'p^a, arc;. 
Heart , 4 w^ix , fac. 
Liver, to' cvsxwti , ecu to' ctxo'ti ,.coi# 

LungS, d 7TVEUU.WV , ove-. 

Intestines, 4k Ivrejct,; «v. t« ev-- 

To'c?9ia , ttov. 
Bladder , ^ cpou<i>ta , a;. 
Spleen , VU^va , a;. 
Gall . Bile , ^ x *x»\ , ifc 
Saliva , to* oaXtcv , tou. Spittle ? 

to iTTXtGiia. y o.xq;. 
Perspiration , e&>o)Ts;,Teut<$>T^ 
Cough , 6 g% a? ,' «. 
Catarrh , 6 xarappou:, ou. ref crovar^^ 

toy. affeeted with a catarrh , 

xaTappoTaop.£vo$. ouyaxw{Aevo?. 
Breath , ^ avarvori , %. T .» axv«TC# 

Ta fl£'!«r6nT>ipia: 

Sight, * vi opaat^ ? euc«' 
Smell , * 7i ocrcppvie-s , a^^J 
Taste , * 7i *yzuaiq , ew;. 
Touch , * 7i d<pvi , $;, 
Hearing , ^ axon , ifr. 
Sense , to' acuQ^rrptov. 4 voy;« 
Sensation, Sentiment, 71 ataeTxrc?/ 
Tt 1 aifffiyjpca , arc?'. 



Of Study. 

The Study, xo' c-rvo^^x^r'piov , toy.' 
Book , y£ [3>.§X:cvj it/j. to' /.aprt, ts3. 
Paper, T o' -/.atari. 
Quire , r0 ' tetcx^iov , t'ou. 
Pamphlet , $ tpuXXst^a , a?. 
Leaf , to' cyXXoy ? oy. 
Page, to 1 KstquigaTby 3 ou. * r, mX& 
the. 

*P?n, ts' xov^yXi , toy. to' tttSoov , 

SU. § Ti 7TEVV0C j a?. 

Ink , to' u.s>.avi 5 toy. 

Writing cr.se or Ink stand , § T o 

xaXajAapt i id. n m.6X*vo6w; , rj;. 
Penknife , to' xcv^yXcjAor/atpoy > teu.. 
Twine, § 6 awa-ye? , #u % . 
Sana , c aau.05 , oy. 
Seal, Wafer, 'r, c^pot^cc. §r ; ptfftMfr 
Letter, ^pa<^ > fa. 
JNofe , to' yaawfAxney , toy, tS 

YpaaaaTKxi, wu. 
Writing, ~o ^ad'.acv, aTCi. 
Pencil , Black-lead 2 Pencil , T <3 

uoX6ct , 10D. TO fioAt>3cJco'v^uXp\i , ou. 
Lesson taken , to" [Aataqpac, jcto?. 

Lesson given , r, uapa^offt? , eo>;.- 

I give Lessons, wasa^t^w. 
Translation, ^ jt gT B$p«flris .? s«c. 
Exercise , T d es'ux , aror. I write 

Exercises, 6e^T<r/p$95 , ii*. 
Portfolio , T 3 j^apTO^uXaVaoy. 

Musical Instrument?, 



Mou 



>p*yava. 



Violin , § to PtcXl , icy. 
riute , ayXd; , o.y. ^Xo*y*?flCj sc; 
Bag-pipe , § -/j ^^ a , a; . 
Guitar , r, xtMpa , 1x5. 
Harpsichord, T q xu^iratXoM , rj; 
l^te, ^ x6oa, a,-. 



Harp, § i £ ?w « , «?? 
Trumpet , r 4 ffoXiw^^ ? a*. 
Drum, to 1 Tua^avov , oij. 

Parts of a House. 
T« toy c<jTryirioy» 

Ilouse , to* ffrr'rt , toy. * r, otsctaj 
Door, §x.-ffo|j«, a;, * lii 6630; , a*; 
Room , § 6 ovfa; , a- 
Hall , § t, ffaX* , a;. 
Court-yard, •£ auX* , %. 
Window , to" waaaQujov s toy. to* 

wapKO'jpc , toy. 
Kitchen , § 7J xsurCtva , ac. to' v " jax- 

ysioslov , e£py. 
Court 9 6 ayXoyupo; ,. eu. r, «yXr,, ■■?;;• 
Well , to' ??v>ya£i, toy. 
Stable , 6 q-ay'Xc; , ou. 
Wine-Cellar , $ oivgQwmi , vis- t* 

yrroyotcv , sicy° 
Stairs , §'yi erxjjX* , a?. 
Stej>, Stair, 6 €a9uo; , ou- to' cxa- 

XcrraTi , toy. 
Garden, to' -nrEpiflo'Xt j toy , 6 ///i-rco^ 

oy. § c (juraxT^es, s. 
Fountain , ri ($pu<n} , ?)?• 

Floor, to' TraTfoact , aToc» 
Terrace, to' £uu.a, cto;. •/. acp«" 

xta , ta?« 
Granary , * to- o-iT&.So'Xtov , tou. to 

§ olij-zv. 5 tcy. 
Roof, r ( ax£-'/)) "«([',' . 
Tile, to* xeoa|jt.iA, ici3> 
Gutter , § rb xavaXt , toy. 
Wall , to § TGofj^ot 7 tou. d toTvc,- j o 
Chimney, § d ^ou-ppoj 3 ou> 
Brick, § t6 t&53Xov , cy. rd afc8i>'iou. 

Floor , TO TTXTOiy.a , (XT0?* 

Cieling-, c opocpj;, cj. § Td Ta^ocvt, to". 
Oven , § 6 qoOovo; > oy. 
Beam , § 'h -jpsvTa , a;. 
Plank , T9 cav't^t , toy. 
Water-closet , $ y.seia, £-'x; , rk 
ava*yxaTov 3 aiou. 



. x 7 a , 4 

Hire , Rent , to v voixi , ijjfi'r 

evoixtov j io'j. 
Plaster , Stucco , 6 p<^c; , wl 
Lime , c ek^e^ns , vi. 
Marble , to v fia'cpapov j ou. 
Stone , $ 7T£Tpa , a;. 
Dovecote , * 6 weptcepsav ,^&h«v 

Furniture. 



Ta <rxe6n. 

Looking Glass , £ xa9o£>rvif , u. 
Sofa, 6 cccpa; , £• 
Bed, to' y-2e,5part, wo. 
Sheet , T fl' o'.v^o'vt j tou. 
Mattress, T o' ^wpLat , 1**0?. 
Pillow , to- § {fea|tXX«pt , too- to 

Trpccrxs'cpaXov , 60. 
Bolster , •£ (jcajepuvapa j a;- p.a£iXXapa. 
Curtains , Bed -Hangings , * to 

7rapa-7T;Ta<ip.a , arc;. 
Musquito Curtains,^ J6ooyoo?«spw,a*. 

6 xwvwrroXci'yo? , O'J. 
Bedclothes , T0 * ^arrXufxa, aro?. 
Chamberpot , to 1 0.77210 , ete& to 

xaroupXoxc'Ja.aso -j tcu- 
Night-chair , to" wfflua j reo« 
Tablet , * 6 *{«£{■ , axo;. 
Border , Frame , T o v ureoifiwpi. § 

to xtvaoi. 
Chair , § ^ xapg'xXa. vj xaGixXa, 
Carpet , § to' 7Vc6xi , tou. © Ta- 

^v;? , yito;. 
Chest , § to" yoprZict. , to^J- * ri xt- 

(Soto; , W>- 
Bnreau, Clothes Press, § to' jfaftdfeu 
Chandelier-lustre, g *&XosXato;jOtteo. 

to" < !teXu*dvTtX N o > tou- 
Tapestry . T * xfrtvpfE , are;. 
Painting, yi^pacp'K, i&s- ariiSf. The 
art, v] ^to-v'cacp'a-, or -q ^wypaciwc^, ifa. 
Gilding, to' ypuc-iop.a 9 aTO?. 
Statue, to % «•,'<*) pa, aTc?. The art 
of sculpture , * d^dttpaito'ivoifri 5 
i'«c° '-'• «*Y«v.ftaTtTca7iTt)eTa ? r*» 



Bust , * v; frpsTjsuv; , 7i*. 

Pedestal,* T0 ' frecOpov , ou. * $$*. 

<T.? , £0>£. 

Portrait , •£ eCxe'va, fc. 
Cage , to 1 *}xo$i , tou. 

Of the Fireplace. 
/Ta rcifi TTiv xautvov. 

Fire, vi awTifc s ta$. 

Fuel , Coal j, to' § xa'?!5ouvo , cu« * 

avdpftS j aitc?. 
Ashes, Tjf^axTi}, vu» 
Fireside, •$ earta , ■cpouyapo?. 
Burning stick - Fire brand , 6 £ao- 

Xb$, ou> to' £aoXt , tou. 
Log , to' £y).cv 7 eo. 
BelloWS , to' (pUffGOVt , tou. 

Firs-Fan, to' avefitcispw te ^ j 
Brasier, § to' jAayyaX. ? k>o- 
Shovel , to' <pruapt , toy. 
Tongs , § 7) aasta , ta;- r, wopa- 

Tp*> a;. 
Matches, T o' £a£l, too. to 8sia?o- 

xs'pt , tou. 
Steel , 6 TEOpo^oXo; , ou- 
Flint, § to ^-oopvapt , itu. 
Flame, 759X0'^, a^ 
Smoke, 6 xa^vo; , ou. it smokes, 

**«vtCet. 
Soot , vj xawvia j ta;. 

Of Kitchen Utensils. 
Ta <yxeuY) tou ax^tpeiou. 

Spit , 7^ a«u(?Xa , a;. 
Pot-hanger , « xps^aVpa , a;. 
Kettle, Boiler, T o x xaxa'^t 3 tou- 
Copper , § to 1 xatavt , too. to ^zX- 

xwjxa , aTo;. 
Fryingpan , T o Tvj^avt , tou. 
Gridiron , r, ioydpa. , a;. 
Saucepan , § TST^eps's, e. Pipkin, 

b Tapa? > a- 



lender s to 4 rpuwvjTev ? oil 
Skimmer , to* £ac?pi<Hpt , ioS- 
Pitcher, r, cawva , a;. 
"Water- Jug pr Jar,§ to [Mrpixt- icu. 
Fail , § 6 xcu.Sa; , a* 6 at^Xc^ ? cy. 
Pot, § to v r^aux&t > toy. 
Chafing Dish, ftwoSw, so?. 
Grater , to* *yeuc?t > tcu. 
Pestle , to' ^ou^o^spi ? iou. 
Broom , -£ cppoxaXwc , ice:, to ffxpou-a j 

ttTCc §ri axouTraj «;• 

C osier, § r, iNtt&tptfpet , a-. 

Of Cellar Articles. 

Ta r*nc otvcSw,;. 

Hammer , to' cowl , v»y. 
Cask , ro €gut# , icy. 
Barrel , T 6 BapsXi , tcu. 
Funnel , to x*>»« • «$• 
Bung , to ^-ourwjjt,* , «to;- 
Wine , T b xpacl , iou. 
Dregs, Sediment, Vj rpwy« , «-. 
beer , * 6 £66o;, ou- § to fAiripo*, a;. 
Must, § 6 jmrS^ooo 5 ** To*yXeu<w;, ouj. 

Belonging to the Door. 
Ta tvI; 8uoa;. 

Key, to xXet^t, toy. Picklock or 

False Key. , T o dvrtxXe&h , k». 
Lock,^ xX=t<$ae'.a, ix;.r, jeXs&Jovia, ia;« 
Bolt , 6 wspinusj ». * o fio^Xoj j 3 r j. 
Hinge , 6 ps£; , e. 
Threshold , T o JMfrwcpXotov , cu. 
Beli, § V) x.aurravs'XXa , a;. 
Small Bell, xoug^guv. , iou. 

0/ &£&/e Articles. 
Ta £Osi(j>co'ji.eva etg tgv £«3Xoy« 

Hay, TO y:CTCV, O'J. TO £eOT«Sl» »3. 

Straw, res a/;jca , uv. 



i 7 3 

Stubble , r, xaXauia, ta;. 

Trough , r, (jparw} , «$. to itos.'/yl, touj 

Manger, Rack, § T a xi-yxsXXa* 

Bran , tcc TriTUpet j cov. 

Curry Comb, $ £u?pa, «&, 

Barley, to xpidopi, wy. 

Oats , r, Spo'uY) , yi;. * c afyiXo^j (Di»0^- 

Sieve, to koVxevqvj cu. 

Horse , to dko-pv , cu. 

Mule, § to txouXapi , iou- 

Ass , 6 vat^aco; , ou. to fa^cupi, wu« 

to -ycaa'ct , iou , this last signifies 

also a load. 
Groom , * d fcrroxo'pog j cu. 

0/ « Garden. 

Ta Eupidxo'ffsva et? to icspi^o'XtOv* 

Bed , iq Tvpaer.a , tao 

Scarecrow, to a/.'.aVpovjcu. r sxwcJCTpa- 

Trellis, -ft irup-puXia , tag. r, xpe(W 

rapta , ta?- 
Arbour, * to cxr.vuaa, aTo;. 
Ptose , to TptavraepuXXov , cu. f t rptav- 

■^aouXXia , ias« 
Jasmine or Jessamin, § to ^ias=- 

^ (*.! , OU. 

Pink j § to ^apo'cpaXo , oy. 

Lily , to Kptvov ) ow. 

"\ iclet, to tcv, tcu iou. S to fiavoufftj.. 

iou. 
Hyacinth, 6 uasuvSc;, ou. 
Poppy , 6 «.v^:c6)v, cove;. 6 XaXe£. 
Apple tr?e etc. See page 167, 
Box, to ■sculcept , iou. 
Pine Tree , S ^euxc;, eu. 
Fir , d eXxTo; ? cu. 
Oak , y, ^gus , uo ? . ( to ^e'vc?pov. ) 
Poplar , 4 Xeujog ^ ^ ; . 
Elm, y; fljrsXata, etaj. 
Lime, ^ylXupa, a;. $ «ptXwpeta> eta;. 
Beech, * Tjcpy^o; , cj. 
Myrtle , r, ^-joto;. 
Thyme, 6 5-ao; , ou. 
Nursery, to euTtiptov } feu- 



174 

Ivy , 6 xt£$$e , ou 6 xiceap'/i; , vj. 
Arm , Limb , T 'o xXwMapt , iou. 
Branch, to xXk^I, icy. 
Wood, Forest, T d ^«' ffo; , cuc . 
Shade, vj octa , toe;, d i'<mo; , iou. 
Basin , Pond , Reservoir , § $ ^ a - 

S3au£a , ac. •fi ^s|«^evn , vj;. 
Canal , Conduit ,' * T q aiXoixi , iou. 
Ditch, § to xav^eext. 
Spade, to Xiavip;, teCi, 

Dignities, 

A £Ccop,&Ta. 

.Emperor , © S«crtXsu$ , fog. 6 ai>To- 

/CpaTwp , opo;. Empress , r, fiaov 

Ataaa, y;;, or a;- tj auTOxpaTo'picf- 

ca , a;. 
King , 6 prrya;, a. 6 paatXeu;. Queen, 

71 Paci'Xioroa. 
Prince, § d wpiyYuJi, wo;. 6 auk'v^jjjvji 

Princess , 71 7rpi-yxi7v£<j<Ta« tj ku- 

p(a , ias- 
Duke , S^av , ovoc § £ou£ , 

ocuxo';. Duchess, ^ TVyefAovl;, .t&c- 
Count, Earl , Countess , g d , r ; xd- 

[xyi;, tito;* 7) xo'ar,ff<ja, a;. 
Marquis , § 6 {Mcpxwco;. Marchio- 
ness , y] ttapxeciva ? a;. 
Baron, 5 6 SapSvos 3 eu. 
Baroness , § ■£ ga.?a.vi<je*; 
Knight , iifkehq . s'co;. 
Ambassador , § j fl^ , y. * J 

irpec&j; 9 eco;. 
Governor , 6 sirapxo? > eu. 
Consul, § 6 xo'$oXo;, ou. * irps'Cs- 

vo;, cu- 
Vice L.Onsul , 6 avTiirps^ve^i 
Lord Chancellor, Keeper of the 

Seals, [/i^a; Xo^oQsrn;. 
Chancellor , § 6 xa-YXsXXaptoj , wu. 

§ c xavT£sXispn; , yi. 
Superintendant Steward, Bailiff, 

« eiriTpeiroi > su. 



Treasurer , * Syisaupo^uXa^ * axe;/ 
President, 6 wpo'e£poc> bu. 
Counsellor , * 6flouXeM« , oO: I 

ouft^euXo; > ou. 
Judge , ^uaq-'Pi; , ©u. 6 xbit^; , ou- 
Barrister, 6 ouvY^'opc; , ou. 6 £1x0- 

Xo'-yc; , ou. 
Attorney, d evToXeu;, &*g. 
Secretary , 4 w«pjtix-ff6e , lag, 6 

Xo-pOsTV);. 
Magistrates , ©1 ap^ovTc; , o'vtcov. 
Common - Council-Men , ot £vr 

jLtO^Sp&VTS; , o'vtwv. 

Primates - Chieftains , si wpcc«7a)T£;; 

MTCOV. 

Notary , § vwrxpic; ^ iou. 
General , 6 ^pcar/yd; > ou. 
Generalissimo , Commander in 

Chief , cipytq-pjcTYi'Yo; , cu- 
Cavalry General , Commander of 

tl].e Horse , d frnrocpx *' 
Lieutenant General, 6 ^tecr^h^ ov* 

6 Ta^t'apy 4 0.; > cu. 
Major General, d uttccpottyrYa;.* ou. 
Colonel , d yj.Xtxp^o; , cu. 
L. Colonel , 6 urrsxtXiap^o; y ou. 
Major, 6 avuxcXiapxc;. 
Captain , 6 sxaTo'vTotpxo;} ou- 
I. st Lieutenant, * 6 avdsxaTcvrar^o;. 
IL<* Lieutenant , Subaltern , 4 0^- 

xaTo'vrapxc;. 
Quarter Master , 5 5-016 jio^otvj; , cu. 
Sergeant , © ^e^a^apx ? ' cu * ^^ r ' 

geant Major , 6 wp©To^exa^as&' 

^o;,. ou. 
Corporal, d ueara^apx*? > cu * 



Army , to <rpaTeuu.a ^ ctTc;. 
Division, * $(to'pa>«c» 
Brigade , * ^ 7ijAi{ioft*> i«Cr 
Regiment , to TofyjA* ^ aTo;- 
Bataliion , d Xj^o; ^ ou. Square , 

to wXivfiicv , t'cu. 
Troop , -^ t'Xri , yi; ? 
Company ? 7igt>i[%>z> a;. 



£orporai'« party , 3 m^ii , &<* 

Hank, <$ frf3«, ou. 

File , o cfyo? , ou« 

Infantry- Footsoldier , I fffi $¥ , ©5. 

Horseman , * fo^us , so;. 

Infantry , r b irtfucw. o{ *«&,'. 

Troops of the Line , T d foXtTtxa'v. of 

cfrXitai. Light Infantry , & l tyXw* 

cl eD£&>voi. 
Cavalry, T o irrrn/co'v- ou^7rsTj. 
Cuirassier, ae»pajco<?opos, w. 
Dragoon, o<$\>a X c ? , «u. 
Lancer, 6 /.ovTo^opos, ou. 
Trumpeter, coXwt^s , cu. 
Artillery, § dprttttyi* Cannon, 

§ to row. 
Gunner, § 5 ¥0***$?* f|. 
Sentry , $ ^aw , jfc, PatroS.e 

_ Picket , § T o xo'Ui , iou. 
Pioneer, e^wedip , vjpo;. 
Spy, Scout, 6 xaTccffKoir*?', ou. 
Standard a Colours , Ensign , Vj 

B %f*ge , ^ dffocrxeu^ , to I am 
packing up , cu ff xsua'^cw , aor 

Admiral, r ^par^o? , c vauapyo? , cu. 
Captain of a Ship of the line, 6 r ? «.r r 

( P a P"/.'^? > oy • 
Captain of a frigate or Smaller 

Vessel, 67roTfriidp«p^o$ j ou. 
First Lieutenant, 6 avTtTp«jp«p X os,cu. 
Midshipman , I Hsst.^xu^qq , cu. 
Pilot , Tvpapsus , SO};. 
Boatswain , 6 xeXeusro , cu. 
Fleet , 6 <ro'Xo;. § -h apua^ct- 
Squadron , 6 fu>cpo$ 5-0X0$. 
Flotilla , 6 5-oXi'ffxo? , ou. 
Ship , Vessel , to tcXoiov. to xapafc. 

Ship of the line , xaoaraxTixo'v. 

Three-decker, rptirXou'v. rp-^pco- 

Tsv. two-decker , £«s3louv. <ft- 

r?wrcv. 

Frigate, § ■■ ^psfar*, «;. 
Corvette , § T 6 xopSeT-rev > eu» 
I*~ig , § ?fc Ppiki'ov , icu, 



I75 

Appertaining to Porttficaiion. 

T« 7T£Ol TflV O^upwffty. 



Citadel, * V) dcxpo'-oXt* , s<a;. § x% 
<ppoupiov > lOU'j 



xacpo , cu. 
Fort, Castle, * t j 0,30,5 

§ t8 xoi<rpo , & 
Arsenal, $ fa\*Mm , to 

Walls , t'X niy^ , wv. 

Rampart, re | ?Uf ^. 
Palisade, to x.apK^w^.K , ara^' 
Bastion Tower , 6 irfpj* , ou. 
Battlements , 3 &r«X?t« , eg>;. 
Curtain , T o jjief awrup-Ytov , £cu. 
Siege, ^ TToXtooxta , t«?. 
Capitulation, $ »%p|«« ? , ew5 . 
Sortie, yj e>c%ofAYj, to 
Assault , ^ Tet W *#a, i« ; . £ wpo ^ 
ffSoXfl ^ to 

Professions, Trades, 

'En&.fyiXy.XTot. xal Te£vs«. 

Printer , £ Turoypofyoc * cj. 
Physician , $ £etx-po« , ou. 
Surgeon, • xeipoupyoc, ou. 
Druggist , Apothecary , i ^^ %K0 - 

7:w\nc, , ou. 
Barber , § 6 pfeftppi&put , yj. *' 5 

xo'jpsu; j e'w^. 
Baker , 6 (^w}i,a^ , «. 
Butcher, § 6 p-axeXXa'pto; , cou. * 5 

JcpetairMXius ^ ou. 
Vintner ; Tavern -Keeper, § 5 Ta=3 

PepvapTis , yj. 6 5cpa50ivwXTO 
Shop-keeper , 6 epya^pta'pTO. »• 
lailor , © pa^TV); , vi- 
Boot- maker, u-o^ixacra,- , a. 
Shoe-maker , 6 w«ivouT?yi? , vi. 
Cobler , § 6 (XTraXw^aTas 5 a- 
Sculptor, 6 «yaXjAaT0tt8i$s , ou» 
Painter , 6 ^wypottpoj , ou. 
Carpenter , © weXexavoc, cu. 
Builder , Mason , Brick-layer -, & 

*Tt5-nf-> vj or ou. 



Locksmith , 6 xXsto'apa<; , a. 
Miller , 6 p.uXava; , a. 
Laundress , % 7rXuq>a ? &<;. 
Goldsmith , 6 yp-jcrcyooi; > o'cu. 
Comedian, Player, Actor, 6 {J7ro-« 

XptTTQ? j OU- 

Musician, 6 p.ouar«.>cb$ , oy- 

Armourer, 6 oTrXoirotos j» ou. 
Porter, 6 (^a^d^os, ou« 6 a^Gowops? , ou« 
Cook, 6 {xit-yctpac > a 6 jxa-yEtpo;, ou* 
Gardener , * 6 wiroupoo ou. 6 ^e^t* 

poXdpvji; , *;. 
Vine-dresser , 6 dptirsXoup"p; , cu* 
Ploughman , 6 fcu-f d; , a- 

Bodily Imperfections. 

2w|xc4Tt>ia eXatrtop.aTato 

One-eyed , |AovoG8aXp.oc * 5 , •«• 

£T£pdcp8aX|A0«j, 6 , y> 
Blind , <rpa$6s » vj y ov- TUcpXo?» 7i * ov. 
Cross eyed , aXXYiGopo? , v> , ov. 
Hump-backed , Kau.7roufY); , a. pd- 

jtfrins > taca- 
JLame, xout'Cqi; > x > o'v > y/oXb;, r, , o'v» 
Deaf , noun's ? r > ov. 
Dumb , fkuSos , ri , ov. 
Stammerer, TpauX*$,Yi, ov* 
Bald , <paXax,pb$ , e , i. 
Dwarf , o vavo? , ou. 
Giant, 6 -yifavrocs » a« 

Accidents Diseases, etc. 
'ATUy^'^aTa x.al a^poi^tou- 

Happiness, Luck> ■& eu^atfxovta, tots- 

r, ejTuyJa : ca;. , 
Misfortune , f, ^ucruyja ? ta;. 
Chance , vj tu*/v). to' dutojiarov ? ou. 
Invalid, appw<ro<;,- 6, & dvsn{X7ropo? ? y> f 

cv. he is unwell , &h ru,7ropjT. 
Sickness , Disease , Ailment, -ft dp- 

pw^ta j taj. •yj vo'soc ? cj. to 4 ir«- 

Oo-: , ou. 



OU. 6 tt'jpSTO; , ou. 

Ague , rd auyxpua , 6<av. to £"70$ , 
ou;. the fit is on him , to\ yjxOe 
to' pt^o?. 

Shivering 1 , ac dvaf pt^'Xat?. A shiver*- 
ing has seized him , T ov v,X0o,m 
dvscTp'.^iXoti-: • dvcitpt^ixcoc s Av«- 

Tpl^lcXCJAa- 

Gout , 7) ^o^a-ypot , a?» 

Colic , xtoXtJco'irovo?. 

Measles , vj Kuostyi^K , «?• ?; £$f«xts» 

Small-pox , r iutap& , id-, he is 
pock-*marked, pock- fretted, fya 
tuXo-ytaT?. eiva* euXo^taafisvo;. 

Itch , if] <J;«pa , 014. 

Scrofula , at ^atpa&g; ? wv. 

Abscess , to ! d-jvcV^fta j aro?. to 1 * 
cr7rup(» 

Swelling , to' Trp*/i<7p;a ? «toc- ( 

Scratch , to' ^ou^pavtcraa ? ato;- 

Slap, Smack , Box , § 6 ^tz^Iq^ 
* < f » 

to paTrcTao. j arc;. 

Swoon, r, Xi*yo9u{Aia, ia;. r, XqoadpajC^ 
Death , 6 Oavaro? , eu- 

reptiles and Insects, 



epr*Tcc xat evTorxa. 

Ffog , Pafpa^o? j ou. |3aOpa;':6c > ^*« 
Snail , oraXia^bs ^ ou- 
Spider , r, dpa^vrj ? ^5. 
Serpent,- T 6 cpt^t ^ tou- 
Butterflly , r t ^eraXcu^a ? ac- 
Fly , vi p,uqa , a;. 
Musquito , to kouvoutj ? wu» 
Caterpillar , V3 XdXa , as- 
Worm , to <yy.cuXr>-t 5 i*a» 
Louse , ri t^eTpa j a;. 
Flea, 'iuXXo; , ou* 
Bug , 6 jioptb; , tou. 
Ant , tj p.uoa^^y.'. ? iou* 



Rural Objects 

&oad , c £po'tAcs ? ou* 

Wain, § o y.afiTTo? , oo. r, iti§i.i§<X}&--- 

Valley , r , xotXa<5a , a?. 

Mountain, to (3ci»dv,oyV* to opG§. cu;. 

Wood , to ^ac7c; , o;. 

Hedge , 7, «ppafcT7) , y;- 

Tree , T o ekv^pov , o»* 

lS r est , yj ipcoXaia , etas* 

Corn , rb aiTapt . icu- 

Turf j Verdure , r, 77pa<nva<5\x , a?. 

Meadovr , to X$c$i , tou. * 6 XetpStv 

£>vo;. 
Lake , Pond, 71 Xtuvy , n;. 
Rocii , £pa/_c; , cu. 
Rivulet , to puaiei , tou- 
ixiver , '6 ?rc-afxoc » ou- 
Bridge , to -yeccupt , icu. 
Marsh , £ CaXro; , ou- marshy , 

BaX7M(5ViS ? 6 , 7]. 
Mill , 6 jauXc; ? ou. Wind-mill , 
avsaojAuXc;. Water -mill. vs- 
' pc'auXo?„ 
Tillage, to y^piov to x«ot6 ? tcu* 

Appertaining to a Town. 

Town, City, r, y.topa, a;. * woXt^ ceo?. 
Church , vi sxaXycta , ta;. 
Hospital , '" to vc<jo>ccp.siov , eicu. 

§ to ciznik'. , tou. 
Market , § to ?ra£apt , tou* § ts 

T^apal , tcii. 
Port, 6 Xiu.iva; > svo;. 
Custom House , § to xouuupx.t, ttu- 

TO TcXtOVlGV , IGU« 

Prison , § 7) yd^n , y;. y epuXaxy, y*;- 
Coach, Carriage, T b ka-i, icu- 
Shop- Workshop, to ep-yasvipiov, tou, 
Magazine , § to ^.a^alt, iau. * r. 
avc6TiX7) > y;. 

Colours, 
W 7 hite , ao-Trpc; , y , ov. 
Black , p.aupo; , y , ov. blackish , 



ja&Mxftilii y 5 oV jj.JtuQic£p4c, x, o'v. 
Red , jto'jexivoe , vj , cv- Reddish , 

JiOOCtVttTTO; , y , o'v. 

Green, irpsfotvcs 9 y, , cv- 

Yellow, xtTpivc;, r, , ov. yellowish , 

xtTpivwrro; 3 y ? c'v. 
Blue , p.a(3u;> eta, u. sky-blue upa» 

voeuH; , 6 $ y. 
Grey, ^axToet^sj c,r,. ash-coloured, 

Violet , * i'ocic^v,; , 6 , t. 

Minerals. 
Gold , 6 xpu^o? ■> co. to pa'XatAiiaj 

a-c?. adj , [j.aXaa.aaT£vtc;, ta, tov. 
Silver , 6 apppc;, cu. Todayui, t2 j. 

adj , aay^svto; , ta ? to>>. Silver 

Coin ,j Money , T a aairpa, 

Plate, Ta acryp.t/toc- 
Iron , * au^ypo; , cu. tc c:<hpov, ou. 
Lead, to pwXufJt , tcu. 
Copper , 6 X aXxb; , su. § t& pira- 

xtpt, tou. 
Brass, § to xaXdt, i'cu. 
Tin , 6 -nrdcpuXa; ? a- 
Sulphur , to Setae?- , tou- 
Glass , to OaXt > tou. 
Verbs* 
To Study , awou^octw. aor. <r a , ©? 

fa part. pass, apivo;. chapduo , 

aor. aa.. part. pass. cpivc;. 

— Learn, p.a6atvw. by heart , — 
p.aQaivw airs?w , d^o^yOttw. — 
rehearse , Xe'70 aw'e^w. mentally, 
dirb jie'ea. 

— Read , £iaj3a£o> , dvay.vwcxw, 
like, -j'lvwfficto. 

— Sign , uwypacpM. 

— Seal, § €o'j)Xo'v(o. cra»pa-v'''^<o« 
-— Fold , ^iTvXdvw. spread, qa.tXo'vwf 

aor. toaa. part, pass, tojxsvo?. 

— Correct , <hop6oW aor. <o©a 
partic. pass. ^opOcopivos. 

lEfiace, c^uvu. irr. 

Translate, p.£Ta©p«^«. aor. <ya. part. 



pass. «y. w ;,. 



i3 



To Continue, ij[etx*Xoud$> et; 9 6r«£. 

Finish , reXeiovw. aor. w<ja. part, 
pass. wf/,svo?. 

Do , make , xaavw^ in*. 

Know , ^e»p«>. irr. 

To be able , * <$uvatX«i. irr. 

Pronounce , wpocpego). 

Accentuate , rovt^w. aor.><^. part, 
pass. fffAevo.g. 

Say, speak, Xs'yw. converse , fy.t- 
X« , si?. 

Prattle , chatter, § Xa*pi£eu&>. Xa- 
X5> , et?« 

Ba w i , vociferate , cry , <pcDva£o>« 
aor. |at. 

Open , avofyw. aor. rIvoi<fa. Adj 
instead of part: past , avowry, 
H, o'v , opened. 

Shut , *$ «Xyu , a-, aor. ncrx- part 
pass. c^aXvic^£;o?" common in- 
stead of pa Ft. past, adj er<p<xXr 

<?QS , VI , OV. 

To be silent ,. gm-xa , «;. aor. ^orx* 
Call, jcpat^o) , aor. £«. 
Answer, a7rottptvop.au aor. Oviv- 

Of eating and drinking. 

To drink , -reivw. 

Eat, Tpw-yeo. 

Masticate, chew, ymsa , e?$ ? aor. 

vjt>a- part. pass, yipivo?. 
Swalicw , xaTraTTtvo. 
Cut , xoTTTb). aor. ^«. part. pass. 

sco p. p.£vo?. 
To clean , wash, rjrtse, ttXuvw aor. 

sVXuva- pass. swXuGVjv. part. pass. 

-TrXup.e'vo^. 

— Fast , v73seu&). aor. c«. 

- — Dine', -^yep-at. aor. g-ysuS.viv. to 

breakfast , 7rpo*y£Uop.x;. 
• — Sup , S'stiuvw ,eT?. or 5;. aor. vicra. 

— Get drunk to intoxicate one- 



self 



5 \> 



p.£9fi> 



>or. ua«. 



— Satisfy., and t© be satisfied , airXuTo$,«v 



X«?Tatvo. aos. e/ZpTaca. f>art, 

pass. yopracrij.Evoc. See p. 88. 
To Be hungry , U£lv s> ,- «-. aor. 

acra. part., pass. wetvac;p.svo$- y 

hungered. 
— - Thirsty, £i<J/a>, a?, aor. affa . part. 

pass. ^aap.s'vo? , thirsty. 

About going to bed and rising. 
To go to bed , irXa-yia&w. aor. $&* 

— Rise, get up, crjxa'vo^ai.pass- 

of gyijco'vw. 
- — Sleep, jcotp.S>p.&i. 
*»■ Make" sleep , airojcstpC^o , jwr 1 

p.i^w. aor. <ya. part. pass, %ct~ 

p.i<jp,s'vo;. 

— Go to sleep , aw©)totp,S>p.at. aor, 
tq9viv- 

— Awake , or keep watch, a-YpuTC- 
vw , si;, aor. r,<ra. £tp.at i'lurrvo; , 
elysrvb? , yi , o'v. 

- — Repose, rest oneself, geseoupff- 
£op.at. aor. gOyiv-. part. pass, £e<* 

XGl»p(XGp.£VO;. 

. — - Dream, 6veipsuop.au aor. 6r,v. 

— Snore , po-^aXc£o>. aor. ox. 

— Awaken , — rouse oneself 
^uiwu , a;, aor. y^a. whence, 
£uti;vy)t6?, t j o'v , sprightly lively. 

- — Dress, Iv^uvw , aor. oa . to dress 
oneself, £v£uvcp.at. aor. 6r,v. part. 
pass. ev^upivo;- dressed. 

— Undress , ss^uvw. aor. aa . mu 
dress oneself, £ 'x£uvop.au aor. 6nv* 
part. pass, e/.oupivo? , undrest. 

— Comb r xt£v(Cw. aor. <ja- comb 
oneself , xT6vi?ofi.ai aor. sOnv. 
part. pass, jcTEvicpivo?. combed* 
oVrsVigo; , o , V) , uncombed. 

— Wash , ttXuvw , viSw , aor. 4'oCf 
wash oneself, <rcXyvop.au vt£op.ai^ 
aor. co0r ( v. part. pass, vtp.u.s'vo> 

;vt<pTo«, 6 , • ■«. unwashed- 



Jo Paint, qma'vo(/.cH aor. G 8r,v. part. 

pass. , ap,svo? , from , cpriavco- to 

make , 

Common actions. 
To Laugh , ^eXw , a?, aor. aca. 

— Weep , jc).ct(co. irr. 

• — Sigh , ^eva&rt.'avas-Sva&a. aor. i-a. 

— Breathe , ava-^vs'co. irr. avacaivw. 
aor. ava. 

- — Sneeze (jprepviCoaai. aor. eursp- 

— Gape , yawn , ^affjioupsiou^at. 
aor. ri0Yiv. 

— Blow, puff, TOUffto, a?, aor. r,ca, 

— Whistle , snp'Zai- cyuoi'Cu. 

•*- Listen , hearken, axoozUpzi. 

aor. rr^odoHf. 
! — Hear , «>ccu0. aor. ca. part. 

pass,, a^'vo;. 

— Feel , a i<y8a'vop.«t. aor. aicdavSviy.- 
■ — Spit, cpt6(j). aor. era- 

— Blow or wipe the nose , a ~o- 
[j.'jliZ.o. . aor. tea- snuff the candle, 
§ Izftikifa. aor. ca. part. pass. 
valve'?, 

-*- Perspire , t^povta. aor. W ca. part. 

pass. i^:o)^3v»;. in perspiration. 
i — Wipe^ccfou-p/^cD , aor. ? «. part. 

pass, ffjisvo?- 

— Tremble , Tp=|tw. 

— Cough , (jrr/o. aor. £ tt . 

■ — Pinch, § T&fMwS , a?, aor. yjaa. 

— Scrape, scratch, scrub, £ug>. irr. 
- — Tickle, ^ap^aXCCo. 

Actions of kindness hatred etc. 

To love , a-ya^co , a;, aor. vj«a part. 

pass, r.y.svo;. 
Caress , ywJeuca. aor. ca. part. 

pass, p.s'v:;. 
Flatter , xeXaxeuo. aor. ca- part. 

pass. a=vc;. 
Make much of , court friendship } 

Wcpncoiou {/.at? aor. r,0riv- 
Embrace, * fteTr«&it«i. <*-fxaX^o{A«tj 



r 79 

aor. cflviv. part. pass.,o^)caX:ff^e'voj. 
Kiss , cptXcb , el; , or «;. aor. vi«y«. 
Salute , ^atpsTia , a;, wpccxuvw , Etjy 

aor. y,ca. 
Teach , (Svj'a'axct). IpfjunveiStD. 
Nurse, nurture, bring up, rps'ftt* 

aor. 6 a . part. pass. OpspifcEvc?. 
Suckle, po"Cavto. aor. Ha. part. pass. 

Punish , wat<hu&>. aor. ca. part. 

pass. pivo?. 
Commend , praise , l^atvw , eT?i 

s-rratvoup.at. aor. sOnv- 
Blame, accuse, y.'Azrqopa , etj, 
Give, ^to , irr. /.apt^u, aor. ck; 
Procure , «po|Arj8s6co, aor. ca. part. 

pass. p.s'v&-. 
Deny, apvouffat. aor. xGyiv. 
Hinder , gp,«o£i£a. aor. ca- part, 

pass, cusve-. 
Defend, urspac-ju^oaat. §<hacp£vTc£&)o 

aor. sa. part. pass. p,evo;. 
Beat, strike , <h'pve>. irr. *tuit& a?. 

aor. yjca, part. pass. , r,u.:vo;. 
Hate , p.iao, si?- aor. visa, part, 

pass. Yijiivos* 
Drive away , ^wo^vw. aor. £a. part, 

pass, -yjins'vc?. 
Pardon , cuy/wpo) , a!?, aor. visa, 

part. pass. «pivoc . 
Dispute, <ptXoveixw , si-, quarrel, 

scold , paXovto. aor. w©a- part. 

pass, (ops'vo;. 
Protect, ^pco^a-cjw. aor. ca uirepa- 

qwi^ofiuai. aor. «8t:v- part. pass. 

cus'vo;. 
Abandon , I-yxaTaXei?*©.. leave 3 

acpivw ? irr. 
Fear, be afraid of, acpcuu.ai, stoat, 

and wai. aor. efflo[H6?jv; part, 

pass, cpo'o'.cjxs'vc;. 
Frighten, cpo£i&>. aor. ca. threaten^ 

cpc[jcp ; ^o , aor. ca. 
Tremble ( with fear ) T pcus£a 9 

a<er. £*; part. pass, -r^opocc^vc^ 



To observe, see, look at, [5),Ei7w.irr. 

joTra^o). aor. \%. 6swf w , £15. aor. 

vicra. part. pass. , yip,s'voc> 
Move , Ktvw , sT;, and &;. aor. v>ca, 

part. pass. , yjpivoc;, 
Examine, e£s-a£w. aor. oa. part. 

pass. , o|xs'vo ? . 
Smell «<:£ and neut , p,upi£co. aor* 

era. rt sup.opcpov rptavrdcpuXXov, p.u- 

ptas to. what a fine rose, <S7/Z£// it, 

p,uj>i£si jco-Xa , it smells well. 

Of Diversion and Amusement. 

Divert, amuse oneself, ^taotEc^to, 

£scpav~o'v to. § s-yXevt^w , aor. era. 
Sing, rpa-pxSw, ei? and £;, aor. vicra. 
Dance , xopEoo , aor. era. 
Jump , leap , m^S , a;, aor, vjcra. 
Play , Tral&a. aor. 5*. 
Ride, § jcaPaXXiasuco. 
Gain , xEpcWfco. aor. era. jcspcfaivw. 

aor. ava. part. pass. n\i.Uo$. 
Lose , xavco. aor. acra. part. pass. 

^apivo?. 
Bet,j3d^to q oiyrn&ci.. £ot£Y]p.aT(£io=aor.cra 
Risk , javdWuo) aor. era. 
Joke, ^topaxeuco- aor. era- [/.sTwpl^o^ai, 
Stand C upright) gsxop,ai op8o'?. 
Bend, scXivto. aor. va. part.pass. pivo$. 
Stoop , aaucpTto. aor. <},«. whence ., 

ewjcpTO? , *a » ov , stooping. 
Turn , ppifra. aor. oa. part pass. 

ertxe'vo;. 
Stop , (jajxarw cc'xop.at. irr. 
Walk . TFep'.^aTco , eTg- aor. vicrot. 
Walk forward , 7vpo7raTfi>., et«. *&e, 

TfarS). 
Go, TTYi^atvw. irr. 
Come, 1'px.op.at. irr. 
Remain, pivco. >cd6op.as irr. 
Run , rpf/w. irr. 
Follow, ajcoXou85> , va , and «?. aor. 

r/cra , part. pass, vjae'vo;. 
Escape , ^Xutovw. aor. wsa. 



To set off, or out , ^tcrsuw. a©r. «* 

epsu'yw , irr. ava^wpo>. 
Advance , irpo^wpw , si/, aor. r,ca;» 

part. pass. y^sW. 
Remove from , d77op,a>cpuvio. axop.a- 

jcpu\op.ai. aor. uvGviv, part, pass, 

divop.axpucrp.svo?. 
Approach , act and neut, bring 

near, 7rXYicrta£M. eps'pto jcovrd, IV 

^ojiat jeovTot* 
Fall , iTscprw. irr. 

Slide, slip , <yXu<rpfi> , 5«. aor. 73^ 
Arrive, ep9a'v&>. irr. 
Enter , ep^aivw. irr. 
Go out , ep-vutveo , irr. 
Ascend , dvai(3aiv&> , irr. 
Descend , KaTaipacvu. irr. 
Hurry act, (Stock*, aor. ff a. hasten 

«<?« , |3icf£op,at. aor. <j6yiv. part. 

pass. ap.£v55- 
Begin , apy tv« , a?, aor. yjcra. part; 

pass, vifjuevo?* dpj^ta. aor. ua. part* 

pass.. er^e'vo{. 
Help , aid, p.aTa7uavo>. aor. era* 

part. pass. apivoc;. 
Succour , pon8a> , els* aor. ■« era- 
part, pass. y)p.s'v,oc. 
Grasp, seize, hold firmly, xpara* 

ets, aor. vicra^ 
Cure , tarpeu^. Ospairaueo. aor. era. 
Bleed f epXEl3orop.fi>, eT?. eS-yce^eo alp.a* 

Of buying etc. 
Ask the price , epwrfi) rriv Tip-rlv* 

wo'cra e'x,ei- Tco'oa § &tse;i£st. 
Measure ; p,£Tpfi> , eT; , and a;. 
Buy , dfopd^ta. aor. era. part. apivo^ 

at a high price , dearly, dwtgi(3a. 

cheaply , gu8v!va. for nothing, 

for a song, ^aptcrp,«. 
Sell , TPtoXS , sis- aor. nera part. pass. 

Yijuvog. 
Pay , icXvipovu. aor. ©era- part. 

pass. ©pivas. 
Offer, 7ipoercp£eo>. <p/po)° 



i8i 



101 
To propose, Trpo^ocXXw. aor. inpo€aX<£ To Cover , exiizxfal aor. era. part 
hend , £avsi£w. aor - w. borrow , 

<$\xvei£oj/.at- aor. c9r ( v. 
Cheat , cajole , fsX£> , a;, aor. act. 

xax. pass. oOviv. part. pass. <rtXa- 



pass. CU.1V0;. 
Uncover', ^scocercaCw , dvaxaXuTvtu , 



Manual Acts. 
Work , IfYa^ofjiai. aor. crGv)v. <^ou- 

Xeu». aor. c?a- part. pass. pive;. 

*cTCta£w , aor. ©a- 
Touch, lay hold of, inavw. aor. ex. 

ifyiCtt- aor - act - ?«■ aor - pass. 

X^viv- part. pass. s-^i^uivo;. 
Handle , p,aXacrcr<«>. $¥jXaf&* 
Bind, tie , <h'vw. irr. 
Untie, unbind , loose, x6<o, aor. 

ex. part. pass. ii.evo$> 
Leave, dtatveo. irr. 
Remove, take away, ip-fateo. irr. 
Take , we'pvw. irr. 
Draw , drag, Tpa£o>, a?, aor. act. 

rj;a. pass, ifyfaiv. part. pass. rpa- 

3*^u.=vo;. withdraw , TpaPs'.cojAxt. 
Fly, 778-w, a;, aor. a£a. 
Rob , steal , xXenro). aor. ^ a . part, 

pass. p.u.j'vo?. 
Search , rummage , M%w, aor. £a. 
Gather , <juva£ia. aor. £%. part. pass. 

Collect , paScvw. aor. «$a. part. 

pass. , ti>u.2vo?. 
Present , Trpocjcpspw. wappvicta^u. 

aor. ax, part. pass, euAvo;. 
Receive, <h'xcu.ai. oar. iktfw Adj 

Sextos, W 5 ov. 
Squeeze , ccp-^w. aor. |«, part. 

pass, -yiAs'vo?. 
Hold , ga^w, a?, aor. a£a. jcoxtu, si? , 
Fiend, tear, C7 vci, as- aor. x<jx. part. 

pass, cjracf/.c'vo;. 
Spoil , destroy , xa Xv« , a?, aor. 

e^aXaffa. part. pass. ^aXa<r 4 u.evo;. 
Crush, ffuvrptSo, like rp$». 
'Hide, xp-jTTTw. aor. 6a. part. pass. 

imsvoj. 



aor. ijiz, part. pass. ^5704. 
Soil , § Xepo'vw. aor. <a<ja. 
Clean , Tra^pe-jw. aor. era. 
Rub , t^'!3o>. aor. act. tyx. pass. 

srpiSviv and erptcpQ'/iv. part. pass. 

Tpia;j.£vo;. 
Scratch, £ou-fr?avi£&>. aor. coc. part. 

pass cjxs'vo;. 
Paint, ^pa^o), oar. iex- part, 

pass, cas'vo?. 
Engrave , yxXwypxya sv/aparto; 
Draw , outline, -Ypjfow. ipcA'pa'pS^sTc? 
Sketch , CTyj^ia^o. aor. era- 
Embroider, xevTU) el«. or <£?. aor.r.ax» 
Gild , vpudovw. aor. waa. 
Plate , a<T^u.o'v». aor. ©tya* 
Print , t'jtto'vw. aor. <acra. 
Build , x~[£g>- aor. ax. part. pass. 

Plough , op^ovw. aor. wcra. 

Kill , GxoTo'vo). tpoveuto. oneself, ctjmto- 
vop.at- 

Wound , TrXYiyo'vco. Xa£o'v». 

Saw , irptovtC&>. aor. ex. 

Sail , tpXsw. ap^£vtCw* 

Rov/ , xcoTT'/iXarw, si;. rpa(3a> TOxourcU' 

Carry, cpe'pw and <pe'pva>. aor. act. sips- 
pa. aor. pass, scpipdviv- part. pass. 



py.s'vo;. whence , veoospuivc; , 



<psp r > 

newly arrived, 



aor* era- part, 
part. 



ass. 



Transport , xoy{3aXi£ta 

pass, ci/.cvc?- 
Pound , xoiravifo- aor. era 

pass, cru-svo;. 
Bake, ^vu. aor. vjcr*. part, p 

^•niAsvc?. whence , to <j J /5rov. 
Boi!, Bpa^co. aor. era part.pass. cras'vo;. 

whence , T o Spa^-ov , boiledmedt. 
Fry , Tr^av^w. aor, ex- part.pass. 

0a?VO^v 



I 82 

Operations of the Mind. 
To remember, ev8upou|jiai, sloai and, 

aarai- aor. viOnv- 
Remind , IvQua^to- aor. ca- 
Forget, Xmo^ovco) eis* £ex,vw 3 a;, like, 

X,avca- to lose. 
Foresee, provide , irpc(3Xe'7re>. 
Meditate , {aeXetco, «?. aor. yica. 
Premeditate , apcpeXETtt , £5. 
Be willing, 9s'Xco. irr. 
Desire , &t6uu$ , et;- aor. y) ffa . 
Think , £oyjx£o{/.at. aor. cOw« 
Relieve, ?n<rE'jco. aor, ffa . 
Doubt , a^cptpaXXw. aor* dtxcpLgaXa* 

^JiSpeCt , U7T07TTEUCO. UTC07rT£'JO TOV 

av9p«7rov ? I suspect the Man , 
fofoirrEUGJAffci oil Sccyeivvi auro xa>cc', 
I suspect that this will turn out 
ill , or end badly. 

Observe remark, TrapaTYipw, et?. aor. 
Yi«a. part. pass. , yip.=vo?. 

Beware of, take care of, attend to, 
cpuXa^cp.at. aor.^Gy;v. Trpoas'^a). 

Know, -yvwpt^w. aor. aa. part. pass. 

Imagine , ©avTa&fAai. aor. ff Qy]v , 

part. pass. , ^^05. 
"Wish , eu^o^.au aor. euyjvifiviv. irr, 
Hope , sXtuCo. aor. ffa . 
Assure , p £ 3aio'vw. aor, wc-a- part 

pass, cojasvo?. 
Judge , xpi'vw. aor. V a- 
Conclude, infer, cufATCepaiW aor 

ava. part. pass. , a^lvo?. 
Conjecture , efoeeCto. aor. ca- part. 

pass, gjas'vo?. 
Besolve , determine , airctpaai&a. 

aor ca. part, pass , c^e'vo?. 
#?eign, aau.cvou.ai. Trpoffrtiouaai; sccai- 



To be irritable , irapawlpvepai. 

— be quiet, to calm, or compose 
oneself, ^u^afra. aor. ex. 

— be deceived, mistaken , Xav9o* 
vou.at. irr. 

Embroil, su.irepiS'euto. aor. aa. £M,irsp- 

<S'e6cu.ai. aor. Oyiv. part, pass., u,s'vo$. 
Envy, to be jealous , SyiXeuw , and 

^cryXsuw. aor.oa. cp9ov£>) ET-.aor.Yica, 

part pass. vijiivos. 
Hate, jxtcw, el?, aor. yxra. part. pass. 

v)f&sv&€< whence , {mot/it^s , V) 3 c'v , 

hateful odious, 
I am sorry , ^s aaxo^paiv&Tat. 
J like it , to vogiu.£uoj/.at.' u. apsa-si; 

I don't like it, <Hv jt'aps'aei. 
To be angry , fio£&|», aor, w <xa. 

part. pass. eufjuouivo?. 
Pout, sulk , jxavi'Co). aor, w«. part, 

pass. {j.avicr{j(.svGs» 
Quarrel dispute , ^aXo'vw. aor. o<j«; 
Offend , hurt , give pain, wucpaiVw. 

aor. act. ava- aor. pass. aOnv.part, 

pass. , atts've?. 
It goes against me, I find it hard, 

<5 , ucJtcX£uo^ai , aor. 8nv. 
I lament, X'jircup.at, ETorat , or Sofa. 

aor r.Qyjv. part, pass.", Xutcyiusvo? ? 

afflicted , £ £v Xunrarai ra a'crrpa , 

he grieves not about , does not 

regret the Money , Traparcovcij- 

pat', eujat , aor. e9v)v. 
Weary, tire, jtoupa^^ aor ffa . part. 

pass, cmevog a7co<^aivo) > act. neut. 

aor. irr. a5tt . part. pass. , d-nrcq-a- 

p.s'vo? , act. and neut. , I have 

tired my horse, arco'ca^* to aXcyo'v 

p.00. My Horse is tired, to dXcr/oy 



FINIS, 



i83 



The fdilowincf are errors that may mislead , and therefore 
Gu«ht to he noted by a learner. Some few others have been 
tin avoidable ; but they are such , or so circumstanced , that 
they can hardly, it is hoped , lead to a mistake, 



ERRATA. 

Page. Line, 

6 5 For U%k *ead Zx^k 

to 17 — (i-CU ~ {ACU 

tt 9 — Tf&S ' Tf sX l 

ib. 13 — to leasee ~~ to '<SWs 

ib. ib. — to e^oxe — ' to e^wtfs 

ib. 14 — ' tcj to 'ira — ' tcj -0 wa 

!2 22 — * toy to '77a ■— ~c\> to ira 

i5 1 —> i — tj 

3i 3o — tU — *U 

42 22 — eppt^a — - eponpx SeeP. 77 , 1. 15- 

54 23 — «Yp«<pcujjtacs — "ypawpoupx^e 

69 12 — ' 5>[/.e8a — w(asOx 

go 7 — sCcysvcia ca? — eu^evia <ra.; 

109 1 5 — t! va xau.w — ' Tt va xat&c* 

no 32 — ■ Figure 6 ought to be placed before « fVhen orav,» 

line 22. 
rr2 5 — ff/fcer say razt? « the latter » 

i3i 24 — incipient Vowel read incipient long Vowel. 

Chapter has, in references, been sometimes misnumbered, as at P. 4 2 
and 58 j three should , in such cases, be added to the number, 



g 441 

% . 




%-^V V^V V^>° 



;S5R- : ** v % '-SHE*' s*\ s «5Wf ** v % 3H 



^1 




• i*^ "«^^P» A^f - 

* «? ^. "VMS)?* AV "<>. • 















." .►* ■* 







jP-^ 



F* aV^ - 



:• «*. a* 



V 










'. V^*' 



• ^ ^ 



.* 






»♦>' .•••.. <s>. 






4 0-a 






Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
^~ 4. V Ofl Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 

o ^£- ^ V f %k Treatment Date: July 2006 

• £*W *°W PreservationTechnologies 



'Wm\v? ♦^ : ll3lf" ^'V ^W PreservationTechnologies 

V^N V ^ ^HflHKy^ 4 -V ^ "V^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESEBVATIOr 

*• • * * **\ ^ A *<VC»* *G^ V? "« 111 Thomson Park Drive 

' A> »e *t*6 -.^ Lit *^ Cranberry Township, PA 16066 






%s ' 






*t** a" 



A 






4? 



A w 9 ,l m 



° <0 A 









• ^V-fflBF.^ 




% ***** A <* *??7r % a g* ^ *••»• A 



... ^ 



"fav* : 



■»• 4.°-^ *: 



To° .«o 






















%<* 






..^.2i^.V ^>*»!k-i:..^ ^.ifife-V 









\. ^W?- 5 ^ 1 ^ : -SK»' /\ s wR- \^ 






F* .4 












• # ^ 






«,. A* * 



* 



w 









v * '•3Bf'^* , \ ; «5R-'.^ v \ '• 



%<?- 

j***. 
& % 






•o. •.; 



V<\.i^, % 



■ B 



.* *\ 










"^ ^ 






